#w 






ihuK% mf ®<i\x$xt$$. 



<&/>a./,. . "PC S.I 00 

t ^u^n 13.44 



UNITED STA1 




>F AMERICA. 



GOLIOT'S 

PROGRESSIVE 

FRENCH SCHOOL SERIES. 

A Complete Course of Study of the French Language, as it is Read, Written and Spoken. 
In 6 volumes, beautifully printed on fine paper, and bound to match. 



I. & II. 

COLLOT'S LEVIZAC'S 
FRENCH GRAMMAR AND 
EXERCISES. 

In this Grammar, the basis of which is 
Levizac's French Grammar, the valuable 
but ill-arranged contents of that work 
have been reduced to a natural order. 
Those parts of it which were either en- 
tirely out of place in a Grammar, or were 
too abstruse for the young Scholar, have 
been expunged; and the room thus ob- 
tained has been occupied by such improve- 
ments and modifications as have been re- 
cognized by the best modern authorities ; 
by a Table of ail ihe Irregular and De- 
fective Verbs in the French Language, 
conjugated in all the Tenses which are 
liable'to Irregularities; and by a Termi- 
riational Vocabulary, whereby, for the 
first time in any Grammar, and in the 
short space of 12 pages, tlie Gender of 
every French Noun may be promptly and 
certainly determined. 

The Exercises have also been greatly 
amplified, and carefully revised and cor- 
rected; and the Inductive Method, through- 
out the Grammar, and particularly in the 
Exercises, has been, as far as practicable, 
pursued. 

KEY TO THE EXER- 
CISES IN THE GRAM- 
MAR. 

This Key is intended to aid the Teacher 
*>.nd Parent, who may not be muster of the 
nicer difficulties of the French language ; 
find also the self-taught student. The 
Publishers hope that it will supply a de- 
ficiency which has long been felt; and be 
particularly useful in those large portions 
of the country where, from the scattered 
condition of the population, highly quali- 
fied French teachers cannot be obtained, 
or where the studies of the child are di- 
rected by the zealous and intelligent pa- 
rent. 

III. &, IV. 

COLLOT'S PRONOUNC- 
ING AND INTERLINEAR 
FRENCH READER. In 2 
vols, viz. ; 



vol.i. Collot's Pronouncing 
French Reader ; on a Plan of 
Pronunciation, New, Simple and 
Effective : being a course of Inter- 
esting and Instructive Lessons 
taken from the Works of the best 
French Prose Writers and Poets, 
preceded by Easy Fables. And, 

vol. n. Collot's Interlinear 
French Reader ; on Locke's 
Plan of Instruction : being a Key 
to " Collot's Pronouncing French 
Reader." 

These two volumes are to be used in con- 
junction. The one is devoted to Trans- 
lation, the other to Pronunciation: which 
arrangement is deemed an improvement 
on the ordinary mode of comprising the 
distinct and independent objects of study, 
Translation and Pronunciation, in the 
same Volume, and on the same Page. 

The Interlinear French Reader con- 
tains an Interlinear literal-and-free trans- 
lation of all the Prose in the Pronounc- 
ing French Reader, comprising about two- 
thirds of the latter volume. The Lessons 
commence with short and simple Fables, 
and proceed, by easy progression, through 
vnried selections from the finest Prose 
Writers in the French language. Funda- 
mental rules, to which frequent reference 
is made in the text, are placed at the end 
of the volume; while foot-notes give the 
literal meaning of all such words as can- 
not be rendered literally into English sense. 
As the pupil advances, these helps are 
gradually withdrawn, so that a knowledge 
of all that has preceded is requisite to a 
competent rehearsal of his lesson. 

The Pronouncing French Reader con- 
tains a system of Pronunciation, which is 
entirely new, and singularly simple and 
effective. It is believed to be the first at- 
tempt which has been made to communi- 
cate a knowledge of French pronuncia- 
tion on scientific principles; and it con- 
forms, as far as possible, by a Running 
Pronunciation at the head of the page, 
<fcc, to the plan which has been made 
familiar to every one in Walker's English 
Pronouncing Dictionary. This volume 
consists of Selections, both in Prose and 



COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH SCHOOL SERIES. 



Poetry : and is divided into Four Parts, 
to accommodate the progressive nature 
of the instructions on Pronunciation. The 
first three Parts consist entirely of Prose, 
and contain the whole of the text of which 
an interlinear translation 13 given in the 
Interlinear French Reader. The Fourth 
Part comprises a Selection of Extracts 
from the works of the best French Poets, 
preceded by a short Treatise on the Read- 
ing of French Poetry. To this Fourth 
Part there is no translation ; and the 
Treatise on Reading French Poetry, and 
the Notes, are given in French : as the 
pupil, when he has advanced thus far, is 
supposed and expected to be able to read 
French, assisted only by his Grammar 
and Dictionary. 

Collot's Pronouncing and Interlinear 
French Reader may, therefore, be said to 
enable a pupil, if he study with attention, 
to pronounce, read and understand any 
French which his teacher or his own 
taste may select for him ; although entire- 
ly ignorant of the language when he 
commenced them. 

V. & VI. 

COLLOT'S FRENCH 
DIALOGUES AND PHRA- 
SES, with an English Transla- 
tion : consisting of numerous Con- 
versations on Familiar Subjects, 
and a select Collection of Idioms 
and Proverbs. The whole calcu- 
lated to facilitate the study of the 
French Language : and especially 
the Art of Speaking it. And, 

COLLOT'S FRENCH 
ANECDOTES AND QUES- 
TIONS : consisting of Anecdotes, 
with Questions for Examination : 
Intended as a Reading, Reciting 
and Question Book for Schools ; 
and especially, in conjunction with 
" Collot's French Dialogues and 



I Phrases," as a Guide to French 
i Conversational Narration. 

These ConversationalfVencA Dialogues 
1 bring into use the ordinary colloquial lan- 
1 guage of polite society. A sustained 
j connection of idea, and the dramatic form 
in which they are cast, render them easy 
of acquisition. The pupil, when he has 
committed to memory ten or twelve of 
these Dialogues, will have made some 
! progress in expressing himself in French; 
j and will then call into play the Idioms 
I and Proverbs which he will find at the 
end of the volume, by introducing them, 
as occasion offers, in his attempts at origi- 
nal conversation. 

The pupil is now prepared for another 
step. Let him then take the volume of 
French Anecdotes and Questions, and 
make himself familiar wiib the incidents 
of one of the Anecdotes, without regard 
to the words in which it is narrated. He 
will now recite the anecdote to his 
Teacher, in the best French which he can 
command at the moment ; who wili aid 
him if embarrassed for want of a word. 
When the pupil has recited the anecdote, 
let the teacher ask him Questions on it in 
French, and require immediate answers to 
them in the same language. The Second 
Part of the volume consists of Questions 
prepared for this purpose. 

This course of study is to be con'inueii 
throughout the two volumes of Dialogues 
and Phrases, and of Anecdotes and Ques- 
tions ; and although the pupil may stum- 
ble a little at first, he will be surprised and 
delighted to find, ere long, that he has, 
almost insensibly, acquired the enviable 
accomplishment of speaking French. 

Such is the method of using these two 
volumes pursued by the Author; and his 
success under it has been most sienal and 
flattering. Those, however, who may 
find it inconvenient, will conform to the 
ordinary plan. By any mode of instruc- 
tion, these Dialogues mid Phrases wili 
be found decidedly preferable to uncon- 
nected Colloquial Phrases : and have been 
already extensively so used. The volume 
of Anecdotes and Questions has also been 
successfully introduced into Schools as a 
Reciting and Reading Book ; fur which, 
from the pleasing nature of the contents, 
it is well calculated. The Questions, 
under this mode of using the book, might 
be given as an exeicise, and written an- 
swers in the pupil's own French required. 



For a more detailed account of Collot's Progressive French School Se- 
ries; Critical Notices of the Press ; and Opinions of Professors and Teachers 
of the French Language in our Colleges and Schools, and of other Individuals 
of high authority : see" the Advertisement placed at the end of Collot's Levi- 
zac's French Grammar and Exercises. 

See also the Prefaces of each volume, for the best mode of using it in tuition. 



PUBLISHED BV 

Kay §■ Brother, Philadelphia; and C. H. Kay <$- Co., Pittsburgh. 

AKD FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS. 



PROGRESSIVE 



FRENCH GRAMMAR 



AND EXERCISES, 



ON THE BASIS OF 



LEVIZAC'S FRENCH GRAMMAR 



AND FURTHER COMPRISING, 



ON A PLAN ENTIRELY ORIGINAL, 



I. A Table of all the Irregular and 
Defective Verbs in the French Lan- 
guage, conjugated in such Tenses 
as are liable to Irregularities. And, 



II. A Terminational Vocabulary, 
comprised in Twelve Pages, where- 
by the Gender of every Noun may be 
promptly and certainly determined. 



BY A. G. COLLOT, 



PROFESSOR OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD, ENGLAND ; 

AUTHOR OF THE " PROGRESSIVE FRENCH SCHOOL SERIES ;" AND LATE 

TEACHER OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE IN PHILADELPHIA. 



/ 

PHILADELPHIA: 

JAMES KAY, JUN. & BROTHER, 179 MARKET STREET. 

PITTSBURGH:— C. H. KAY. 

1844. 






Entered according to the act of Congress, in the year 1644, by James 
Kay, Jun. & Brother, in the office of the clerk of the District Court of the 
United States in and for the Eastern District of Pennsvlvania. 



Printed and Bound by 
JAMES KAY, JUN. & BROTHER. 



PREFACE. 



The Author, in the preparation of this volume, owes 
much to Levizac's French Grammar, which he has assumed 
as its basis. The work of M. Levizac is characterized by 
so many excellencies, that it is much to be regretted that 
it has faults which materially detract from its usefulness. 
It is arranged with little regard to order, is extremely diffuse, 
and contains much matter which is either entirely out of 
place in a Grammar, or too philosophical for the tender 
mind of the youthful scholar. Besides which, it has 
treated the two most important objects of a French 
Grammar, viz. the Genders of Nouns, and the Verbs, the 
former superficially and unsatisfactorily, and the latter in 
a manner perplexing, and even erroneous. 

The Author has endeavoured to give proper arrange- 
ment to the valuable materials in Levizac's Grammar : he 
has omitted such portions of it as he deemed irrelevant, 
or above the comprehension of learners — at the same time 
that he has retained every thing of practical value ; and 
has introduced such improvements and corrections as 
were required by the decisions of the best modern authori- 
ties. He claims as his own exclusively, the Terminational 
Vocabulary of Genders ; the Table of the Irregular and 
Defective Verbs ; and large additions to and improvements 
in the Exercises. 

The object of the Terminational Vocabulary of 
Genders is to enable the scholar, by a method certain 
and rapid, to fix permanently in the memory, the Gen- 
ders of the French Nouns ; without a good knowledge 
of which, it is impossible to speak or write the French 
language with propriety. In the English language there 
are three genders, — which are called masculine, feminine 

(v) 



PREFACE. 



and neuter : under the first are classed all males, under 
the second all females, and under the third all inanimate 
things. The French have but two genders : the masculine 
and the feminine. It is as easy in French as in English 
to class the males and the females ; but when the pupil 
comes to inanimate things, a difficulty of great importance 
meets him. As the French have no neuter gender, they 
are obliged to make what would be neuter in English 
either masculine or feminine. A child learning French 
can see no reason why a chair or a table should be called 
feminine, or why a hinge or a nail should be termed mas- 
culine; and yet they are so. 

Many attempts have been made to furnish a system of 
rules to determine, either by signification, or by termina- 
tion, the genders of inanimate objects in French. But so 
perplexing and impracticable have they been found, that 
many eminent writers and teachers (among whom may 
be mentioned Boyer, the author of the French Dictionary, 
and the celebrated Cobbett, the author of the French 
Grammar) have recommended students, as the only me- 
thod of acquiring an adequate knowledge of the Genders 
of French Nouns, to go completely through the French 
dictionary, and copy out all the nouns, affixing the gender 
to each. An Herculean labour ! 

The author coincides in opinion with these eminent 
men, as to the entire insufficiency of every system of 
rules hitherto devised for acquiring a knowledge of the 
Genders ; but he has not deemed it possible that any pupil 
could spare the time to travel over so immense a volume 
as the French Dictionary, in pursuit of that knowledge. 
The author has therefore done it for him. He has pre- 
pared, from actual examination of the dictionary, an Al- 
phabetical Vocabulary of all the Masculine and Feminine 
Terminations in the French language ; and has placed in 
one Table all the Masculine, and in another all the Femi- 
nine Terminations, with tlie Exceptions in juxtaposition. 
The whole is comprised in the short space of twelve 
pages ; and by far the greater portion of the Terminations 
have none, or at most but two Exceptions. The Student 
has therefore presented to him. in small compass, a mass 



PREFACE. vii 



of knowledge which is entirely within the reach of a mind 
of the most ordinary ability ; and he will be inexcusable, 
should he fail to avail himself of it. 

The Table of Irregular and Defective Verbs is 
comprised in two Sub-Tables. The first contains a mo- 
del of every variety of Irregular or Defective verb, con- 
jugated in all the tenses which are liable to irregularities, 
and so arranged that the eye takes in each Verb at a 
glance. The second comprises all the remaining Irre- 
gular and Defective Verbs in the French language, with 
the name of the model verb of each, and the page at which 
that model will be found in the preceding sub-table. 

M. Levizac has divided the verbs of the second conju- 
gation into four, and those of the fourth conjugation into 
five branches, and, considering them all as regular, has 
given a model verb for each — whereby the one conju- 
gation has four, and the other five model verbs. This ar- 
rangement has been found, most perplexing to the young 
student ; and even to grown persons of sound judgment. 
The Author's plan has been to give only one verb as 
a model, in each of these conjugations ; and he has con- 
sidered as irregular all those verbs which do not conform 
to the model, and has accordingly placed them in the 
table of Irregular and Defective Verbs. The Author be- 
lieves that those engaged in tuition will best understand 
the value of this arrangement ; and he flatters himself that 
the simplicity, perspicuity and conciseness of his table of 
the Irregular and Defective Verbs will not pass unnoticed. 

The Author avails himself of the opportunity here af- 
forded him of urging on teachers to accustom their pupils 
to conjugate the verbs from the primitive tenses. These 
are but five in number; and as every other tense of the 
verb is derived from one of these, it is evident that Jive 
words will lead to the conjugation of the whole verb. 
This method, which is strictly inductive, will enable the 
pupil, from infallible premises, to guide himself through 
the intricacies of the French verb, a thorough knowledge 
of which, in the language of a popular writer, is one-third 
of the acquisition of the language. 



PREFACE. 



The Exercises have been made very copious; and ex- 
emplify, in a progressive order of difficulty, all the niceties 
of the French language. In many instances in these Ex- 
ercises, the English and French might have been made to 
conform more literally to each other; but it was deemed 
of importance to preserve the peculiarities of each lan- 
guage, so that the scholar, by comparing them, might 
acquire a practical familiarity with French idiomatic ex- 
pressions, and also learn how to express those of his own 
language in correct French.* Throughout the Exercises 
in the First Part, the genders of new nouns have been 
marked ; but in those of the Second Part, which treats of 
Syntax, the pupil is expected to ascertain the Genders by 
the Terminational Vocabulary already spoken of. 

Great pains have been taken to render this Grammar 
lucid in its typographical arrangements. In the table of 
the Irregular and Defective Verbs, the advantages which 
have been derived from attention, to this particular will be 
apparent at a glance. The conjugations of the regular 
verbs have been printed in a compact manner, in order 
that the learner might embrace each at one view. The 
simple tenses have been placed in the left, and their re- 
spective compound tenses in the right column, immedi- 
ately opposite to them ; and each person of a tense occupies 
but one line of a column. While, in other editions ot 
Levizac, the affirmative form of the verb avoir occupies 
seven pages ; the four forms of the same verb are given in 
this Grammar in four pages and a half. In the exercises, 
the lines are placed at proper distances apart; the words 
are separated from each other by a greater space than or- 
dinary ; and each English word or phrase is placed precisely 
above its corresponding French. All the Rules in the 
Grammar have been numbered ; and advantage has been 

* In the Author's " Progressive Ixterlixear French 
Reader," which is to be studied simultaneously with this Gram- 
mar, the Pupil is made familiar not only with the meaning of each 
idiomatic expression that occurs, but also of each word of which i: 
consists, and thus obtains information which will afford him mud) 
sistance in his preparation of these exercises. 



PREFACE. ix 



taken of this facility of reference, in the Exercises in the 
Second Part, to require the pupil to make his own appli- 
cation of each Rule, instead of applying it for him. 

Such explanations and instructions as are necessary for 
the use of the Grammar, have been given in Notes at the 
places where they are required. 

For the use of Teachers, Parents, and those who may 
be studying French without Instructor, the author has 
prepared a Key to the Exercises in this Grammar, 
which may be obtained from the Publishers of the Gram- 
mar, or other Booksellers. 

This Grammar and the Key terminate the Author's Se- 
ries of Elementary French School Books. The whole, in 
Srx Volumes, furnish a complete course of study of the 
French, both as a written and spoken language; and are 
believed to point out the means, by the shortest routes, 
whereby the Student may attain the object he has in view 
— the speedy and thorough acquisition of the elegant and 
useful accomplishments of speaking, reading and writing 
the French language. For an account of them, the reader 
is referred to the advertisement in front of this Grammar. 

This work has now assumed its permanent form ; and 
will not henceforth be subjected to alterations of any de- 
scription. 



CONTENTS. 



INTRODUCTION : being a Brief Explanation of the Parts 

of Speech , 15 

FRENCH GRAMMAR, 

FRENCH ALPHABET, with the Old and New Pronun- 

ciation 24 

FRENCH SOUNDS 25 

The Vowel Sounds 25 

The Diphthongs 26 

The Consonants 26 

ACCENTUATION AND PUNCTUATION 29 

GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 30 

Genders by Signification 30 

Masculine by Signification 31 

Feminine by Signification 31 

Genders by Termination 31 

Terminational Vocabulary •. 82 

Table of Masculine Terminations 32 

Table of Feminine Terminations 40 

List of ael the Nouns which are Masculine in one 

Signification and Feminine in another 45 

INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES 47 

Of the Article 47 

Of the Article, and the Prepositions a and de 48 

Of a and de, and the Demonstrative Adjective 49 

Of Elision 50 

Of the Words which are spelled alike in both Languages, 

or which differ only in their Terminations 51 

W 



PART I. 
THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 

CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN 53 

CHAPTER II. 

OF THE ARTICLE 55 

CHAPTER III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE 57 

Of the qualificative Adjective 58 

Of the Formation of the Feminine 61 

List of Adjectives with Irregular Feminines 63 

Of the Formation of the Plural 65 

Of the Determinative Adjective • • • • 66 

Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive 69 

Numbers : Cardinal, Ordinal, Collective, Adverbial, Distribu- 
tive and Proportional 70 

CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUN .'.... 72 

Section I. — Of the Personal Pronouns 72 

Section II. — Of the Possessive Pronouns 75 

Section III.— Of the Relative Pronouns 76 

Section IV. — Of the Absolute Pronouns 78 

Section V. — Of the Demonstrative Pronouns 79 

Section VI. — Of the Indefinite Pronouns 81 

CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB 82 

Op Conjugations 83 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Avoir 84 

1. Affirmative Form 84 

2. NegativeForm 85 

3. Interrogative Form 87 

4. Negative-and-Interrogative Form 88 

xi 



xii CONTENTS. 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Etre 90 

First Conjugation — in ER 93 

Observations on Verbs of the First Conjugation 95 

Second Conjugation — in IR 97 

Observations on Verbs of the Second Conjugation 98 

Third Conjugation— in OIR 100 

Remarks on the Third Conjugation 101 

Fourth Conjugation — in RE 102 

Of the Neuter Verbs 105 

Of the Pronominal Verbs 106 

Conjugation of the Pronominal Verb Se Lever 107 

1. Affirmative Form 107 

2. Negative Form 109 

3. Interrogative Form 109 

4. Negative-and-Interrogative Form 109 

Of the Passive Verbs Ill 

Of the Impersonal Verbs Ill 

Conjugation of tho Impersonal Verb Neiger 112 

Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb Y Avoir 113 

Of the Formation of Tenses 115 

Table of the Termination of the Simple Tenses of the Four 

Conjugations 116 

Op the Irregular and Defective Verbs 117 

Table of the Irregular and Defective Verbs — arranged ac- 
cording to their respective Conjugations 121 

List of all the Irregular and Defective Verbs in the French 
Language not contained in the foregoing Table — ar- 
ranged according to their respective Conjugations 133 

CHAPTER VI. 

OF THE PARTICIPLE 149 

Of the Participle Present 149 

Of the Participle Past. 151 

Of the Participle Past accompanied by the verb Etre 152 



CONTENTS. xiii 

Of the Participle Past accompanied by the verb Avoir, 

and followed or preceded by its Object Direct, or Indirect . 153 

Of the Participle Past of Impersonal Verbs 154 

Of the Participle Past of Pronominal Verbs 154 

CHAPTER VII. 

OF THE ADVERB 155 

CHAPTER VIII. 

OF THE PREPOSITION 158 

Of Prepositions of the First Class 159 

Of Prepositions of the Second Class 160 

Of Prepositions of the Third Class 160 

CHAPTER IX. 

OF THE CONJUNCTION 161 

Of Conjunctions of the First Class 161 

Of Conjunctions of the Second Class 1-62 

Of Conjunctions of the Third Class 163 

CHAPTER X. 

OF THE INTERJECTION 164 



PART IT. 

SYNTAX. ■ 

CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE 165 

CHAPTER II. 

OF THE ARTICLE 167 

CHAPTER III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE 170 

Of the Qualificative Adjective 1 70 

Of the Determinative Adjective ' 173 

CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUN 175 

Section I. — Of the Personal Pronouns 175 

Section II. — Of the Possessive Pronouns 180 



xiv CONTENTS. 

Section III. — Of the Relative Pronouns 181 

Section IV. — Of the Absolute Pronouns 182 

Section V. — Of the Demonstrative Pronouns ■ . . . . 183 

Section VI. — Of the Indefinite Pronouns 185 

CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB 188 

Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 188 

Regimen of Verbs 190 

Use of Moods and Tenses 193 

Of the Indicative and its Tenses 193 

Of the Conditional, and its Tenses 195 

Of the Imperative 195 

Of the Subjunctive, and its Tenses 1-95 

Of the Infinitive 197 

CHAPTER VI. 
OF THE PARTICIPLE 201 

CHAPTER VII. 
OF THE ADVERB 203 

CHAPTER VIII. 
OF THE PREPOSITION 205 

CHAPTER IX. 
OF THE CONJUNCTION Que 205 

PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

The Death of Adrastus Fenelon 206 

The Questions left by Minos Fenelon 210 

The Transmigrations of Indur Barbauld 214 



INTRODUCTION: 



A BRIEF EXPLANATION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 



Words are articulate sounds, which we make use of to 
express our ideas. There are, in French, ten kinds of 
words : namely, the Substantive or Noun, the Article, the 
Adjective, the Pronoun, the Verb, the Participle, the Adverb, 
the Preposition, the Conjunction, and the Interjection. 

Words, considered as sounds, are formed by Letters and 

Syllables- 
Letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants. The 

Vowels are ; a, e, i, o, w, y : the Consonants are \ b, c, d, 

/> gi h i h k i h ™"> n i #j & r, s, t, t>, a?, z. 

A Vowel is an articulate sound, that can be perfectly ut- 
tered without the help of any other sound. 

A Consonant is an articulate sound, which cannot be 
perfectly uttered without the help of a Vowel. 

A Syllable is a sound, either simple or compound, pro- 
nounced by a single impulse of the voice, and constituting 
a Word, or part of a Word : as, an, year 3 wn, one ; a-mi, 
friend. 

A Diphthong is a coalition of two sounds, which are 
uttered by a single impulse of the voice : as, Men, well ; 
cui, yes. 

(15) 



16 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

A word of One Syllable is termed a Monosyllable ; a 
word of Two Syllables, a Dissyllable ; a word of Three 
Syllables, a Trisyllable ; and a word of Four or more Syl- 
lables, a Polysyllable. 

A Sentence is an assemblage of Words, forming com- 
plete sense : as, Dieu est juste, God is just. 

Sentences are of two kinds : Simple, and Compound. 

A Simple Sentence has in it but one subject, one verb, 
and one object or attribute : as, la vie est courte y life is 
short. 

A Compound Sentence consists of two or more simple 
sentences connected together : as, Dieu reco?npensera les 
Ions, et punira les mediants; God will reward the good, 
and punish the wicked, 

The subject (nominative) is the thing or person chiefly 
spoken of; the verb expresses the action, affirmed or de- 
nied of it ; and the object (accusative) is the thing or per- 
son affected by such action. Thus, in the following sen- 
tence, Dieu punit les me chants, God punishes the wicked 
— God is the subject; the action that proceeds from God is 
affirmed by the verb punishes; and the object upon which 
it falls is the wicked. 

The Substantive, or Noun. The Substantive is a 
word which represents a person or a thing that exists in 
nature; as, homme, man ; arbre, tree; livre, book; or which 
has its existence in the mind ; as, vertu, virtue ; esperance, 
hope; courage, courage. 

There are two kinds of Substantives : the Substantive 
Proper, or proper name ; and the Substantive Common. 

The proper name is that which is applied to a particular 
person or thing : as, Jlnnibal, Paris. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 17 

The Substantive Common is that which belongs to a 
whole class of objects : as, arbre, tree. 

Number. There are two Numbers : the Singular, and 
the Plural. 

The Singular expresses but one object: as, une chaise, 
a chair; une table, a table. 

The Plural signifies more objects than one : as, des 
chaises, chairs ; des tables, tables. 

Gender. There are only two Genders : the Masculine, 
and the Feminine. 

The Masculine belongs to the male kind : as, un homme, 
a man ; un lion, a lion. 

The Feminine belongs to the female kind : as, une femme, 
a woman ; une lionne, a lioness. 

This distinction has, through imitation, been extended 
to all substantives : thus, un lime, a book, is masculine ; 
une chaise, a chair, is feminine. 

Cases. Cases express the different relations of one 
thing to another. 

To express these different relations, the Greeks and Ro- 
mans made use of different terminations of the substantive ; 
such as, ordo, the order, Pordre; ordinis, of the order, de 
Pordre; ordini, to the order, a Pordre, &c. The termi- 
nations thus varied are called cases; and all the nouns, 
which, in the variations of their cases, have the same end- 
ing, are called of the same declension. 

The French, English, Italian, and other modern lan- 
guages, do not admit of any variation in the terminations 
of their nouns ; and, consequently, the nouns of these lan- 
guages, having but one termination in the singular, and 
a* 2 



18 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

another in the plural, are supplied with prepositions pre- 
fixed : as, pierre, stone ; de pierre, of stone ; a la pierre, 
to the stone ; en pierre, in stone ; avec la pierre, with the 
stone. 

The Article. The Article is a word prefixed to sub- 
stantives, to determine the extent of their signification : as. 
le soleil luit, the sun shines. 

The French article is le, for the masculine singular; la, 
for the feminine singular ; and les, for the plural of both 
genders. 

The article is subject to Elision and Contraction. 

The Elision of the article, is the omitting of the e in le, 
and the a in la, when they precede a noun beginning with 
a vowel, or h mute : as, V argent, the money ; V histoire, 
the history. 

Contraction is the compression of two words into one. 
It takes place when the preposition a, or de, precedes the 
article, in the following cases : instead of putting de le be- 
fore a masculine singular, beginning with a consonant, or 
h aspirated, du must be employed ; instead of a le, au must 
be used ; and before the plural of both genders, de les is 
changed into des, and a les into aux: as, du roi, of the 
king ; au roi, to the king ; des rois, of the kings ; aux rois* 
to the kings. 

The Adjective. The Adjective is a word which ex- 
presses the quality of the substantive : as, bon pere, good 
father ; bonne mere, good mother. 

In French, the adjective takes the gender and number of 
the substantive to which it relates. 

The Pronoun. A Pronoun is a word used instead of 
a noun, to avoid the too frequent repetition of the noun : 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 19 

as, Pierre est sorti, il reviendra bientbt; Peter is out, he 
will soon return. 

There are several kinds of pronouns : as, the Personal, 
Possessive, Relative, Absolute, Demonstrative, and Inde- 
finite. 

The Verb. The Verb expresses the action, or the state 
of the subject : as, Dieu punira les mediants, God will 
punish the wicked ; ma sozur repose, my sister reposes. 

There are five kinds of Verbs : the Active, Passive, Neu- 
ter, Pronominal, and Impersonal. 

The Verb Active expresses an action performed by the 
subject, and has a regimen direct : as, f aime mon pere, I 
love my father. 

The Verb Passive expresses an action received by the 
subject : as, mon pere est aime de moi, my father is loved 
by me. 

The Verb Neuter expresses also an action, but has no 
direct regimen : as, je vais en Italie, I am going to Italy. 

The Pronominal Verb is that which is conjugated 
through all the tenses with two personal pronouns : as, je 
me jlatte, I flatter myself. 

The Impersonal Verb is used only in the third person 
singular : as, il pleut, it rains. 

The Verb has Numbers, Persons, Tenses, and Moods. 

There are two Numbers in Verbs; the Singular, and 
Plural : as, je chante, I sing ; nous chantons, we sing. 

There are three persons in each number. The first is 
the person who speaks : as, je pense, I think ; nous pen' 
sons, we think. 



20 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

The second is the person spoken to : as, tu penses, thou 
thinkest ; vous pensez, you think. 

The third is the person spoken of: as, il or elle pense, 
he or she thinks ; Us or elles pensent, they think. 

Tense is the distinction of time, and admits only of 
Three Parts : the Present, Past, and Future. 

The Past, and Future, being composed of many diffe- 
rent instants, admit of various degrees of anteriority and 
posteriority. The Present admits of no division. 

The Present represents an action or event as passing at 
the time in which it is mentioned : as, je vois, I see ; il 
vienty he comes. 

The Present Tense likewise expresses a character or 
quality at present existing : as, c' est un habile homme, he 
is an able man ; c' est une femme amiable, she is an amia- 
ble woman. 

In animated historical narrations, this tense is some- 
times substituted for the preterit : as, il envahit le terri- 
toire des paisibles habitants, fait un immense butin, qv? il 
partage entre ses soldats, 8$c. ; he invades the territory of 
the peaceable inhabitants, takes immense booty, which he 
divides amongst his soldiers, kc. 

There are Five Tenses to express the Past : the Imper- 
fect, Preterit-definite, Preterit-indefinite, Preterit-anterior, 
and Pluperfect. 

The Imperfect expresses a present, with respect to 
something past : as, f entrais au moment ou vous sortiez, 
1 came in at the moment you were going out. Or, it ex- 
presses something past, without fixing the time of its dura- 
tion : as, Cesar etait un habile general, Caesar was an able 
general. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 21 

The Preterit-definite marks that a thing took place at a 
urne completely past: as, p ecrivis hier a Rome, I wrote 
yesterday to Rome- 

The Preterit-indefinite expresses an action as having 
taken place at a time which is neither precise nor determi- 
nate: as, il m? a fait un vrai plaisir en venant me voir, he 
has given me Teal pleasure hy coming to see me. Or, at 
a time which is not absolutely past : as, p ai ecrit au- 
jourcPhui, I have written to-day. 

The Preterit-anterior expresses an action as having taken 
place just before another, at a time which is past: as, quand 
p eus lu, je partis; when 1 had read, I set out. 

The Pluperfect expresses one action as having taken 
place at any period antecedent to another action equally 
past : as, p avais jini quand vous vintes, I had finished 
when you came. 

The Future has two tenses: the Future-absolute, and 
Future-anterior. 

The Future-absolute expresses that an action will take 
place at a time which does not yet exist : as, f irai demain 
a la campagne, I shall go to-morrow to the country. 

The Future-anterior expresses an action that will take 
place at a time anterior to another action : as, quand p au- 
raijini,je sortirai; when I shall have done, I will go out. 
Or, to a time to come : as, p aurai Jini demain, I shall 
have done to-morrow. 

Mood consists in the change which the verb undergoes, 
to signify various intentions of the mind. 

There are five Moods : the Indicative, Conditional, Im- 
perative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive 

The Indicative marks the affirmation in a positive and 



22 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

absolute manner : as, f apprends, I am learning ; je voya- 
gerai, I will travel. As it comprehends the three divisions 
of time, its tenses, which are eight in number, have been 
above explained. 

The Conditional is the mood which affirms on condi- 
tions : as, je le ferais, si je pouvais; I would do it, if I 
could. 

The Imperative mood is used for commanding, exhort- 
ing, entreating, or reproving: as, sortez, get out; restons, 
let us stay. 

I The Subjunctive mood expresses a subordination to 

) what precedes : as, je voudrais qv? il lilt, I wish he would 

read. 



The Infinitive mood expresses a thing in a general and 
unlimited manner, without any distinction of number or 
person : as, agir, to act; etre craint, to be feared. 

The Participle. The Participle is a part of the verb, 
which partakes of the properties both of a verb and of an 
adjective : of a verb, as it has its signification and regimen ; 
of an adjective, as it expresses the quality of a person or 
thing. 

There are two participles : the Present, and the Past. 

The participle Present always terminates in ant: as ? 
Jinissant, finishing ; recevant, receiving. 

The participle Past has various terminations : as, Jinij 
finished ; regit, received, &c. 

The Adverb. The Adverb is a word which qualifies 
a verb, an adjective, or another adverb : as, il parle bien, 
he speaks well; il est tres eloquent, he is very eloquent ; 
il parle tres bien, he speaks very well. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 23 

The Preposition. Prepositions serve to connect 
words with one another, and to show the relation between 
them : as, il alia de Paris a Versailles, he went from Pa- 
ris to Versailles. 

The Conjunction- The Conjunction is a word which 
serves to connect words or sentences : as, Pierre et Jean 
rient, Peter and John laugh ; parlez pen et pensez bien, 
speak little and think well. 

The Interjection. Interjections are words which 
serve to express the sudd-en emotions of the soul : as, He- 
I las! alas! M! ah! Fi done! for shame ! 



24 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



FRENCH GRAMMAR. 



1. Grammar, in general, is the art of speaking and 
writing correctly. To speak, is to convey our thoughts 
by means of articulate sounds. To write, is to render 
those thoughts permanently visible by means of certain 
signs, or characters, called Letters; and their number, 
disposed in order, constitutes what is called the Alphabet. 

2. The letters of the French Alphabet are twenty-five, 
as in the first and second columns in the Table below : by 
the old pronunciation, they are named as in the third, anc 
by the new pronunciation, as in the fourth eolumm 



FRENCH ALPHABET. 



0. P. jv. p. 
A . . a ah .... ah 

B. .b bay. . ..be* 

C . . c say . . . .ke 

D. .d day. . .de 

E. .e a a 

F..f eff. ...fe 

G..g jay...ghe 

H. .h ahsh. .he 

I. . .i e e 

J -j .jee....je 

K..k kah...ke 

L...1 ell le 

M. .m emm. .me 



0. p. jr. P. 

N. .n enn. . .ne 

O. .o o. ,. . .o 

P ---P pay...pe 

Q. .q ku ke 

R. .r air re 

S. . . s ess .... se 

T..t tay te 

U. .u u ut 

V. .v vay ve 

X. .x eeks. . ..k.se 

Y. .y e-grec-e-gree 

Z. .z zed. . . .ze 



* In the new pronunciation, the letter e, after each consonant, is 
sounded like u in the English word sun. 

•j- There is no approximate sound of this letter in English. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



25 



FRENCH SOUNDS. 

3. The Simple, or Vowel Sounds, in the French lan- 
guage, are nineteen in number, as follows : 



THE VOWEL SOUNDS. 



French. 

a sounds like 



English. 
in bat. 
. . bar. 

. . sun. 

. . met. 



ai . . pair. 

e . . there. 

i •• f}g- 

ie . . field. 

o . . rob. 

o . . robe. 

has no standard in English. 



e 

i 

i 

o 
6 
u 

u 

eu 

ou sounds like oo in good. 

ou oo . . mood. 

an has no standard in English. 

in 

on 

un 



It is exemplified by 



French. 

face. 

age. 
C se, 
Ijenne. 

etait. 

pere. 

tete. 

pique. 

gite. 

robe. 

cote. 

d\i. 

mur. 

jedne. 

sons. 

vonte. 

sang-. 

/in. 

son. 

un. 



We see, from the above table, that seven sounds have 
no standard in the English language. 

The u can be obtained in the following manner. Ar- 
ticulate first the sound ee, as in eel ; then, close your lip:- 
a little, and articulate the sound of u. 

The sound it is the same in quality, but longer. 

The sound eu is nearly the same in quality as that of it 
in the English word sun, but longer and closer. 

An approximate to an may be found in the English 
word antique ; to in in length ; to on in long ; and tc uv 
in rung. These are termed the nasal sounds. 

B 



26 



COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



4. Y. This letter, when alone, or when preceded or 
followed by a consonant, is pronounced as simple i; 
except in pays, paysan, paysage, which are pronounced 
pe-is, pe-isan, pe-isage. Between two vowels, it is pro- 
nounced ii : as, balayer, to sweep ; nettoyer, to clean •, 
which are pronounced, as if spelled with ii, balaiier, 
nettoiier. See the " Pronouncing French Reader," Rule 12, 
p. 291. 

5. The Diphthongs, in the French language, are 
twenty-six in number. They are as follows : 



THE DIPHTHONGS. 



ia. ...exemplified in. . . .verbiage. 

ie assied. 

•£ J ie orniere. 

liai liaison. 

oi gloire. 

oi moine. 

A C oi decloitre. 

1 "£ ouai jouaient. 

oue enjoue. 

. C oin besoin. 

oin £ ouin tintouin. 

io Ethiopien. 

ien Z>ien. 

ian insouciante. 



lan 



iaii materianx. 



ien patience. 



ieu . . . .exemplified in ... . milieu. 

ieu curieux. 

ion intention. 

iou cachiowa. 

iu reliure. 

ouan louanges. 

oua lovable. 

oui rejouie. 

ua ?iuage. 

ue extenue. 

vie continuel. 

uai snait. 

uan remuant. 

ui autruu 

uin .Juin. 



ue 



6. THE CONSONANTS. 
B. This letter has the same sound as in English : as, 
tal, ball. It is always pronounced in the middle of 
words ; as, abdiquer : and at the end of proper names ; 
as, Job, Caleb, Moab : also in the words radoub, rumb ; t 
but not in plomb. J 

C Has the sound of k, before a, o, u, I, n, r, except < 
when it has a cedilla, in which case it sounds like s ; as. 
requ. It sounds like s before e, i and y. Ch has always 
the sound of sh, except when it is followed by a conso- 
nant j in which case it sounds like k: as, ichneumon. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 27 

D. Has the same sound as in English. It is always 
sounded in the middle of words : as, adverbe. It is 
likewise heard at the end of proper names : as, David, 
Alfred, &c. 

At the end of many words it sounds like /, when the 
following word begins with a vowel, or h mute : as, 
grand homme, which is pronounced grantome. 

F. Is sounded like the same letter in English : as, 
fleur, flower. It is sounded in all words ending in if. 

G. Has the hard sound of g in the English word go, 
before a, o, u ; as, gomme, gum : and the soft sound of s 
in pleasure, before e, i, y ; as, genie, genius. Gn, at the 
beginning of words, has always the hard sound of the same 
letters in the English word ignorant : as in gnomon. In 
the middle of words, gn has a liquid sound, nearly similar 
to that of ni in the English word onion. 

H. Is sounded with a guttural impulse, when aspi- 
rated ; as heros, hero : and when it is mute, has no use 
but that of showing the etymology of the word; as, 
honneur, honour. 

J. Has always the sound of s in pleasure : as, jon- 
glerie, juggling. 

K. Has always a hard sound, as in the English word 
king : as, kiosque, kiosk. 

L. Has two sounds. The first is precisely the same 
as I in the English word lily : as, lilas, lilac. The second 
is liquid ; and occurs when I at the end, or 11 in the 
middle, of words is preceded by i. It resembles the sound 
of the second i in the English word William : thus, 
pareil, pareiWe. Exception : when i begins a word, as in 
illustre, the 11 is never liquid. See further, Rules 3 and 13, 
"Pronouncing French Reader." 

M. Has the sound of the same letter in English : as, 



28 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

momie, mummy. Um is pronounced omm, in some words 
adopted from the Latin : as, centumvir, album. 

N. Has the sound of the English n : as, nonne, nun. 

P. Is sounded as in English : as, pourpre, purple. Ph 
has the sound of f: as, philosopher philosopher. 

Q. Has the sound of k in king : as, qualite, quality. 

R. Is sounded as in English, but much more strongly : 
as, riviere, river. It is always sounded at the end of 
words, after the vowels a, i, o, u. In substantives, adjec- 
tives and verbs ending in er, it is silent, unless it is fol- 
lowed by a word beginning with a vowel : as, le dernier 
outrage, the last work ; which is pronounced le dernie- 
r outrage. 

S. Has two sounds. The first is hard, as in the 
English word sister ; as, suspensif, suspensive : the second 
is soft, as in the English word please : as, raison, reason. 
It has uniformly the hard sound at the beginning of words; 
and the soft, between two vowels. Both sounds occur in 
saison, season. .S is mute before ch : as, schall, Schaff- 
house, &c. It is always sounded at the end of foreign 
proper names : as, Brutus, Protesilas, &c. In compound 
words it preserves the hard sound: as, parasol, parasol. 

T. Has two sounds : the first is hard, as in the Eng- 
lish word tit; the second soft, like c in cedar. Both 
sounds occur in construction. 

It is soft before i, connected with some other following 
vowel or vowels ; as, patience, action : except when it is 
immediately preceded by an s ; as, question. 

V. Has the same sound as in English : as, vivace, vi- 
vacious. This letter, when doubled, is represented by the 
character w, which is met with in some foreign words, 
and is always pronounced as a simple ; except in wist 
and wish, when it has the sound of the English w. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 29 

X. Has generally the sound of ks in axe : as, sexe, 
sex ; boxer, to box. Jn all words beginning with a?, or 
ex, followed by a vowel, it has the sound of gz : as, 
Xavier, exil. At the end of words it sounds like z, when 
followed by a word beginning with a vowel, or h mute ; 
as, beaux yeux, beautiful eyes ; dix hommes, ten men. 

Z. Has generally the sound of z in zone, or s in rose. 



Note. — The French and English words given as examples in the 
I foregoing table of " The Vowel Sounds," are used as standards, in 
the author's " Pronouncing French Reader." The same French 
words, together with those in the preceding table of "The Diph- 
thongs," and an example of every other sound of difficult pronuncia- 
tion in the French language, are introduced into a single short fable 
in that work ; to which the author begs leave respectfully to refer, as 
a practical and progressive introduction to French pronunciation, 
which may be considered complete, in every respect. 



ACCENTUATION AND PUNCTUATION. 

7. In reading, due attention should be paid to the Ac- 
cents and the Cedilla, to the Apostrophe, Diceresis, 
Hyphen, &c. 

8. There are three Accents. The acute ( ' ), never 
placed but on e : as, in bonte. 

9. The grave ( * ), placed over a, e, u: as in voila r 
proces, ou, 

10. The circumflex ( A ), placed over any long vowel : 
as in pldtre, reve, epttre, apotre, biiche. 

11. The Cedilla is a kind of comma, placed under c, 
! giving it the sound of s ? before a, o, u : as in fagade, 
I facon, recu. 

i. 



30 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH" 

12. The Apostrophe ( ' ) marks the suppression of a 
vowel before another vowel, or an h mute : as in V oiseau, 
V homme, s' il vient ; for le oiseau, le homme, si il vient. 

13. The Diceresis ( " ) is placed over the vowels e, i, 
u, to indicate that they are to be pronounced distinctly 
from the vowels by which they are accompanied. 

14. The Hyphen ( - ) is particularly used in connecting 
compound words ; as in belles-lettres, chefs-d? oeuvre, arc- 
en-ciel. 

15. All the other distinctive marks, as the Comma, 
Semicolon, Colon, Period, Interrogation, Admiration, 
Exclamation, Parenthesis, &c, are the same in the French 
as in the English language. 



GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 

It has already been stated (see Introduction, page 17 
ante), that there are only two genders in French, the mas- 
culine and feminine. Whatever is neuter in English must 
therefore belong to either the one or the other of these 
genders in French. Every attempt hitherto made to give 
a system of rules for distinguishing the genders of in- 
animate objects by their signification, has ended only in 
perplexing and harassing the learner. "They are so 
numerous," says Boyer, " so intricate, and liable to so 
many exceptions, that the best and easiest way is to learn 
them in the dictionary. 1 " 



16. GENDERS BY SIGNIFICATION. 

The following short general rules, which have few or 
no exceptions, and are of easy apprehension and applica- 
tion, will be practically very useful. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 31 

MASCULINE BY SIGNIFICATION. 

1. All the names of the days, months and seasons of 
the year : except mi, middle, is used before the name of a 
month, forming with it a compound word, when it makes 
it feminine : as, la mi-Juin, the middle of June. 

2. All objects to which we fancifully attribute the quali- 
ties of the male ; as, vainqueur, conqueror ; juge, judge ; 
genie, genius. 

3. The names of all metals, minerals and colours. 

4. The names of all mountains, except those chains 
which have no singular; the cardinal points; and the 
winds, except la bise, la tramontane, la brise, and les 
moassons* 

•5. Words denoting the language of a country : as, le 
Frangais, V lialien. 

6. All the words compounded of a verb and a substan- 
tive, even though the substantive by itself be feminine ; 
except garde-robe, wardrobe, which is feminine. 

7. And, when used substantively, all the ordinal, dis- 
tributive, and proportional numbers ; also adjectives, in- 
finitives of verbs, prepositions, adverbs, conjunctions, in- 
terjections; and even sentences: except la moitie, 

FEMININE BY SIGNIFICATION. 

I- The names of all the virtues ; except courage and 
merit e. 

2. The names of all the vices. 

3. All objects to which we attribute feminine qualities : 
as, lune, moon ; terre, earth, &c. 



17. GENDERS BY TERMINATION. 

The author, however, wishes the scholar mainly to rely 
on the Terminational Vocabulary, consisting of the 
two following Tables of Masculine and Feminine Termi- 
nations, which he has prepared, at great expense of time 
and labour, from the dictionary, with the express view of 



32 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH. 

furnishing a certain and universal method of determining 
the genders of nouns by their terminations. They should, 
therefore, be made a subject of attentive study ; and it will 
be well to commit to memory those endings which have 
few or no exceptions. 

To give an instance of the mode of using these Tables : 
let it be required to find the genders of the words vinai- 
gre and place. The scholar will look in the Table of 
Masculine Terminations, and find -aigre in it ; which tells 
him that vinaigre is masculine. He will next look for 
-ace in the same table, and not finding it there, will pro- 
ceed to the Table of Feminine Terminations, where he 
will find it, and of course thereby determine its gender to 
be feminine. It is scarcely necessary to say, that all the 
Exceptions in the Table of Masculine Terminations are 
feminine; and all those in the Table of Feminine Termi- 
nations are masculine. 



TERM1NATIONAL VOCABULARY. 

I. Masculine Terminations. 

TERrffl^ATIOKS. EXCEPTIONS 

-a sepia, bandora, talpa, falaca, vinula. 

-abe Souabe, syllabe. 

-able fable, table, etable. 

-abre cabre. 

ac None. 

-acle bernacle, deba.de, made. 

-acre nacre. 

-act None. 

-acte cataracte, dpacte. 

-adre escadre. 

-af. None. 

-age rage, image, ambages, saxifrage, passerage, cage, 

nage, plage. 

-agme None. 

-ai None- 

-aigle None. 

-aigre . . . <■ None, 

-ail None. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 33 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continued. 

TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-ain main. 

-air chair. 

-aire affaire, aire, glaire, paire, grammaire, chaire,^u'gu- 

laire, haire, and eleven names of plants. 

-ais None. 

-•ait None. 

-aitre None. 

-aix paix. 

-al None. 

-ale None. 

-alme scalme. 

-alque None. 

-alt None. 

-alte halte. 

-am None. 

-ambe jambe. 

-amble None. 

-ambre chambre, antichambre. 

-amme anagramme, epigrammc, flamme, oriflamme. 

-amp None. 

-amphre None. 

-an None. 

-anc None. 

-ancre ancre. 

-and None. 

-ang None. 

-ange .fange, fontange, frange, grange, lavange, Iosange, 

mesange, orange, parasange, phalange, ven- 

dange, vidange. 

-angle sangle. 

-anle None. 

-ant None. 

-antre None. 

-anvre None. 

-ao None. 

-ap None. 

-aphe epigraphe, epitapne, orthographe. 

-aps None. 

-aque attaque, baraque, caque, cardiaque, casaque, celia- 

que, claque, laque, maque, patraque, plaque, 

polaque, riqueraque, sandaraque, theriaque. 

-ar None. 

-arbre None. 

-arc None. 

-ard None. 

3 



34 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS- Continued. 
TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-are cithare, tare, fanfare, tiare. 

-arme alarme, arme, larme. 

-arque anasarque, parque, remarque. 

-arre bagarre, barre, carre, simarre. 

-ars None. 

-art hart, part, quotepart, plupa. 

-artre chartre, martre, dartre. 

-as None. 

-asme None. 

-aspe None. 

-asque basque, bourrasque, brasque, frasque. 

-ast None. 

-aste caste, haste. 

-astre None. 

-at None. 

-atre finatre. 

-an eau, peau. 

-aud None. 

-aume paume. 

-aut None. 

-aux chaux. 

-ave cave, bave, betterave, entraves, epaves, octave, rave, 

cassave, etrave, enclave, lave, architrave. 

-avre None. 

-ax None. 

-e pitie, moitie, amitie, inimitie. Words ending in 

-te are not included here : see -e, in the Table 

of Feminine Terminations. 

-ec None. 

-ecle None. 

-ect None. 

-ecte pandectes, secte. 

-ectre None. 

-ed None. 

-ede None. 

-edre No7ie. 

-ef. nef. 

-effle nefle. 

-ege allege. 

-egme None. 

-egne None. 

-egs None. 

-egue gregue. 

-eigle None. 

-eil None. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 35 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continued. 

TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-el None. 

-elfe None. 

-em None. 

-erne breme, creme, trireme, septieme (a sequence at 

piquet.) 

-emple None. 

-emps None. 

-en None. 

-ens None. 

-ent gent, dent. 

-entre None. 

-ep None. 

-epre None. 

-epte None. 

-eptre None. 

-er mer, cuiller. 

-ere None. 

-erele None. 

•erf. None. 

-ergue vergue. 

-erle perle. 

-erme berme, ferme. 

-ers None. 

-ert None. 

-ertre None. 

-es None. 

-est None. 

-este peste, sieste, soubvreveste, veste. 

-estre limestre. 

-et None. 

-etre guetre, fenetre. 

-eu None. 

-euble None. 

-euf None. 

-eul None. 

-eume None. 

-eune None. 

-euple None. 

-euque None. 

-eur There are sixty-seven feminines in eur, which 

express properties and qualities : as, laideur, 

hauteur, rougeur, &c. 

-eurre None. 

-eurt None. 

-eurtre None. 



36 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continued. 
TElOIIIfATIOUS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-eutre None. 

-eux None. 

-evre chevre, fievre, Ievre, plevre. 

-ex None. 

-exe None. 

-exte sexte. 

-ez None. 

-eze None. 

-i merci, fourmi, apres-midi, ammi, gagui, demi. 

-ibe None. 

-ible bible. 

-ibre fibre. 

-ic None. 

-ice avarice, cicatrice, cotice, epice, immondice, inter- 
stice, injustice, justice, lice, malice, matrice, 
milice, natice, notice, police, premice, varice, 
venefice ; and, of course, all the names that de- 
signate women : as, actrice, cantatrice, &c. 

-icle bernicle, beside, manicle, 

-ret None. 

-id None. 

-ide ride, bride, ides, egide, pyramide, cantharide, he- 

morroi'des, cycloi'de, cariatide, bastide, carotide, 
chrysalide, cissoi'de, conchoide, eneide, ephe- 
lides, ephemerides, epinyctides, heroide, nere- 
ide, parotide, rhomboi'de, ricinoide. 

-idre None. 

-if None. 

-iffre None. 

-ige lige, tige, volige. 

-igle None. 

-igme enigme. 

-igne guigne, ligne, vigne, consigne. 

-igre None. 

•il None. 

-ils pile, vigile, ile, bile, file, huile, tuile. 

-ilphe None. 

-ils None. 

-iltre None. 

Am None. 

-imbe None. 

-imbre None. 

-in None. 

-inc Nam. 

-inct None . 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 37 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continued. 
TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-indre None. 

-inge meninge. 

-inq None. 

-intre None. 

-inx None. 

-iple None. 

-ir None. 

.ire cire, satire, ire, Hegire. 

-irque None. 

-irse None. 

-irte None. 

-is vis, brebis, fleur de lis, chauve-souris. 

-isc None. 

-isme None. 

-isque bisque, brisque. 

•iste piste, batiste, liste, baliste. 

-isthme None. 

-istre None. 

-it nuit. 

-ithme None. 

_itre vitre, epitre, mitre, huitre. 

-ivre None. 

-ix perdrix. 

-o None. 

-ob None. X 

-obe robe. 

-oble None. j 

-obre None. 

-oc None. \ 

-ocle None. 

-ocre ocre. 

-od None. 

-ode - .commode, epode, methode, ode, pagode, spode. 

-of. None. 

-offre None. 

-oge epitoge, horloge, loge, toge. 

-ogme None. 

-ogue drogue, eglogue, vogue, synagogue, pirogue. 

-oi loi, foi, paroi. 

-oid None. 

-oif. None. 

-oil None. 

-oine Names of plants and stones with this termination 

are feminine. 
-oint None. 



38 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continued. 
TERMINATION'S. EXCEPTIONS. 

-air None. 

-oire foire, poire, moire, histoire, gloire, machoire, na- 

geoire, victoire, and all names indicating 
the power of holding or containing : as, ar- 
moire, ecritoire, &c. 

-ois fok. 

-oit None. 

-oitre None. 

-oivre None. 

-ol None. 

-olf. None. 

-om None. 

-omb None. 

-ombre ombre, penombre. 

-ome and -omme . .gomme, pomme. 

-omphe None. 

-ompte None. 

-on pamoison, prison, trahison, moisson, foison, gami- 

son, fagon, boisson, chanson, toison, rancon, 
legon, guerison. See -ion and -aison, in the Ta~ 
hie of Feminine Terminations. 

-onche conche, jonche. 

-onole petoncle. 

-ond None. 

-one anemone, annone, argemone, mangone, aumone, 

zone. 

-ongle None. 

-ongre None. 

-onstre None. 

-ont None. 

-onze None. 

-op None. 

-or None. 

-orbe None. 

-orche torche. 

-ord None. 

-ordre None. 

-ore mandragore, metaphore, aurore, pecore, amphore, 

plethore. 

-orps None. 

-ors None. 

-ort None. 

-os None. 

-ot dot 

-ou None. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 39 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Concluded. 

TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-oude soude. 

-oufle pantoufle. 

-ouffre None. 

-oug None. 

-ouge gouge. 

-oup None. 

-our cour. 

-ours None. 

-out None. 

-oux toux. 

-oxe None. 

-u glu, tribu, vertu. 

-ube jujube. 

-uc None. 

-ucre None. 

-ud None. 

-uf. None. 

-ufle None. 

-uge None. 

-uis None. 

-ul None. 

-um None. 

-un None. 

-unt None. 

-ur None. ' 

-urne urne. 

-us None. j 

-use None. 

-usele None. 

-uste None. 

-ustre None. 

-ut None. 

-ux None. 

-uxe None. 

-yge apophyge. 

-yme None. 

-ynx None. 

-ype None. 

-yphe iVbne. 

-yrse None. ' 

-yrte None. 

-yx .None. / 

< 

1 



40 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

n. FEMININE TERMINATIONS. 

TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

•ace espace. 

-ache gamaches. 

-ade stade, jade, grade. 

-afe parafe. 

-afle None. 

-afre cafre. 

-agne alpagne, bagne, pagne. 

-agre . . . „ cleragre, meleagre. 

-ague carague, gyrovague, ossifrague. 

-aie None. 

-aigne None. 

-aile baile. 

-aiile None. 

-aine domaine, Le Maine (a province of France.) 

-ainte None. 

-aise malaise, inesaise. 

-aison None. 

-aisse None. 

-aite None. 

-ale scandale, ovale, petale. 

-algue None. 

-alle intervalle. 

-alse None. 

-alve None. 

-ame amalgame, epithalame, hippopotame, vidame, 

blame, dictame. 

-ampe None. 

-ance ranee. 

anche dimanche. 

-ande multiplicande. 

-andre meandre, palixandre. 

-ane ane, crane, manes, organe, filigrane, arcane. 

-angue None. 

-anne None. 

-anque manque, saltinbanque. 

•anse None. 

-ante None.. 

-ape and -appe None. 

-arbe None. 

-arce None. 

-arche None. 

-arde pericarde. 

-arge large. 

-argne None. 






GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 41 

TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS— Continued. 
TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

•argue largue. 

-arne acame. 

-arpe None. 

-arse tarse. 

-arte None. 

-ase gymnase, Pegase, Caucase. 

-asse Parnasse. 

-ate and atte automate, Euphrate, stigmate. 

-aube None. 

-auche None. 

-aude None. 

-auge None. 

-aule saule. 

-aupe None. 

-ause None. 

-ausse None. 

-auve None. 

-axe axe. 

-e The feminine termination here meant is -te. 

The exceptions are: ete, traite, te, veloute, 
pate, cote, benedicite, aparte, arrete, comte, 
co mite. 

-ee musee, tropb.ee, hymenee, coryphee, scarabee. 

-ebre zebre. 

-ece None. 

-eche preche. 

-eigne peigne. 

-eille None. 

-eine None. 

-ele zele, modele. 

-elle libelle, vermicelle, isabelle. violoncelle. 

-empe None. 

-ence silence. 

-encre None. 

-ende dividende. 

-endre None. 

-ene alcaligene, amphisbene, epagomene, epicene, hy- 

drogene, molybdene, oxygene, paralipomenes, 
phalene, silene, tungsthene, chene, frene, pene, 
troene. } 

-enne renne. 

-ense None. 

-ente trente. ' ( 

-epe None. 

epse None. \ 

B~ 



,* * 



42 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS- Continued. 
TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-eque areque, cercopitheque. 

-erbe verbe. 

-erce commerce. 

-erche None. 

-ere cimetiere, viscere, mystere, cautere, adultere, ul- 
cere, cratere, caractere, hemisphere, monastere, 
ministere, clystere, mesentere, planisphere, 
presbytere, quadrilatere, reverbere, somnifere, 
stere. 

-erge cierge. 

-erne averne, cerne, malgouverne, quaterne, terne. 

-erre cimeterre, verre, parterre, tonnerre, paratonnerre, 

lierre. 

-erse None. 

-erte None. 

-erve None. 

-ese diese, diocese, manganese. 

-esque fresque. 

-esse None. 

-ete and -ette amulette, squelette, casse-noisette, and a few other 

compound words. 

-eue None. 

-eule None. 

-eure None. 

-euse None. 

-eute None. 

-euve fleuve. 

-euvre None. 

-eve reve. 

-iche acrosriche, caniche, fetiche, hemistiche, stokfiche. 

-ie genie, perihelie, parapluie, pavie, incendie. 

-iffe None. 

-igue None. 

-ille calville, codicille, codille, mille, spadille, trille, 

vaudeville. 

-ime abime, centime, crime, regime, decime, grime, 

millesime, mim " sublime. 

-ince None. 

-inde inde, Pinde. 

-ine None. 

-ingle None. 

-mgue elingue. 

-inte None. 

-ion pion, septentrion, croupion, scorpion, farrion, ca- 
mion, scion, bastion, bestion, gabion, gaiion, 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 43 

TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS— Continued. 
TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

talion, million, billion, trillion, lampion, brim- 

borion, alerion, alcyon, horion, morion, orion. 

-ipe participe, principe. 

-ipse None. 

-ique portique, topique tropique, cantique, distique, 

emetique, narcotique, viatique. 

-ise None. 

-isse, None. 

-ite merite, demerite, gite, site, rite, satellite, areopa- 

gite. 

-ive convive, qui-vive. 

-obe globe, lobe. 

-oce negoce, sacerdoce. 

-oche coche, medianoche, proche, reproche. 

-ogne None. 

-oie foie. 

-oile None. 

-oise None. 

-oisse None. 

-oite None. 

-oix choix. 

-ole and -olle capitole, role, monopole, pole, protocole, symbole, 

controle. 

-olte None. 

-ombe lombes, rhombe. 

-ompe None. 

-once quinconce. 

-onde monde 

-onge mensonge, songe. 

-ongue None. 

-onne None. 

-onte conte. 

-ontre None. 

-°P e baroscope, engyscope, horoscope, meteoroscope, 

microscope, telescope. 

-ophe None. 

■°<l ue colloque, engastriloque, soliloque, ventriloque. 

-orce divorce. 

"° rde exorde, monocorde, pentacorde, tetracorde. 

-orge None. 

-orme corme, orme, 

-° r ne capricorne, cromorne. 

-orte cloporte. 

-ose None. 

■° ss e carrosse, colosse. 



44 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS— Concluded. 
TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-oste anagnoste, perioste. 

-ote and -otte antidote, vote, tire-botte. 

-ouche piedouche. 

-oucle None. 

-oudre None. 

•oue JSone. 

-ouffe bouffe. 

-ouille None. 

-oule None. 

-oulpe None. 

-oupe groupe. 

-ouque None. 

-ourbe None. 

-ource None. 

-ourde None. 

-oure None. 

-ourme None. 

-ourse None. 

-ouse None. 

-ousse None. 

-oute doute. 

-outre coutre. 

-uble None. 

-uce prepuce. 

-uche None. 

-ude prelude. 

-ue None. 

-ule and -ulle adminicule, animalcule, conciliabule,conventicuIe, 

corpuscule, crepuscule, fascicule, galericule, 
globule, indicule, lobule, manipule, matricule, 
module, monocule. monticule, opuscule, pecule, 
pedicule, perpendicule, preambule, prostibule, 
regule, ridicule, scrupule, vehicule, ventricule, 
vestibule, 

-ulte culte, tumulte. 

-ume apostume, bitume, costume, legume, rhume. 

-une None. 

-upe None. 

-uque None. 

-ure augure, parjure, murmure, tellure, mercure, colure. 

-use None. 

-ute and -utte parachute. 

-uve None. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



45 



18. There are some nouns which are masculine in one 
signification, and feminine in another : thus, livre^ a book, 
is masculine, while livre, a pound weight, is feminine. 
These have not been included in the foregoing Rules and 
Tables : and are as follow : 

LIST OF ALL THE NOUNS WHICH ARE MASCULINE 
IN ONE SIGNIFICATION, AND FEMININE IN AN- 
OTHER. 



MASCULINE. 

aide assistant 

aigle eagle 

•amour love, affection 

aune alder-tree 

barbe Barbary horse 

foarde poet 

Basque Biscay an 

berce bird 

braque • • • -setting dog 

capre privateer 

caraque cocoa 

carpe wrist 

cartouche ornament in designing 

■ooche passage-boat 

couple a man and his wife 

crdpe mourning 

critique • • • a critic 

device delight 

enfant male child 

enseigne officer 

pxemple example 

faux -falsehood 

fin chief point 

ftiilicule gall-bladder 

forfit gimlet 

fendre tun-vessel, a great warrior 

fourbe impostor 

garde a guardsman 

greffe 4 register 

gueules, pi. gules in heraldry 

guide guide 

haute-paye soldier in extra pay 

heliotrope -sun-flower 

hymne chauitt of the ancients 

larves, pi. - evil spirits 

litre measure for liquids 

iivre book 

manche handle 

manoeuvre bricklayer* s man 

matamore boaster 

m&noire bill, memoir 

mire- boar five years old 

mode mood, system 

sn&e vier, dyke 



FEMININE. 

aide « help 

aigle standard 

amours, pi. intrigues of gallantry 

aune ell 

barbe t beard 

barde slice of bacon 

basque skirt 

berce a plant 

braques, pi. claws of a shellfish 

capre caper, a pickle 

caraque a kind of ship 

carpe carp 

cartouche cartridge 

coche old sow 

couple a brace, a pair 

crepe pancake 

critique criticism 

delices delights 

enfant female child 

enseigne flag 

exemple writing copy 

faux scythe 

fin end 

follicule seed-vessel in plants 

foret -forest 

foudre thunderbolt 

fourbe knavery, cheat 

garde defence 

grefie graft 

gueule the jaws of a beast 

guide rein 

haute-paye extra-pay 

heliotrope spotted precious stone 

hymne Christian hymn 

larve worm, grub 

litre- -mourning hangings of churches 
livre- - • pound weight, piece of money 

manche sleeve, channel 

manoeuvre manoeuvre 

matamore slave-prison 

memoire memory 

< mire aim, the button 

\ on the barrel of a gun to take aim by 

mode -fashion, custom 

mole -false idea 



46 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



MASCULINE. 

mort corpse, dead man 

inoufle set of pulleys 

moule model, pattern 

mousse ship boy 

oeuvre action, loork 

ombre 'game at cards 

orge monde" peeled barley 

orgue organ 

page page, attendant 

paillasse theatrical clown 

palme measure of length 

panache -plume 

pantomime -pantomime player 

parallele comparison 

pendule pendulum 

periode height 

pique spade at cards 

pivoine a kind of smpe 

plane -plane-tree 

platine platina 

piinthe squared body of soldiers 

poele stove 

Polacre a Polish gentleman 

ponte gambler 

poste station, office 

pourpre purple colour, purple fever 

pretexte pretence 

pupille male pupil 

quadrille game 

regale organ-pipe 

relache relaxation 

remise hackney coach 

eerpentaire constellation 

smople vert in heraldry 

solde balance of an account 

somme sleep, nap 

souris smile 

tour turn, trick 

triomphe triumph, victory 

trompette trumpeter 

vague empty space 

vase rase 

voile Mil 



nxnrm. 

mort - death 

moufle mitten 

moule shell fish 

mousse • • • - moss, froth 

ceuvre lit era ry work 

ombre shadoic, ghost 

orge---» barley 

orgues, pi. vrgans 

page -T^ge in a book 

paillasse mattrass 

palrne advantage 

panache pea-hen 

pantomime pantomime 

parallele- - • parallel line 

pendule clock 

periode- • • •• epoch, period 

pique spear 

pivoine -peony, a plant 

plane -ca rpenter's tool 

platine -plates of a watch 

piinthe — -plinth in architecture 

poele - -frying-pan 

polacre -polacca. 

ponte — • • -laying of eggs 

poste postoffice, the mail 

pourpre- ■ purple dye, badge of royalty 

pretexte- - - - ancient Roman dress 

pupille - the apple of the eye 

qua drill e.'roop of horse in a tournament 
regale- -the holding a vacant bishopric 

relache -the touching at a seaport 

remise coach-house 

serpentaire dragonicort 

sinople anemomj 

solde pay of a soldier 

somme sum of money 

souris mouse 

tour tower 

triomphe game at cards 

trompette trumpet 

vague wave 

vase slime 

voile -saii 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 47 



INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES. 

JVotc— The five following; Exercises are intended to be introductory to those 
which follow them; and should therefore be well understood and remem- 
bered by the learner. He will bear in mind that he is expected to apply all 
the knowledge, and acquaintance with words, which he has obtained in pre- 
vious Exercises, to those which succeed ; as they are all progressive in their 
construction, and lead practically, and by almost imperceptible advances, from 
the easy to the difficult. 

19. The learner is to render the English definite article 
the, in the singular, by 

le, before a noun masculine : as, le livre, the book; 
la, before a noun feminine: as, la rue, the street; and 
/', before a noun of either gender, beginning with a vowel or h 
mute : as, V arae, the soul ; /' histoire, the history ; 

and in the plural, by, 

les, before nouns of either gender: as, les Iivres, the books; les 
rues, the streets. 

20. A, or an, is to be rendered by 

un, before a noun masculine: as, un horn me, a man ; and 
une, before a noun feminine: as, une femme, a woman. 

EXERCISE I.* 

The wood. The forest. The houses. The men. The court. 

bois, to. foret, f. maisons homrnes cour,/. 

The foot. The arms. The room. The garden. The windows. 

pied,m. bras chambre, /. jardin, m. fenetrea 

A history. A novel. A foreigner. A walk. A day. 

histoire, /. roman, m. Stranger, to. promenade, /. jour, m. 

A night. The sun. The moon. The stars. A body. A card. 

nuit,/. soleil, m. lune,/. erodes corps, to. carte,/. 

A crown. 

£cu, TO. H 

21. The prepositions of and from are rendered by &e\ 
to and at by a ; and when followed by the article, thus : 

* In the following Exercise, and wherever they may occur 
throughout the grammar, m. stands for masculine, f. for feminine, s. 
for singular, pi. for plural, art. for article, h asp. for h aspirated, 
&c. &c. The initial h, of all words in the Exercises which are not 
preceded or followed by h asp., will be considered by the scholar a* 
mute. 



48 



COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



of the 

and 

from the, 

by 



to the 

and 
at the, 

by 



^du, before a noun masculine singular beginning with 
a consonant or h aspirated : as, du pare, of the park ; 
de la, before a noun fern, sing-, beginning with a con- 
sonant or h aspirated : as, de la riviere, of the river; 
de V , before a noun singular of either gender, beginning 
with a vowel or h mute: as, de V esprit, of the mind; 
des, before any noun in the plural : as, des plumes, of 
v^ the pens. 

au, before a noun masculine singular beginning with a 

consonant or h aspirated: as, au chirurgien, to the 

surgeon ; 
a la, before a noun feminine singular beginning with a 

consonant or h aspirated: as, a la boite. to the box; 
a r, before a noun singular of either gender beginning 

with a vowel or h mute : as, a F ami, to the friend ; 
aux, before any noun in the plural: as, aux lois, to the 

laws. 



22. And when these prepositions are followed by a 
or an, thus ; 

of a fcl? un, before a noun masculine: as, (T un jour, of a 

and J day ; 

from a, \ d' tine, before a noun feminine : as, a" une nuit, of a 

by V. night. 

to a fa un, before a noun masculine : as, d un couteau, to 

and J a knife ; 

at a, \ a une, before a noun feminine : as, a une fourchette, to 

by L a f° r k' 



EXERCISE II. 

The palace of the king. Of the queen. Of the man. Of the 

palais, m. roi reine homme 

book. To the chair. To the arm-chair. To the hands. To the 

livre, m. chaise, /. fauteuil, m. mains 

fingers. From a balcony. From a window. Of a prince. To a 

doigta balcon, m. fenetre,/. prince 

princess. Of the gardens. Of the evening. To the courtiers, 

princesse jardins soir. m. courtisans 
Of a table. To the master. To a lady. Of the soul. Of the 

table,/. maitre dame ame,/. 
sheep. To a ram. Of the shepherds, 
brebis, /. b£lier bergers 

23. These same prepositions, when followed by the 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 49 

possessive adjectives my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, and 
their, are rendered thus : 

s. m. s. f. pi. m. <$• /. 

of and from my "} rde mon ma mes 

thy . - ton ta tes 

Ms, her, its ! , J .- son sa ses 

our f I * • notre notre nos 

your I . - votre votre vos 

their J \_. . leur Ieur Ieurs 

to and at my ? . C a mon ma mes 

&c. &c 5 C <^ c * & c * & c « 

24. It must be observed here, that possessive adjec- 
tives, in French, always agree in gender and number with 
the object possessed ; and not with the possessor, as in 
English ; for which reason they must always be repeated 
before eveiy noun. 

25. Thus, speaking of a lady's parents, the English 
say, her father and mother; while the French express the 
same by, son pere et sa mere. In the English example, 
her agrees with lady, the possessor ; and although it may 
be, scarcely ever is repeated. But in the French, as we 
have said, the possessive adjectives agree with the objects 
possessed, in this case pere and mere ; which being of 
different genders, obviously require correspondent genders 
in the possessive adjectives prefixed to therm Such is the 
reason of a rule which has been extended so as to embrace 
nouns of similar gender. 

26. The prepositions of and from, to and at, when 
followed by the demonstrative adjectives this or that, these 
or those, must be rendered thus : 

^ce, before a noun masculine begin- 
ning with a consonant or h aspi- 
rated : as, de ce lieu, of that place ; 
cet, before a noun masculine begin- 
ning with a vowel or h mute ; as, 
a cet homtne, to this man ; 
cette, before a noun feminine : as, a 
\_ cette femme, to this woman. 

- , r. ., .j , , fbefore nouns plural of either 

of and from these or those, by de ces, , r , 

J J J gender : as, de ces portes. 

4 2 , ,,) ., , v 1 of these doors a ces sou- 

to and at these or those, by a ces, ^ ^ to thege &hQ ^ 

C 4 



of ani from this or that, by de 
to and at this or that, by a 



50 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

EXERCISE III. 

Of my clothes. Of thy handkerchief. Of his pocket. Of your 

habits. mouchoir, m. poche, f. 

letters. Of our treasure. To their house. Of this steeple. Of that 
lettres. tremor, m. maison, f. clocher, m. 

hero. Of this tower. Of these models. Of my sister. To your 
h asp. h£ros. tour, /. modeies. so3ur. 

relations. The top of this mountain. To my friend. Of these 
parens. sommet, m. montagne, /. ami, m. 

pleasures. To our duties. To their connexions. Of his acquaint- 
plaisirs. devoirs. liaisons. connais- 

ances. To my neighbours, 
sancee. voisins. 

27. The Apostrophe (') marks, we have said, page 
30, the suppression of a vowel, before another vowel, or 
an h mute. 

28. This suppression is called elision. A, e, i are the 
only vowels liable to be thus cut off. Of the suppression 
of the latter of the three, but two instances occur, viz. in 
the conjunction si, before the pronoun singular and plural, 
il, Us : thus, s' il, s' Us. 

29. The a is suppressed only in la, feminine, both 
when an article and a pronoun. 

30. The elision of e occurs in the masculine article and 
pronoun le, and also in many other monosyllables, such 
as,je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que, and in the compounds of 
yue, such as, parceque, quoique, &.c. 

31. It is allowable, either to retrench, or retain the 
final e of the preposition entre, between, among, when it 
precedes the pronouns eux, elles and autre s ; but it is 
always suppressed in the following compound words : 
entr'acte, an interlude ; s'entr'aider, to help one another; 
entr'ouir, to hear imperfectly ; entr'ouvrir, to half open. 

EXERCISE IV.* 

The soul. The heroine. The mind. He 2 loves 'him. She -loves 
ame,/. heroine. esprit, m. II aime le. elle aime 

* The learner will perceive small figures, ', z , 3 , &c. placed fre- 
quently before English words, in these Exercises, He will understand 
by these figures, that in writing his Exercises, he is to place the French 



GRAMMAR AND EXERGISES. 51 

'her. I love this man. You do not 2 understand 'me. He 2 esteems 
la. j e homme. Vous — * ne entendez pas me. e3time 

'thee. He goes away. It was the 2 golden 'age. Do not go 

te. se en-va. Ce etait de or age. — ne allez pas 

there. If he comes. If they please. What has he said 1 Till 

la. Si vient. Si veulent. Que a-t- dit ? Jusque era 

night. Though he says. Since he 2 knows 'him. When he 2 saw 
soir. Quoique dise. Puisque connait le. Lorsque vit 
'them. Between them. Some body is come. I have 2 done 'nothing. 

les. Entre eux. Quelque un est venu. Ne ai fait rien. 
He loves nobody. He 2 has 3 never 4 seen 'it. 
ne Ne a jamais vu. 

32. There are many words which are alike in both 
languages, and others which differ only in their termina- 
tion. The words which are perfectly alike, are those 
particularly, which have the following terminations : viz. 
in al, Me, ace, ance, ence, ice, acle, ade, age, ege, ge, ule, 
He, ine, ion, ant and ent. 

33. Many other words require only a change of termi- 
nation, as follows : 



English. French. 


English. French. 


-gy into -gie, 
-ary .... -aire, 
-ory .... -oire, 
-cy .... -ce, 
-ty ....-te, 


as energy, energie. 
. . military, militaire. 
. . glory, gloire. 
. . clemency, clemence. 
. . beauty, beaute. 


-Otis -eux, 


. . dangerous, dangereux. 


-our -eur, 


. . favour, faveur. 


-or eur, 


. . error, erreur. 


-me -in, 


. . clandestine, clandestin 


-ive -if, 

-ry .... -rie, 


. . expressive, expressif. 
. . fury, furie. 



words in the order indicated by the figures ; as the order of arrange- 
ment of words in the French language, frequently differs from that 
proper to the English. Thus, the expression, a ^mischievous } old 
2 monkey, is to be rendered into French, arranged as follows : un vieux 
singe malin ; which, it will be observed, is conformable to the order 
of the figures preceding the English words. Occasionally, however, 
for convenience sake, these small figures will precede the French 
words: in which case, also, the words will of course be arranged as 
indicated by the figures. 

* This sign, — , indicates that the English word under which it is 
placed, requires no corresponding word in the French. 



English. 


French 


dy . 


. . . -die, 


sty . 


. . . -stie, 



52 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

English. French. 

. . 'perfidy, perfidie. 
. . modesty, modestie. 

JV. B. Adjectives in eux, if, in, make their feminines, 
respectively, in euse, ive, ine ; in ant, ent. and al, take e 
mute. 

EXERCISE V. 

The beauty of that fable. The horror of vice, the utility of 

/. /. /. art. m. f. art. 

science. The atrocity of this action. The simplicity of that machine. 

/• /• /• /• /• 

An 2 audacious Conspirator. The absurdity of that opinion. The 

m. f. f. 

2 military Evolutions. An industrious Nation. An important 

/• 
victory. An 2 alimentary pension. A 2 dangerous 'animal. A 

/. /• m. 

2 famous 'general. His 2 constant 'generosity. His fidelity is 

/• /• 

indubitable. Your clemency is admirable. The destruction of his 

/• ' /• 

fortune was the consequence of his temerity. She is very scrupu- 

/. fut /. /. 

lous. This history is incontestable. Your facility is prodigious. 

/• /• 

His perfidy is odious. The sublimity of his sentiments is still 

/• /• 

preferable to the energy of his expressions. This instrument is not 

/. *. 

harmonious. The prosperity of the wicked is not durable. Your 

/• 
2 insidious 'presents are not acceptable. His memory is truly extra- 
m. sont f. 

ordinary. It was a great favour. His modesty is sincere. It was a 

/• /• 

2 brutal, 3 but 4 prudent 'action. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



PART I 



CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN. 
See Introduction, p. 16. 

34. The plural, in French, is generally formed, as in 
English, by adding an s to the singular : as, 

sing: plur. 

le president, the president ,• les presidents, the presidents. 
un ange, an angel ; des anges, some angels. 

35. Exceptions. 1. Substantives singular, ending m 
5, x or z, remain unalterable : as, 

sing. plur. 

le fils, the son ; les fils, the sons. 
la voix, the voice ; les voix, the voices. 
le nez, the nose ; les nez, the nos-ss. 

36. 2. Nouns ending in au or ew, take an x : as, 

sing. plur. 

bateau, boat; bateaux, boats. 
feu, Jire,- feux, fires. 

37. 3. Substantives ending in aZ, are changed into 
aux : as, 

sing. plur. 

cheval, horse,- cbevaux, hors-es. 

hopital, hospital; hopitaux, hospitals. 

38. 4. The t, in polysyllables ending in ant or ent, is 
dropped or retained at pleasure : as, 

sing. plur. 

diamant, diamond; diamans, diamond,' 
appartement, apartment ; appartemens, apartme 

39. But monosyllables retain the t : as, 

sing. plur. 

gant, glove ; gants, gloves. 

dent, tooth ; dents, teeth. 



54 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



40. Remarks. 1. The substantives clwu. caillou, 
bijou, genou, liibou and joujou, take x, and make choux, 
&c. 

41. 2. The substantives bal, ca.l, pal, regal, carnaval, 
follow the general rule, simply taking s. 

42. 3. The substantives bail, sous-bail, corail, email, 
soupirail, vantail, ventail, change ail into aux, and make 
baux, &c. Jlil, garlic, makes aulx ; betail, cattle, makes 
bestiaux ; bercail, sheepfold, has no plural. 

43. 4. The four following have two plurals : 

fvjork, makes travaux ; 
travail J a ^ rave ( w i ln farriers), makes travails ; 

j occupation of a minister with a sovereign, makes tra- 
t_ vails. 

filie tester of a bed, makes ciels de lit ; 

ciel J ^ e ft rst ^ °f sione * n a Q uarr y-> ma ^ s ciel 3 de cax " 
' ] rieres ; 

{.sky, heaven, makes cieux. 

•i 5 e # e ' ma " :es yetix ; 
1 i an oval window, makes ceils de bceuf. 

.. , C an cestor, makes aieux; 
' (_ grandfather, makes ai'euls. 

EXERCISE VI. 

The flowers of the gardens. The niceties of the languages. The 

fleur jardin. delicatesse langue. 

palaces of the kings. The woods of these countries. The walnuts 
palais roi. bois pays. noix 

of their orchards. The pictures of those painters. The feathers of 

verger. tableau peintre. plume 

these birds. The melody of their voices. The gods of the pagans. 

oiseau. melodie voix. dieu pa'ien. 

The jewels of my sisters. The cabbages of our gardens. These 
bijou sceur. cbou jardin. 

2 charming 'places. 1 he horses of my stables. The fans of these 

charmant lieu. cheval £curie. eventail 

ladies. The front-gates of those churches. The actions of my 

dame. portail . £glise. 

ancestors. The evils of this life. The victories of those generals. 

aieul. mal vie. /. 

The works of those architects. The corals of those seas. The 

travail arcbitecte. corail mer. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 55 

learned-men of those times. The presents of my parents. The 

savant tempg-la. 

teeth of your combs. The playthings of onr children. The heads 
dent peigne- joujou enfant. tete 

of these nails, 
clou. 



CHAPTER II. 



OF THE ARTICLE. 



See Introduction, p. 18. 

44. The article is 7e, for the masculine ; as, h jour, 
the day : fa, for the feminine ; as, la nuit, the night : les, 
for the plural of both genders; as, les jours, the days ; les 
nulls, the nights. 

45. It always agrees in gender and number with the 
substantive to which it relates. 

46. Elision of the article takes place before a vowel, 
or h mute : as, V ambition^ the ambition ; P honneur, the 
honour. 

47. It never takes place in the pluraL 

48. Contraction takes place in the following cases : 

49. 1. Before a masculine singular beginning with a 
consonant or h aspirated : as, 

du prince, of the prince, instead of de le prince 

du heros, of the hero, de le heros ; 

au prince, to the prince, a le prince ; 

au heros, to the hero, a le heros. 

50. 2. Before any noun in the plural : 

des princes, of the princes, instead of de les princes ; 

des enfants, of the children, de les enfants; 

aux amis, to the friends, a les amis; 

aux femmes, to the women, a les femmes. 



56 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

5L The article, and the prepositions a and de, whether 
contracted or not, are invariably to be repeated before 
every substantive : as, 

II dut la vie a la clemence He owed his life to the clernen- 

et a la magnanimite du vain- cy and magnanimity of the con- 

queur. queror. 

II est comble d'honneur et de He is loaded with honour and 

gloire. glory* 



EXERCISE VIL 

The soul of man, without cultivation, is like a diamond 
ame,/. art. culture diamant, m, 

in the rough. Self-love and pride are always the 

brut art. amour-propre art. orgueil 

offspring of a 2 weak 'mind. The top of the mountains, 
partage, m. esprit, m. sommet, ». montagne, 

and the bottom of the valleys, are equally agreeable. Silk is 

fond, m. vallee art. Soie, f. 

soft to the touch. The happiness of a 2 feeling toan, is to relieve 
douce toucher, m. bonheur, m. sensible de subvenir a 

the wants of the poor. A man given to pleasure was 
besoin pauvre, m. s. livre art. piaisir, m. ne fut 

never a great man. He obeyed the orders of the king. The 
ob6it a ordres 

warbling of birds, the murmuring of streams, the enamel 
gazouillement, m. art. murmure, m. art. ruisseau 6mail, m. 

of meadows, the coolness of woods, the fragrance of 

art. prairie fraicheur. /. art. parfum, m. art. 

flowers, and the sweet smell of plants, contribute greatly to 

fleur douce odeur, /. art. piante eontribuent beauci>up 

the pleasures of the mind, and to the health of the body. The 

m. sant£,/ corps, m. 

history of man, under all the circumstances of life, is the 

art. dans toutes circonstances art. vie,/, 

study of the wise. What we value is health, 

6tude sage, m. Ce que estimons ce" est art. art. 

frugality, liberty, vigour of mind and body. 
/. art. f. art. f. art. art. 

52. Du, de la, de V, des, put before substantives taken 
in a partitive sense, always imply that some word or words 
understood precede them, such as une portion, itn mor- 
ceau, quelques-uns, &c, the equivalent of which, in Eng- 
lish, is some, or any : as, 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 57 



Je mange du pain. I eat bread. 

II prend de la peine. He takes some trouble. 

Vous avez de 1' amitie. You have some friendship. 

Avez-vous des livres ] Have you got any books ? 

•53. It is to be observed that some, or any, is sometimes 
understood in English too; but the equivalent of du, de 
la, de V, des, which is of the, is very seldom expressed. 

EXERCISE VIII. 

Give me some bread and butter. Offer him some meat. 

Donnez-moi art. beurre, m. Offrez-Iui viande, /. ■ 

Take some salt. There is mustard. We have some 

Prenez sel, m. Voila art. moutarde, /. Nous avons 

gherkins. Shall I offer you some chicken ? Shall I help you to 
cornichons. • • Vous offrirai-je- • poulef??re. Vous servirai-je — 

some fruit 1 I will take, with pleasure, some broth. Bring me 

fruit ? m. Je prendrai volontiers bouillon, m. Apportez-moi 

some knives. Pour me out some beer. Drink some wine, 
couteaux. Versez-moi — biere,/. Buvez vin, m. 

Take some tea. Pat in some sugar and milk. I hear 
Prenez th6, m. Mettez-y sucre, m. art. lait, m. Je" entends 

some noise. There falls some hail. She has some pride. 

bruit, ra. II tombe grele,/. Elle orgueil, m. 

Have you any ink and pens? Put some oil and 
Avez-vous encre art. plumes'? Mettez huile art- 

vinegar to the salad. Eat some lobster. He ha.1 

vinaigre, m. sur salade,/. Mangez h. asp. homard, m. 

received some gold and silver. 

re<Ju or art. argent. 



CHAPTER III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

54. The adjective is a word, which is added to a sub 
stantive, to express its quality, or manner of being : as, 

bon papier, good paper,- bonne plume, a good pen ; 
cet habit, this coat ,- mon habit, my coat. 

55. In French, the adjective takes the gender and 
number of the substantive to which it relates. 



58 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

56. There are two sorts of adjectives ; the qualificative, 
and determinative. 

57. The qualitative adjective is that which expresses 
the quality of the substantive : as, 

bon, good ,• beau, fine. 

58. The determinative adjective is that which deter- 
mines or limits the signification of its substantive: as, 

ma maison, my house ,- cette porte, this door. 

OF THE QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVE. 

59. This adjective can express the quality, either sim- 
ply, or with comparison, or to a very high degree ; hence, 
three degrees of qualification. 

60. The three degrees of qualification are : the posi- 
tive, the comparative and the superlative. 

61. 1. The positive expresses simply the quality : as, 
Le merite est modeste. Merit is modest 

62. 2. The comparative expresses the quality with 
comparison. There are three sorts of comparatives : 

63. The comparative of equality, which is formed by 
putting aussi, as, or autant, as much, before the adjective, 
and que, as, after it : as, 

Cesar etait aussi eloquent que Caesar vjos as eloquent as 

brave. brave. 

Cesar etait autant admire Caesar was as much admired 

qu' estime as esteemed. 

64. The comparative of inferiority, which is formed by 
placing moins, less, before the adjective, and que, than, 
after it : as, 

La violette est moins belle que The violet is less beautiful than 
la rose. the rose. 

65. And the comparative of superiority, which is 
formed by putting plus, more, before the adjective, and 
que, than, after it : as, 

La rose est plus belle que la The rose is more beautiful than 
violette. the violet. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 59 



EXERCISE IX. 

Shipwreck and death are less fatal than the pleasures 

art. naufrage, m. art. mort,/. funeste 

which attack virtue. 2 Pope's Umages are as perfect 

qui attaquent, art. vertu,/. De Pope art. f. parfait 

as his style is harmonious. Delicacy of taste is a gift 

que m. art. D&icatesse art. gout, m. don, m. 

of nature, as scarce as true genius. The love of 

art. f. rare art. vrai genie, m. amour 

our neighbour is as necessary in society, for the 

art. — prochain, m. dans art. f. pour 

happiness of life, as in Christianity, for 2 etemal 

bonheur, m. art. art. christianisme, m. kernel art. } 

salvation. It is as easy to do good, as to do evil. 

salut, m. aise" de faire art. bien, m. art. mal, m. 

He has as much wit as his brother, but he has not so much 

de esprit autant 

vanity. The republic of Athens was more illustrious than 

de vanite\ republique,/. Athenes illustre 

that of Lacedemon. Homer was, perhaps, a greater genius 

Lac6d£mone. Homere peut-etre grand 

than Virgil; but Virgil had a more 2 delicate and more defined 
Virgile ; avait fin d61icat J 

Haste than Homer. Milton 2 appears to 'rae more sublime than all 
parait — me tou3 

the other 2 epic 'poets. Autumn is less varied than 

autre, epique poete. art. Automne, m. vane" 

spring, but it is richer. 
art. printemps, m. riche. 

66. The three following adjectives are comparatives in 
themselves : 

67. Meilleur, better, is used instead of plus ion, which 
is never said : as, 

Ceci est bon, mais cela est This is good, but that is bet- 
meilleur. ter. 

68. Pire, worse, is used instead of plusmauvais: as, 

Sa condition est mauvaise, mais His condition is bad, but it hcs 
elle a ete pire. been worse. 

69. Moindre, less, is used instead of plus petit: as, 

Ma depense est petite, mais la My expense is small, but yours 
votre est moindre. is less. 



60 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



\ 



70. These comparatives must not be mistaken for the 
three adverbs, mieux, pis, moins, which are generally ren- 
dered by the same English words, better, worse, and less. 

71. Mieux is used instead of plus lien, more well, 
which is said in neither language : as, 

Ceci est bien, mais cela est This is well, but that is bet- 
mieux. ter. 

72. Pis is used for plus mal, worse : as, 

II se portait mal, mais il est pis He was unwell, but he is worse 
que jamais. than ever. 

73. Mains, is used for pluspeu, which is never heard : 



as 



Je parle peu, vous parlez encore I speak little, you speak still 
moins. less. 



EXERCISE X. 

His reasoning is not better than yours. Your style is 

raisonnement, m. le vdtre. Votre to. 

a great deal better than that of his brother. The thickness of 
: de beaucoup; celui £paisseur,/. 

this wall is less than that of the 2 next J wall. This column is 

mur, m. celle voisin colonne,/. 

less than the other in height and thickness. The remedy 

autre en hauteur en grosseur. remede, m. 

is worse than the disease. Your horse is worse than mine. 
ma!. cheval, m. le mien. 

The wine which he brought to-day is still worse than that 

bl a apporte" aujourd'hui encore 

of yesterday. Give him more bread and less meat. From 

hier. Donnez-lui de pain de viande. 

bad to worse. It is worse than ever, 
en Ce 

74. 3. The superlative expresses the quality in a very 
high, or in its highest degree : hence, two sorts of super- 
latives, the absolute and the relative. 

75. The superlative absolute, which marks a very- high 
degree without comparison, is formed by putting ?res, fort, 
bien, very, before the adjective : as, 

La modestieest tres-rare. Modesty is very 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 61 

76. The superlative relative, which marks the highest 
degree with comparison, is formed by prefixing the article 
le to the comparatives meilleur, moindre, pire, and to the 
adverbs plus and moins : as, 

La modestie est la plus belle des Modesty is the finest of qua- 
qualites. lities. 

77. Plus and moins, with the article, are repeated be- 
fore every adjective. 

EXERCISE XI. 

That landscape is very diversified, very extensive, and infinitely 

paysage, m. vari6 £tendu 

agreeable on every side. The Alps are very high and very 

de tout c6te\ m. Alpes,/. 

steep. The style of Fenelon is very rich, and very harmonious, but 
escarpe\ m. 

it is sometimes prolix; that of Bossuet is extremely sublime, 
il quelquefois prolixe; celui €leve\ 

but it is sometimes harsh and unpolished. The most beautiful 

dur rude, 

comparison that there is, perhaps, in any language, is that which 

/. • -qu'il y ait- • dans aucun langue,/. celle que 

Pope has drawn from the Alps, in his Essay on Criticism. The most 

tire' Essai art. Critique,/, 

able men 2 are ! not always the most virtuous. The most an- 

habile gens pas vertueux. 

cient and most general of all kinds of idolatry, was the 

art. espece,/. 
worship rendered to the sun. The least excusable of all 
culte, tit. rendu soleil, m. art. 

errors, is that which is wilful, 
erreur,/. volontaire. 

OF THE FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 

78. Rule 1. All adjectives ending in the singular in 
c mute, are of both genders, except maitre and traitre, 
which make maitresse and trailresse : as, 

un homme aimable, an amiable man ; 
une femme aimable, an amiable woman. 

79. Rule 2. Whenever the adjective does not end in 
e mute, the e mute is added to form its feminine : as, 



62 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

un homme prudent, a prudent man; 

une femme prudente, a prudent woman. 

80. Rule 3. Adjectives in el,ien, on, e<\ to form their 
feminine, double their last consonant, and take e mute :* as, 



masc. 


fern. 




cruel, 


cruelle, 


cruel ; 


ancien, 


ancienne, 


ancient ; 


bon, 


bonne, 


good ; 


net, 


nette, 


clean. 



81. Rule 4. Adjectives ending in/, change this letter 
into r, and take e mute : as, 

tiiasc. fern. 

bref, breve, short; 

actif, active, active ,• 

naif, naive, ingenious g 

neuf, neuve, new. 

82. Rule 5. Adjectives ending in x, change this let- 
ter into s, and take e mute : as, 



masc. 


fern. 




honteux, 


honteuse, 


ashamed; 


vertueux, 


vertueuse, 


virtuous ; 


jaloux, 


jalouse, 


jealous. 



83. Rule 6. Adjectives ending in eur, form their 
feminine in three different manners : 

84. 1. Those that are derived from verbs, change the 
r into 5, and take e mute : as, 

viasc. fern. 

trompeur, trompeuse, deceitful; 
menteur, menteuse, lying. 

85. 2. Those that are of Latin origin, change eur into 
rice : as, 



viasc. 


fem. 




acteur, 


actrice, 


actor, actress ; 


admirateur, 


admiratrice, 


admirer. 



* But concref, complet, discret, indiscret, inquiet, incomplete pret, 
replet, secret, suret, form their feminine by changing et into cte, and 
make concrete, complete, &c. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. G3 

86. 3. Those that indicate opposition or comparison, 
take only an e mute, and follow the second rule : as, 

masc. fern. 

anterieur, anterieure, anterior ; 
meilleur, meilleure, better. 

EXERCISE XII. 

She is decent. This house is well situated. This pear is too 
Cette maison, /. bien situe\ poire, /. trop 

ripe. She is tall and well formed. This story is very 
mur. grand fait. histoire,/. tres 

entertaining. This person is very unsteady. This mountain 

amusant. personne,/. leger. montagne,/. 

is steep. This road is not very safe. The door is not open, 
escarped route,/. stir. porte,/. ouvert. 

This room is dark. This street is too narrow. It is an ancient 
chambre,/. obscur. rue,/. £troit. Ce 

custom. She is a good actress. His memory will be immortal, 
coutume,/. Ce acteur. Sa memoire,/. immortel. 

His manners are natural. The engagement was warm. That is 
maniere,/ naif. action,/ vif. ••Voila- 

an 2 original 'thought. This cloth is the best of all. They are 
neuf pensee,/ etofFe,/. / pi. Ce 

2 delusive 'promises. He seduces by his 2 fawning 'manners. . 
des trompeur promesse, / s6duit flatteur 

The delightful valley of Tempe is in Thessaly. She is deaf 
delicieux vallee,/ Temp6 Thessalie. sourd 

and dumb, 
muet. 

87. The following adjectives form their feminine 
irregularly, and must be learned separately. Some of them 
have no feminine, others have no masculine : 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

absous absoute absolved 

bailleur bailleresse a lessor 

bas basse low 

bel, before a vowel or h mute ■ • • } belle -fine 

benin benigne benign 

bische\ (said of eggs) rotten and broken 

blanc blanche white 

no masc. blette overripe 

1,015116 { borlnlsse '(« term of contempt) '• •" \ one '^ 

caduc caduque decrepid 

no masc. cantatrice a celebrated songstress 

cas casse hoarse, broken 



64 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

chasseUr *«»*"•{ fCe' \in poetical 'styie] '■ ' ' }****« 

chatain nut-lroicv 

coi coite sfli/i, s* ug 

defendeur defenderesse defendant 

demandeur demanderesse pie 

dispos active, cheerftri 

doux douce sweet. 

dr6i e | drole queer 

\ drolssse a worthless creature 

enchanteur enchanteresse delightful 

£pais 6paisse • thick 

expres expresse express 

fat fop 

faux fausse false 

favori favorite * ■ • favourite 

fol, before a vowel or h mute ") <• n „ _ j 

foil... } folle mad 

frais • fraiche fresh 

franc franche frank 

gentil gentille genteel 

gouverneur governor- -gouvernante gorerkess 

gras grasse • fat 

Grec Grecque Greek 

gros grosse big 

jouvenceau- • a lad, a stripling- jouvencelle a less 

juineau jumelle twin 

las lasse tired 

long longue 

niaitre master- -maitresse mistress 

malin malisne ma!/. 

m£tis metisse mcngr>I 

mol, before a vowel or h mute ■ - ") ,. 

mulatre mulatresse mulatto 

nouveau-.- -• ••■• ■• •• } nouvelle 

nouvel, before a vowel or n mute J 

nul nulle none 

paillet, (said of wine) 

pareil pareille like 

p^re-- • {^ uv ^ se ::::::::::::::::::>^^-- 

p£cheur pecheresse a sirvt- 

prefix • pr^fixe prefixed 

profes •■ monk- -professe 

public * publique publir 

re\sous melted, rt s 



roux rousse rei, 

sec seche dri 

serviteur servante servem 

sot sotte ; silh 

t6moin temoin iciinesi 

tiers tierce thirc 

tors torse tirisiec 

traitre traitor- -traitresse traitresi 

Turc • Turque - Turkish 

venceur venreresse rerevvefu* 

vermeil vermeille lively rea 

vieil, before a vowel or h mvte- ■ \ vieme i a 

vieux 3 

vieillot vieillotte oldish 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 65 



EXERCISE XIII. 

The grass is very thick. That soup is very good, but too fat. 

herbe, /. soupe, /. main trop 

It is a foolish undertaking. There is no truth in all that. This 

sot entreprise, /. II n' y a nul ve>it6, /. dans tout cela. 
water is not clean. It is a ^very 3 silly 'history. It is in the newest 
eau,/. net. Ce fol /. a 

fashion. It is a fine statue. The law is express upon that point, 
mode,/. beau /. loi,/. m. 

He lives in a state of luxurious idleness. This wax is not very 

vit dans — — mou oisivetS,/. cire,/. 

white. She is as fresh as a rose. The paint on that wainscot 
— comme /. peinture,/. de Iambris,m- 

is not dry. His answer is a mere evasion. The thing is public 

r6ponse,/. franc deYaite,/. chose,/. 

That plant possesses a 2 pernicious 'property. She is of a 2 benevolent 

herbe,/. a malin qualite\ a — benin 

'character. The 2 avenging 'thunderbolt smote that impious wretch, 
humeur, /. vengeur foudre frappa impie, m. — 

He Extended to 'us a protecting hand. This woman is jealous and 

tendit — nous protecteur main,/. jaloux 

deceitful. His temper is mild. This colour is too red. These 

faux. Son humeur,/. doux. couleur,/. roux. 

old clothes are good for nothing, 
hardes,/. ne a rien. 

OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 

88. General Rule. Every adjective forms its plural 
by the simple addition of s : as "bon, bons ; bonne, bonnes. 

89. This rule is without exception, as it regards the 
feminine termination ; but the masculine has the three fol- 
lowing exceptions. 

90. 1. Adjectives ending in s or x, do not change 
their termination : as, gros, gras, lieureux. 

91. 2. Those ending in au, take x : as beau, beaux ; 
nouveau, nouveaux. 

92. 3. Some adjectives ending in al change this termi- 
nation into aux ; as, egal, egaux ; general, generaux : 
others take only s; as, fatal, fat.als ; nasal, nasals: some 
have no plural ; as, mental, vocal, &c. 

c* , 5 



66 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



EXERCISE XIV. 

They are envious and jealous. Those fowls are big and fat. 

lis jaloux. poulet 

Owls are 2 frightful 'birds. There are some beautiful jewels. 

art. Hibou des hideux oiseau. --Voila- de beau bijon. 

The two new operas have succeeded. Men are 

deux nouveau ont r£ussi. art. ne 

2 only ] equal in the infirmities of nature. The 2 general 

par art. 

'officers are assembled. This fruit is excellent. His proficiency 

assemble. m. pi. sont Ses progres, m. pi. 

is slow, but solid. All his friends have been very glad to 2 see 

sont solide. ami et6 bien aise de voir 

him. Those ladies are tired with walking. You have powerful 

le. las de marcher. avez de 

enemies, but their efforts will be vain and useless. The four 2 cardi- 
ennemi, leurs seront inutile. quatre 

nal 'points are the east, west, south and north 
orient, Occident, sud nord. 

OF THE DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVE. 

93. There are four kinds of Determinative Adjectives : 
the Numeral, Demonstrative, Possessive, and Indefinite. 

94. 1. The Numeral are those which determine the 
signification of the substantive, by adding to it an idea of 
number, or order. 

95. There are two sorts of numeral adjectives: the 
Cardinal and Ordinal. 



96. The Cardinal are those which express the num- 
ber : as, un, deux, trois, quatre, &.c. ; one, two, three, 
four, &c. 

97. The Ordinal are those which mark the order, or 
rank : as, premier, second, troisieme, quatrieme, &c. ; first, 
second, third, fourth, &c. 

98. 2. The Demonstrative are those which determine 
the signification of the substantive, by giving to it the idea 
of indication. These adjectives are : ce, cet, cette, ces : as, 

ce sold at, this soldier ; '< 

cet enfant, this child,- 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 67 



cette femme, this woman ,- 
ces animaux, these animals. 

99. 3. The Possessive are those which relate to pos- 
session or property. These adjectives are , 



m. 


/• 


pi. 


m.Sff. 


mon, 


ma, 


mes, 


my. 


ton, 


ta, 


tes, 


thy. 


son, 


sa, 


ses, 


his, her, its. 


notre, 


notre, 


nos, 


our. 


votre, 


votre, 


vos, 


your. 


leur, 


leur, 


leurs, 


their. 



100. These adjectives, in French, always agree in gen- 
der and number with the object possessed, and not with 
the possessor, as in English, for which reason they must 
be repeated before every noun : as, 

Mon pere, ma mere et mes My father, mother and bro- 

freres sont a la campagne, avec thers are in the country with 

vos amis et leurs cnfants. your friends and their children. 

Mon cousin est alle consoler sa My cousin is gone to console. 

soeur, qui a perdu son fils. his sister, who has lost her son. 

101. Mon, ion, son, instead of ma, ta, sa, are used be- 
fore a noun feminine beginning with a vowel or h mute : 
thus, mon time, my soul •, ton humeur, thy humour ; son 
amitie, his friendship, must be said, instead of ma time, ta 
humeur, sa amitie. 

102. 4. The Indefinite are those which express their 
subjects in an indefinite or general manner. These adjec- 
tives are : 



chaque, 
nul, 


every, 
no. 


quelque, 
plusieurs, 


some, 
several. 


pas un, 


not one* 


tel, 


such. 


aucun, 
meme, 
tout, 


any. 

same. 

all. 


quel, 
quelconque, 


what, 
whatever* 



EXERCISE. XV. 

My principles, my love of retirement, my taste for 

principe, gout, m. pour art. retraite, /. amour, m. 

every thing that is connected with learning, and my detestation 

tout ce qui tient a art. instruction, h asp. haine, f. 



68 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



n 



of all spirit of party, every thing has induced me to prefer a 
pour esprit parti, tout a porte" preferer — 

life passed in the closet, to the 2 active 'life of the world. Do not 
art. — de — cabinet, m. — 

think, my daughter, that thy candour, thy ingenuousness, thy taste, 
pense, que /. /. gout,ia. 

so delicate and so refined, and even thy graces, can shelter 

delicat fin, meme puissent mettre al'abri 

thee from censure. His wit, his talents, his honesty, and 

de art. f. esprit, m. honnetet^, 

even his good nature, make him beloved by every body. Our 

bonhomie, /. font aimer de tout le monde. 

constancy and our efforts will, 2 at last 'surmount all obstacles. 

/. — enfin surmonteront art. 

I see nothing that can be censured in your conduct. Their 

ne vois rien que on puisse reprendre dans conduite. 

taste for the fantastical, the monstrous, and the marvellous, 

bizarre, m. monstrueux, ?«. merveilleux, m. 

gives to all their compositions, although very fine in themselves, an 
donne /. quoique en elles-memes, 

air of deformity, which shocks at first sight. Every age has 
in. difformite\ qui choque a art. coup-d' ceil, m. a 

its pleasures; every condition has its charms. He will submit 

etat, m. charme. ne veut se soumettre 

to no authority whatever. Several historians have related that 
a aucun autorite,/. bistoriens ont racont6 

action in the same manner. Man fears to 2 see 'himself such as 
/. de /. art. craint de voir se que 

he is, because he is not such as he ought to be. Great crimes 

parce que devrait etre. art. m. 

are always preceded by some other crimes. Not one of all those 
sont prec£d6 de — Nul m. 

who 2 went 'there has returned. Not one believes that intelligence, 
qui ont €i€ y ne en est revenu. ne croit nouvelle,/. 

You have no means of succeeding in that affair. This 
ne avez moyen, m. reussir dans /. 

poem is the same as that I was Mentioning to 'you. All 

poeme, m. que celui dont ai parle" — 

the 2 celestial 'bodies are in motion. What people of anti- 

celeste corps en mouvement. peuple, m. art. 

quity ever had better laws than the Egyptians'? 
a eu de loi, /. que Egyptien? 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUB- 
STANTIVE. 

103. Rule 1. The adjective always agrees in gender 
j and number with the substantive to which it relates : as, 

de beaux jardins, Jine gardens. 

de belles promenades, Jine walks. 

104. Rule 2. When the adjective relates to two sub- 
| stantives singular of the same gender, it must be put in the 
j plural, and agree with them in gender : as, 

Le roi et le berger sont egaux The king and the shepherd are 
| apres la mort. equal after death. 

105. Rule 3. When two substantives, to which the ad- 
jective relates, are of different genders, the adjective is to 
foe put in the masculine plural : as, 

Man £>ere et ma mere sont My father and mother are con- 
contens. tented. 



EXERCISE XVL 

These hills are covered with trees loaded with fruit already 

cote au, m. couvert de arbre, to. charge" m. pi. deja 

ripe. A pure stream rolls its 2 limpid 'water through the 

mur. clair ruisseau, m. roule limpide crista! a 

midst of meadows enamelled with flowers. Every thing interests 
•nilieu prairie,/. emaille" fleur. Tout interes&e 

the heart in this abode which is full of charms. Fly, 2 incon- 
cceur, m. sejour, to. — — plein attrait. Fuyez, incon- 

siderate 'youth, fly from the 'enchanting 2 allurements of a 2 vain 

sidere' jeunesse,/. — enchanteur attrait, m. 

*world : its 2 perfidious 'sweets are a 2 slow 'poison, which 

monde, m. ses perfide douceur, /. lent n. 

vvould destroy in your soul the noble enthusiasm of 

d&ruirait dans ame,/. enthousiasme, m. art. 

goodness, and the precious seeds of 2 sublime 'virtues. 

bien, m. germe, to. art. art. 

Uprightness and piety are much esteemed, even by the 

Droiture,/. art. pi£te\/. tres estime\ meme de 

wicked. A man in 3 the 4 most 5 elevated, and 

mfechant, pi. — art. dans elev6, ^art. 2 etat 

a man in 3 the 4 most 5 obscure 2 situation, are equally 

— «rt. obscur >arL etat, m. egalement 



70 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



precious in the eyes of God. Pilpay and Confucius are very 

a Dieu. 

celebrated among the nations of Asia. His probity and 

c&ebre parmi peuple, m. art. Asie. f. son 

disinterestedness are known every where. The love of life, 
d6sinte>essement, in. connu partout. amour art. 

and the fear of death are natural to man. 

crainte,/. art. mort, /. naturel art. art. 

Ignorance and self-love are equally presumptuous. My 

/. art. amour-propre presomptueux. 

sister and brother were very attentive to the instructions of 

mon ont €t€ 

their masters, 
maitre. 



NUMBERS. 

106. Numbers are divided into six classes, viz. : Car- 
dinal, Ordinal, Collective, Adverbial, Distributive, and 
Proportional. 



Nombres Cardinal 

Cardinavx. Numbers. 

un, une 1 

deux 2 

trois 3 

quatre 4 

cinq 5 



sept • 
huit • 
neuf- 
dix-- 



onze 11 

douze 12 

treize 13 

quatorze 14 

quinze 15 

seize 16 

dix-sept 17 

dix-huit 13 

dix-neuf 19 

vingt 20 

vingt et un 21 

vingt-deux, &c. 22 

trente 30 

trente et un, &c. 31 

quarante 48 

quarante et un, &c. 41 

cinquante 50 

cinquante et un, &c. 51 

soixante 60 

soixante et un, &c. 61 

toixante et dix TO 

soixante et onze 71 

soixante douze, &c. 72 

<Niatre-vingt : SO 



Nombres Ordinal 

Ordinaux. Numbers 

premier, premiere 1st- 

deuxieme, second, seconde 2d. 

troisieme 3d. 

quatrieme 4(A. 

cinquieme 5tb. 

sixieme - 6fA 

septieme 1th. 

huitieme 8th- 

neuvieme 9fA- 

dixieme 10? A. 

onzieme 1 1*A. 

douzieme 12f A. 

treizieme 13*A. 

quartorzieme 14*A- 

quinzieme 15/A. 

seizieme Ifitk. 

dix-septieme lTfft- 

dix-huitieme I8tk. 

dix-neuvieme 19fA. 

vingtieme 20f A, 

vingt et unieme 21sf. 

vingt-deuxieme, &x. 22d. 

trentieme 30rA. 

trente et unieme, &c. 31st. 

quarantieme 40tA. 

quarante et unieme, &c. 4lst, 

cinquantieme 50f A. 

cinquante et unieme, &c. 51sf, 

soixantieme 60f A. 

soixante et unieme, &c. 61s*. 

soixante et di> ieme 70* A. 

soixante et onzieme 7K*t. 

soixante-douzieme, &c. 72d* 

quatre-vingtieme SOfi. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



71 



JV 'ombres Cardinal 

Cardinaux. Numbers. 

qnatre-vingt-un, &c. SI 

quatre-vingt-dix 90 

quatre-vingt-onze, &c. 91 

cent 100 

cent-un, &c 101 

deux cents 200 

rnille 1,000 

deux niille, &c. 2,000 

dixmille 10,000 

mUlion 1,000,000 

Nombres Collective 

Collectifs. Numbers. 

une couple a couple. 

une demi douzaine half a dozen. 

une huitaine a week. 

une neuvaine nine days of prayer. 

une dixaine huff a score. 

une douzaine a dozen. 

deux douzaines, &c two dozen, Sfc. 

une quinzaine a fortnight. 

une douzaine et > f a dozen and a 

demie, &c. i""\ half, <$-c. 

une vinglaine a score. 

une trentaine, ") i a score and a 

&c. i""X halftyc. 

une centaine five score. 

un millier one thousand. 

deux milliers, &c. ■ ■ tico thousand, 8fc. 

Nombres Adverbial 

Adverbiaux. Numbers. 

prcmierement first. 

en premier lieu in the first place. 

secondement secondly. 

troisiemement thirdly. 

quatriemement fourthly. 

cinquiemement, &c. fifthly, $c. 



Nombres Ordinal 

Ordinaux. Numbers. 

quatre-vingt-unieme, &c. 81st. 

quatre-vingt-dixieme 90th. 

quatre-vingt-onzieme, Sec. 91st. 

cenlieme lOOtft. 

cent-unieme, &c. 101st. 

deux centieme 200tA. 

millieme lOOOtA. 

deux millieme, &c. 2000t/t. 

dix millieme 10,000t/i. 

millionieme millionth. 

Jfombres Distributive 

Distributifs. Numbers. 

la lnoitie" the half. 

un tiers one third. 

deux tiers two thirds. 

un quart one quarter. 

deux quarts two quarters. 

un cinquieme one fifth. 

deux cinquiemes two fifths. 

un sixieme one sixth. 

deux sixiemes two sixths. 

un septieme one seventh. 

deux septiemes, &.c.-two sevenths, 8fc. 

JVombres Proportional 

Proportionnels. Numbers. 

double double. 

triple triple. 

quadruple -fourfold. 

quintuple -fivefold. 

sextuple sixfold. 

septuple sevenfold. 

octuple eightfold. 

nonuple ninefold. 

decuple, &c. tenfold. #c. 

centuple, &x. hundredfold, Sfc. 



107. When mentioning the days of the month, the 
French make use of the cardinal instead of the ordinal 
number, and say, le onze d? Jlvril, not le onzieme, &c. ; 
except, however, that instead of Pun du mois, they say, 
le premier du mois, the first day of the month. 

108. Mllle never takes s in the plural ; thus, vingt 
mill?, is twenty thousand, and not vingt mill.es, which 
would mean twenty miles ; and when mentioning the 
Christian era, they curtail this word into mil, and write, 
for example, P an mil huit cent trente huit, and never V an 
milk, &c. 

109. There are many other numerical expressions, 



72 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

used in poetry, music, games, &c. : as, distique, tercet? 
quatrain, sixain., huitain, &c. ; solo, duo, trio, quatuor % 
quinque, quinte, octave. &c. ; beset, sonnez, &c. 



CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUN. 

1 10. A pronoun is a word substituted for a noun. 

111. There are six kinds of pronouns : the Personal? 
Possessive, Relative, Absolute, Demonstrative, and lit- 
definite. 









SECT] 


[ON I. 










OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 




112. Personal Pronouns 


are used for the 


names ( 


persons, or 


things 


. 










Subject > 


Object. 




Subject. 




Object. 
thee. 


& 


n* 


te 


connals, 


I 


know 




Jtu 


me 


coi)duis> 


thou 


leadest 


me. 


* 


\ il 


Ie 


voit, 


he 


sees 


him* 


5J 


telle,/. 


la 


cherche, 


she 


seeks 


her. 




fnous 


vous 


croyons, 


we 


believe 


you. 


"3 


J vous 


nous 


persuadez, 


you 


persuade 


us. i 




) ils 


les 


pumssent, 


they 


punish 


them~ 


Relies,/. 


les 


adinirent, 


they 


admire 


them. 



113. The pronouns me and te, are changed into mot 
and toi, when put after the verb : as, cras-moi, je te con- 
nais, toi el ton frere ; 

114. And also when put before it, to give more strength 
to the phrase : as, moi, je dis ; toi, tu ne vois rien. 

115. When the verb has no regimen direct, the objec- 
tive pronouns, le, la, les, are changed thus : 

Subject. Object. Subject. Object, 

je lui parle (a lui), I speak to him. 

je lui donne (a elle), I give to her. 

je leur ecris (a eux, or a elles), I write to them. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 73 

116. The same pronouns, Ze, leu, Zes, when put after 
the verb, are changed thus : 

Je leielicite, Met see amis. I congratulate Mm, and his 

friends. 
Je k vois, elk «t ses enfants. / see htr, and her children. 

Je ies mepnse, tux (01 elks) I despise them, and their ac- 
•etleurs. complices, complices. 

EXERCISE XYIL 

I cast my eyes tapen the objects which 2 surrounded J me, and 

portal vue,/. objet qui environnaient me, je 

eaw with pleasure that el! was calm and tranquil. My father is 
-vis cue 4tart calme tranquilie. 

.satisfied with me. We have told the truth. If we desire to 
contend de wens Hit rr&it^,/. d^sirons 

i»e happy, we must not deviate from the path of 

devoirs nous Scatter sentier, m. art. 

virtue. Thou art greater than I, and from thee I have 
JE, -ea moi, toi 

"at once learned humility and wisdom. I was telling 
<en meme temps appris art. j£ crt. f. disais 

Ihee that dancing is to the bedy what lasts is to the 

s:e que art. danse, f. era. ce que art. m. 

<mincL You 2 have 3 shown 'us great talents; when 2 will 

montre" de m. quand mon- 

you show Vdc great virtues ? Kow 3 amiable ' l y ou 2 are ! How 
trerez-vous Que €tes.l 

good you are to have thought of us '.! It was said of you the 

de «oue£tre occupy • -on disait- • 

other day, that you intended to spend a winter in London, 
autre jour, sous vous proposiez de passer mi. a Londres, 

in order to see every thing 5 curjous 'which 2 that 3 city 4 presents. 

-pour .voir toutce que ville offre de. 

You will go with him. They received kindly neither him 

ire.i -On ne nous accueillit ni 

aior me. You 2 blame v them, they who have 2 only 'followed 

ni tilamez qui ne ont que suivi 

your counsels. When E 2 saw 'them, they were at home, 
conseil. Lorsque vis -6taient chez elles. 

117. The pronouns elle, elles^ eux, Ini, leur, used as 
regimen indirect, generally apply to persons only. 

1 18. When speaking of things, these pronouns are to 
be replaced by en and ?/, which are used both for persons 
and things. Thus, we say, in speaking 



74 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



n 



of a poet: Que pensez-vous- de lui ? What do you think of him ? 

of his worlts : Qu' en pensez vous ? What do you think of them £ 

of a woman : Je m' approchai d' ellc. I approached her. 

of a table : Jen/ en approchai. I approached it. 

of men • Je parlais d' eux. I was speaking of them. 

of books : J' en pailais, I was speaking of them. 

of women : Je pensais a elles. I was thinking of them* 

of flowers : J' y pensais. I was thinking of them. 

119. Fand en are always put before the verb* except 
with the imperative affirmative- 

120. The pronoun se, of the third person, and com- 
mon to both numbers and genders, is used for the conju- 
gation of pronominal verbs : as, 

II se donne des louanges. He gives himself praises.' 

Elle se flatte. She flatters herself. 

lis se sont deshonores^ They have disgraced them- 

selves. 

Elles se sont fiattees. They have flattered them- 

selves. 

121. Se is always put before the vero. 

122. Soi, pronoun singular of the third person, and 
of both genders, is generally used in phrases where there 
is an indeterminate pronoun either expressed or under- 
stood : as, 

Chacun tire a soi. Every one draws to himself. 

N' aimer que soi, c' est n' etre To love only ourselves, is id be 
bon a rien. good for nothing. 

123. Soi may also apply to things : as, 

Le rice est odieux de soi. Vice is odious in itself. 

La vertu est aimable en soi. Virtue is amiable in itself. 

EXERCISE XVHI. 

They speak a great deal of it. That is a delicate 1 affair; the 

On --beaucoup-- Ce 

success, of it is doubtful. This tree is very high; do not 
succes, m. douteux. arbre, m. haut; — 

2 climb upon 'it to gather its fruit, you would fall. See 

montez — y pour en cueiUir les tomberiez. Voyei 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 75 

them ; I 2 consent to % but do not trust them. That is a fine 

••consens-- — vous fiez y. Ce 

appointment : he had 4 long 2 aS pi re d to ! it. In a thousand 

charge,/. — Mepuis long-temps • -aspirait- • — mille 

instances wo do not watch sufficiently over ourselves. The glory 
occasions <m — veille assez sur soi. /• 

of the world passes away in an instant. He gives himself a great 

m. se eVanouit en donne se 

deal of trouble. She tires herself. People should very seldom 

peine. lasse se. On doit rarement 

speak of themselves. We must take upon ourselves the care 

On doit sur soin, m. 

of our own affairs. We must help one another ; it is the law 

ses propres affaires. . --Ilfaut se entr' aider ;•• • ce 

of nature. 

SECTION II. 

OP THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 

124. Possessive pronouns mark the possession of per- 
sons or things which they represent. Some relate to one 
person, and others to several persons. 

125. Those which relate to one person, are : 



to. sing. 


/. sing. 


to. plur. 


/. plur. 




1st le mien, 


la mienne, 


les miens, 


les miennes, 


mine. 


2d. le tien, 


la tienne, 


les tiens, 


les tiennes, 


thine. 


3d. le sien, 


la sienne, 


les siens, 


les siennes, 


his, hers, its. 



126. Those which relate to several persons, are : 

m. sing. f. sing. pi. m. <$• /. 

1st. le notre, la notre, les notres, ov/rs. 

2d. le voire, la votre,j les votres, yours. 

3d. le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs. 

The following are examples : 

Votre pere et le "mien etaient Your father and mine were 
amis. friends. 

C est votre avantage et le It is your advantage and 
notre. ours. 

EXERCISE XIX. 

la it your temper or hers, that 2 hinders *you from living well 
ce huraeur,/. qui empeche ' de vivre 



76 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

together 1 If it be yours, it 2 is 3 easy for Jyou to remedy it, 
ensemble ? ce est il ais6 — de porter remade y, 

by mastering your temper : if it be hers, redouble your ccm- 
en • •prenantsurvousmeine:- • redoublez de — 

plaisance, attention, and good behaviour; it is very seldom 

de de proc6d6, m. pi. il tres rare 

that this method proves unsuccessful. If my friends had served 
moyen, m. • --ne reussisse pas- • avaient servi 

me with the same zeal as yours, it is very certain that I 

zele, m. que il tres srir 

should have succeeded : but yours have been all fire, and mine all 
• • • aurais • • ■ r6ussi : etc" de 

ice. All the pictures which we expected from Rome arc 
de glace. tableaux, in. atti?hdions 

arrived : there are some that are a little damaged ; but yours, his, 

arrives : il y en a ■ • • • qui peu endommages ; 

and mine, are in good condition. We know perfectly well what 
en e"tat, m. savons — quels 

are your amusements in town, and I assure you we are 

a art. f. assure que eommes 

very far from 3 envying 'you 2 them ; but if you knew ours 
bien 61oignes envier connaissiez 

in the country, it is most likely you would not be long 

a campagne, /. il y a toute apparence que • -ne tarderiez pas- • 

fln 2 giving Hhem the preference. You have opened your heart to me 
a donner leur /. ouvert 

with that noble frankness which 2 so 3 well 'becomes an honest man : 

franchise, /. qui sied a honnete 

this confidence 2 well 'deserves mine, 
conriance, /. m£rite 



section m. 

OF THE RELATIVE PROXOUNS. 

127. Relative pronouns are those which relate to a pre- 
ceding noun, or pronoun, called the antecedent. In the 
phrase, V homme qui joue, the man who plays, qui relates 
to the substantive homme : V homme is then the antecedent 
to the pronoun relative qui. 

fwho: Dieu qui voit God who sees 

• J tout. every thing. 

^ ' j which: Les chevaux qui The horses which 

[_ courent. are running. 



\ 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



77 



dont, 
de qui, 

que, 

Iequel, 
laquelle, 



auxquelles, 



quoi, 



of which; 

whose : 

of whom : 
fwhom : 
j which. 

("which : 
-L to whom : 



Cwhat 



why: 



L* insulte dont 
vous vous plaignez. 

La nature dont 
'nous ignorons les 
secrets. 

Les gens de qui 
vous parlez. 

L' homme que 
vous cherchez. 

Les lois que nous 
observons. 

C est une condi- 
tion sans laquelle il 
ne veut rien faire. 

Ceux auxquels il 
s' est adresse ont 
refuse de le defen- 
dre. 

J' ignore ce a quoi 
il pense. 

La cause, pour 
quoi on 1' a arrete, 
estconnue. 



The insult of 
ivhich you com- 
plain. 

Nature whose se- 
crets are unknown 
to us. 

The people of 
whom you speak. 

The man whom 
you seek. 

The laws which 
we observe. 

It is a condition 
without which he 
will do nothing. 

Those to whom he 
applied have refus- 
ed to protect him. 

lam ignorant of 
what he is think- 
ing. 

The reason why 
he was arrested is 
known. 



128. Qui, dont, que, are of both genders and both 
numbers. Lequel is a compound of quel, and the article 
le, la, les, with which it coalesces in the following man- 
ner: 

m. sing-. f. sing. m. plur. f. plur. 

lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, which. 

duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles, of which. 

auquel, a. laquelle, auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

129. Lequel always agrees in gender and number with 
its antecedent. Quoi, which sometimes supplies its place, 
is always governed by a preposition. 

EXERCISE XX. 

The man who sold me these pens is very cunning. The lady of 

a vendu ruse\ dame 

whom you speak is not handsome. The person to whom I 
parlez personne, /. 



78 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



H 



wrote 2 last J year has answered me this morning. She 

6crivia art. derniere annee repondu matin, m. 

will not hear of the lady whom he is going to marry. 

veut entendre parler va epouser. 

Shun vice, and love that which is just. Men 2 generally 

Evitez art. m. aimez juste, art. 

J love him who 2 flatters ] them. Do 2 you ! speak of the lady whose 
aiment celui flatte — parlez 

husband is so avaricious 1 There is nothing for which he 2 is J not 
mari avare 1 II ne y a rien a soit ne 

fit. -Lying is a vice for which young people 

propre. art. mensonge, m. m. pour art. gens 

ought to have the greatest horror. The table upon which you 
doivent avoir horreur,/. /. 

write is broken. 
Scrivez casse\ 

SECTION IV. 

OF THE ABSOLUTE PROXOUNS. 

130. y Absolute pronouns are those which have no an- 
tecedent. They are the five following : 



("who : 
" ' j whom: 

L 


Je vous dirai qui ¥ 
a fait. 

Qui consulterez- 
vousl 


I will tell you who 
has done it. 

Whom will you con- 
sult? 


que, what : 


Que ferez-vous 1 


WJiat ivill you do ? 


quoi, what : 


En quoi puis-je vous 
servir 1 


In what can I serve 
you? 


quel, what : 
lequel, which : 


11 ne sait quel parti 
prendre. 

Lequel aimez-vous le 
mieux 1 


He does not know 
what part to take. 

Which do you like 
best? 



131. Qui applies only to persons. 

132. Que and quoi relate to things only. 

133. Quel, masc, quelle, fem. sing.; quels, masc. 
quelles, fem. plur., always precede a substantive, and take 
its gender and number. 

134. Lequel, cluquel, auqucl, &c, are used to mark a 
distinction between several persons or objects. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 79 



EXERCISE XXI. 

Who can give credit to a young man who does not speak the 
pent ajouter foi — dit 

truth? Of whom were you speaking, when I came ? To whom 

verite 1 ,/. parliez-vous vins 1 

have you lent my slate ? Whom do you seek ? What 

av«E pr&6 ardoise?/. — cherchez? 

are you doing] What do 3 you %sk of J me? What is 

■•.faites-voue.?-- « — desnandez — 

the name of your father! In what city does he live? Of what 

nom, ro~ Dans /. -demeure-t-il ?■ 

are you speaking? What is the country in which he was born ? 

parlez-vous ? • • • * pays, m. dans est n£? 

There is in that affair I know not what that I do not understand. 

•Ilya-- dans J. sais entends. 

SECTION V. 

OP THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

135. Demonstrative pronouns are those which indi- 
cate, in a precise manner, the persons or things which 
&hey represent. They are : 

5. «:. -e.f. $1. ra. pl.f. 

ce, ce, this, or that; ce, ce, these. 

.celui, celle, this, or tliat ; ceux, celles, these, or those. 

cetai-cl, cel\e-ci, this ; ceux-ci, celles-ci, these. 

>celui-la, celle-la, that ; ceux-la, celles-la, those- 

St ZfZ: &}»-*.*-+*. 

136. Ce is of both genders and both numbers : as, 
EsJ-ce la votre plume ? 7s this your pen ? 

Sont-ce la vos livres 1 Are these your books ? 

137. Celui, celie ; ceux, ceKes, when followed by the 
preposition de 3 are rendered into English by that, those : 
as, 

Cette montre ressernbie a telle. This watch is like that of your 

de votre frere. brother. 

Vos iivres, et ceux de vetre Your books, and tJiose of your 

sceur, sent (Secbires. sister? are torn. 

138. When followed by a pronoun relative, these pro- 
nouns are expressed, in English, by 7ie, she, they, him, her, 
them, that, those : as, 



80 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

Celui qui pratique la vertu vit He v>h& practises virtue hsts 

heureux. happy. 

Vous punissez celui qui n* est You punish him who is iwt 

pas coupable. guilty* 

139. Celui-ciy and celui-lcij adopt the gender and num- 
ber of the substantives whose place they supply. When 
opposed to each other, eelui-ci marks the nearest object^, 
and celui-la the remotest : as 7 

Celui-ci plait, mais celui-JA This pleases? but thai eap- 
captive. iivates~ 

140. Ceci and cela apply only to things, They may- 
be used singly ; but when they are opposed to each other r 
ceci expresses the nearest object, and cela the remotest : as. 

Je n' aime point ceci, donnei- I do «<?£ like this, give me 
moi cela. thai* 

EXERCISE XXir_ 

The disorders- ef the mind are more dangerccs than those ef ths- 

inaladie, /- 
body. Gentleness^ affability, and a certain urbanity, distinguish 
art- douceur,/, erf. /.' dktingueat 

the man that frequents polite company - f these are marks 

vil £ans art. grand isonde. m- art- f- 

by which he is known. He that 2 sufTer& Jhirnself to be ruled by his- 
auxquelles oa le retoaaait. laisse 3e ■ domui 

passions must renounce happiness- You have punished him 

cfoii letiOHcer a. art- boaBeui, m. puni 

who did not Reserve 'it, and rewarded her who was guilty. We- 

— m£?itait Je, -en?i 

ought to pray for them who persecute 'us* Of all virtues, that 
devons pjier pere^eutent 

which 2 most distinguishes a Chris&an, is charity* I have 

le plu3 distiague ee met 

seen the %ing's palace, and that of the queen- Thai gold 
*art- palais, m- 

watch which you have shown me, is not yours, it is that of your 
montre, /. que »ontTee te 

brother. The body perishes, the soul is immortal; yet all 

p£rit, imniortel ; eependaat 

our cares are for that, while we neglect this* This is low 
soins, m. taacfis que- negiigeons ;a> 

and mean, but that is grand and sublime, 
rampant, 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



81 



SECTION VI. 

OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

141. Indefinite pronouns are those which express, in 
an indefinite or general manner, the persons or things 
which they represent. These are : 

Cone: 



I somebody . 





1 people : 
\ we, or they : 
I 


quiconquo, 


whoever : 


quelqu'un, 


somebody : 


ehacun, 


every one : 


autrui, 


others : 


personne, 


nobody . 


autre, 


other : 


tel, 


such : 


P un et 1' autre 


, lathi 


tout, 


every thing : 



On aime a se_flat- One is apt to flatter 

ter. one's self. 

On frappe a la porte . Somebody knocks at 
the door. 

On dit tout haut. People say openly. 

Si *P on vous blame, If they blame you, 

on a tort. they arc wrong. 

Quiconque est riche Whoever is rich is 

est tout. every thing. 

Quelqu'un m' a dit. Somebody has told 
in e. 

Chacun s' en plaint. Every one complains 
of him. 

Ne faites pas a au- Do not do to others 

trui, ce que vous ne what you would not 

voudriez pas qu' on they should do to you. 
vous fit. 

La flerte ne con- Pride becomes no- 

vient a personne. body. 

Je vous prenais pour / took you for an- 

un autre. other. 

On ne vit jamais No such thing was 

rien de tel. ever seen. 

V un et V autre sont Both are good. 
bors. 

Tout nous aban- Every thing for- 

donne. sakes us. 



EXERCISE XXTIT. 

If you behave yourself in that manner, what will 2 people *say of you? 

vous conduisez ainsi — on dira-t- 

They write me word from Ispahan that thou hast left Persia, 

6crit — as quiite" art. Perse,/. 

and art now at Paris. One can not read Tele- 

que tu es actuellement a peut lire T£l6- 

machus, without becoming better : we there find every where a 

maque, devenir meilleur:on y trouve • --partout- • • 

mild philosophy, 2 noble 3 and Elevated Sentiments ; we there find 

/. des voit 

* This V is placed between the two vowels for the sake of euphony. 
It has no other use. 

6 



82 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 






in every line the effusions of a noble soul, and we admire 
a chaque ligne epanchement beau /. des 

precepts calculated to effect the happiness of the world. This 
propre faire m. m. 

speech is addressed to whoever is guilty. Somebody has come 
discours, m. • -s' adresse- • est venu 

to 2 speak to ] you. Every one should, for the sake of his owns 
pour — devrait, — — — propre 

happiness, listen only to the voice of reason and of 

m. ne £couter que — voix,/. art. f. art. 

truth. He sees the faults of others, but he 4 never mentions 
/. remarque deYauis • • ■ J ne 2 en 

them. Nobody is certain of living till to-morrow. Do not 
spade. ne assure" vivre — 

speak ill of other people, if you wish that nobody should speak 

parlez mal voulez ne parle 

ill of you. Both serve to the same purpose. You cannot per- 
servent usage, m. ne sauriez per- 

suade me of any such thing. All is in God, and God is in all. 
suader — rien de — en 



CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB. 
See Introduction, pp. 19 — 22. 

142. The verb expresses the action, or the state of 
the subject. When it expresses an action, the person or 
thing affected by such action is called the object. 

143. Thus : Pierre punit Jean, Peter punishes John. 
Here John is the object, because he suffers the action 
which Peter performs: Peter is the subject; and punishes 
is the verb. 

144. When the verb expresses a state, the word which 
marks that state is called the attribute : as, Pierre dort 
(Pierre est. dormant), Peter is sleeping. Here, sleeping is 
the attribute, because it marks the state in which Peter is. 

145. The object, when spoken of in its connexion 
with verbs, is more properly termed the regimen. There 
are two sorts of regimen : the direct, and indirect. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 83 

146. The regimen direct is so called, because it com- 
pletes the signification of the verb without the help of 
any other word : as, Pierre ecrit une lettre, Peter writes 
a letter. 

147. The regimen indirect is that which cannot com- 
plete the signification of the verb without the aid of a 
preposition : as, Pierre nuit a Jean, Peter hurts John. 

148. All the neuter verbs have only one regimen — the 
indirect. There are many active verbs which have both 
regimens : as il a fait un present a sa sozur, he has made 
a present to his sister. 

149. Though the greater part of the French verbs are 
regular, there are, as in other languages, some that are 
irregular, and others that are defective. Regular verbs 
are those which are conjugated conformably to a general 
standard ; irregular verbs are those which do not conform 
to a general standard ; and defective verbs are those which 
want certain tenses, or persons. 

OF CONJUGATIONS. 

150. To conjugate a verb, is to rehearse it with all its 
different inflections. 

151. The French have four conjugations; which are 
easily distinguished by the termination of the present 
tense of the infinitive mood. The 

First ends in -er, as, parler, aimer, dormer, <$fc. 

Second -ir, . . finir, sentir, ouvrir, Sfc. 

Third -oir, . . recevoir, apercevoir, $c. 

Fourth -re, . . rendre, plaire, <$fC. 

152. The French, like most modern nations, not hav- 
ing a sufficient number of inflections in their verbs to re- 
present the great variety of their tenses, supply this de- 
ficiency by the aid of two auxiliary verbs, avoir, to have, 
and etre, to be. 

153. Those tenses in a verb which are formed by in- 
flections of the present tense of the infinitive mood (which 
is called the root of the verb) are called simple tenses, and, 
of course, are always expressed by a single word. But 



34 



COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



those which are formed by the union of the tenses of the 
verbs avoir or etre with a participle past, are called com- 
pound tenses. Thus : avoir, f ai, &c. ; parler, je parle, 
&c, are simple tenses : but avoir eu, f ai eu; avoir parle\ 
f ai parle, &c, are compound tenses. 

Note. — In the conjugations of the verbs in this Gram- 
mar, the simple tenses are placed in the left, and the 



compound tenses in the right hand column. 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR, TO 
HAVE, IN THE FOUR FORMS. 



1. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

avoir to have avoir eu- 



■to have had 



PARTICIPLES. 



ayant- 

eu, m.; eue,/. 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



■having 



ayant eu- 



•having had 



■ ■had 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

j' ai I have 

tu as thou hast 

il a he has 

nous avons we have 

vous avez you have 

ils ont tkey have 

IMPERFECT. 

j' avais I had 

tuavais thouhadst 

il avait he had 

nous avions ice had 

vous aviez you had 

ils avaient • •■they had 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

j* ens Iliad 

tu eus thou hadst 

il eut he had 

nous e times ice had 

vms eutes you had 

iis eurent they had 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

j' ai eu I have had 

tu as eu. thou hast had 

il a eu he has hoi 

nous avons eu ice have had 

vous avez eu you have had 

ils ont eu they have had 

PLUPERFECT. 

j' avais eu I had hat 

tu avais eu thou hadst hoc 

il avait eu he had hat 

nous avions eu ire had hoi 

vous aviez eu you had hac 

ils avaient eu they had hoc 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

j' eus eu I had hat^ 

tu eus eu thou hadst hat. 

il eut eu he had hat 1 

nous eumes eu we had hai- 

vous eutes eu -ioulutd hat. 

ils eurent eu tkey had Mm. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



85 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

•j* aurai I shall have 

Itu auras thou shult have 

!il aura he shall have 

(Tious aurons we shall have 

jvous aurez you shall have 

tils auront- • 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

j' aurai eu / shall 

tu auras eu thou shalt. 

il aura eu he shall 

nous aurons eu we shall 

vous aurez eu you shall 

they shall 



PRESENT. 

' aurais / should have 

u aurais thou shouldst have 

1 aurait he should have 

ous aurions- • • • we should have 



they shall have ils auront eu 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PAST.* 

j' aurais eu I should 



tu aurais eu thou shouldst 

il aurait eu he should 

nous aurions eu toe should 

ous auriez you should have vous auriez eu you should 

auraient they should have ils auraient eu they should 



have had 
have had 
hare had 
have had 
have had 
have had 



have had 
have had. 
have had 
have had 
have hail 
have had 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

aie have (thou) 

qu' il ait let him have 

ayons let us have 

ayez have (you) 

qu' ils aient let them have 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

que j' aie that I may have 

que tu aies- • that thou mayst have 

qu' il ait that he may have 

que nous ayons • that we may have 
que vous ayez- -that you may have 
qu' ils aient- --that they may have 

IMPERFECT. 

que j' eusse- • • • that I might have 
que ta eusses t hat thou mightst have 

qu' il eut that he might have 

que nous eussions • • that we might 

[have 
que vous eussiez- • -that you might 

[have 
qu' ilseussent-tAar. they might have 



PRETERIT. 

que j' aie eu that I may have had 

que tu aies eu- • -that thou mayst have had 

qu' il ait eu that he may have had 

que nous ayons eu- -that we may have hod 
que vous ayez eu- -that you may have had 
qu' ils aient eu- • • -that they may have had 

PLUPERFECT. 

que j' eusse eu that I migkt~) 

que tu eusses eu- • • -that thou might st j 

qu' il eut eu that he might "| 

que nous eussions eu- • -that zoe might I ■* 

que vous eussiez eu- • -that you might ^ 

qu' ils eussent eu that they might J 



2. NEGATIVE FORM. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

ne pas avoir not to have n' avoir pas eu not to have hod 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

n'ayant not having n' ayant pas eu--- not having had 



* J eusse eu, tu eusses eu, il eut eu, nous eussions eu, vous eussiez 
eu, ils eussent eu, I should have had, thou shouldst have had, &c, is 
also used for the Past tense of the Conditional mood. This remark 
holds good for every verb. 



86 



COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

je n'ai pas I have not 

tu n' as pas thou hast not 

iJ n' a pas he has not 

nous n' avons pas we hate not 

vous n' avez pas- • • -you have not 
ils n' Out pas they have not 

IMPERFECT. 

je n' avais pas I had not 

tu n' avais pas thou hadst not 

il n' avait pas he had not 

nous n' avions pas- • ■ • we had not 

vous n' aviez pas you had not 

ils n' avaient pas they had not 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

je n' eus pas / had not 

tu n' eus pas thou hadst not 

il n' eut pas he had not 

nous n' e times pas zee had not 

vous n' eutes pas you had not 

ils n' enrent pas they had not 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

je n' aurai pas 1 shall not have 

tun' auras pas thou shalt not have 

il n' aura pas he shall not have 

nous n'aurons pas we shall not have 
vous n'aurez pas you shall not have 
ils n' auront pas they shall not have 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

je n' ai pas eu / have 

tu n' as pas eu thou hast 

il n' a pas eu he has 

nous n' avons pas eu we have 

vous n' avez pas eu you have 

ils n 5 ont pas eu they have 

PLUPERFECT. 

je n' avais pas eu I had 

tu n' avais pas eu thou hadst 

il n' avait pas eu he had 

nous n' avions pas eu we had 

vous n' aviez pas eu you had 

ils n' avaient pas eu they had 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

je n' eus pas eu I had 

tu n' eus pas eu thou hadst 

il n' eut pas eu he had 

nous n' e times pas eu we had 

vous n' eutes pas eu you had 

ils n' eurent pas eu they had 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

je n' aurai pas eu I shall 

tu n' auras pas eu thou shalt 

il n' aura pas eu he shall 

nous n' aurons pas eu- • • -we shall 
vous n' aurez pas eu- • • • you shall 
ils n' auront pas eu they shall 



not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 

not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 

not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 

not") 
not\-% 
not ! -« 
not f» 
not I 4 
notj 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

je n' aurais pas I should^ 

tu n' aurais pas thou shouldst | § 

il n' aurait pas he should !.§ 

nous n' aurions pas -ace should [ ~ 
vous n' auriez pas you should I s 
ils n' auraient pasthey should] 



PAST.* 

je n' aurais pas eu I should not~) 

tu n' aurais pas eu- -thou shouldst not \ ' 

il n' aurait pas eu he should not I * 

nous n' aurions pas eu- -we should not j 
vous n' auriez pas eu- you should not \ . 
ils n' auraient pas eu- -they should not J 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

n' aie pas have not (thou) 

qu' il n' ait pas let him not have 

n' avons pas let us not have 

n' avez pas have not (you) 

qu' ils n' aient pas let them not have 



1 



PRESENT. 

que je n' aie pas- -that Imay~) 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRETERIT. 

que je n' aie pas eu that I may'] 

que tu n' aies pas- --that thou | que tu n' aies pas eu- -that thou mayst "§ 

[inayst « | ■*? 

qu' il n' ait pas- • -that he may \ § qu' il n' ait pas eu that he may | § 

que nous n' ayons pas -that we ^< que nous n' ayons pas eu that tee may ^ 

[may \ % « 

que vous n' ayez pa.s-lhat you I B que vous n' ayez pas euthat you nay g 

[may \ 

qu'ilsn'aientpas that they may J qu' ils n' aient pas eu- • -that they may J 

* Also, je rC eusse pas eu, tit rc' eusses pas eu, il n' eut pas eu, 
nous nt eussions pas eu, vous' n' eussiez pas eu, ils n' eussent 
pas eu. 









GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



87 



PLUPERFECT 

que je n' eusse pas eu 



IMPERFECT. , 

que je n' eusse pas that /"] j_ 

que tu n' eusses pus- that thou ^ que tu n' eusses pas eu- 

qu'il n'eut pas that he I | qu' il n' eut pas eu 

que nous n'eussions pas that we \ Z qu6 nous n' eussions pas eu ■ that we f ^ 

quevousn'eussiezpas that you "§, que vous n' eussiez pas euthat you \ [g, 

qu'ils n'eussentpas- -that they J | qu' ils n' eussent pas eu- • -that they J g 



• • -that 

that thou 

that 



he ! 2 



3. INTERROGATIVE FORM. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

ai-je have I 

as-tu hast thou 

a-t-il has he 

avons-nous have we 

avez-vous have you 

ont-ils have they 

IMPERFECT. 

avais-je had I 

avais-tu hadst thou 

avait-il had he 

avions-nous had we 

aviez-vous ■ had you 

avaient-ils had they 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

eus-je had I 

eus-tu hadst thou 

eut-il had he 

eumes-nous had toe 

eutes-vous had you 

eurent-ils had they 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

aurai-je shall I have 

auras-tu shalt thou have 

aura-t-il shall he have 

aurons-nous shall we have 

aurez-vous shall you have 

auront-ils shall they have 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

ai-je eu have I had 

as-tu eu hast thou had 

a-t-il eu has he had 

avons-nous eu have we had 

avez-vous eu have you had 

ont-ils eu have they had 

PLUPERFECT. 

avais-je eu had I had 

avais-tu eu hadst thou had 

avait-il eu had he had 

avions-nous eu had we had 

aviez-vous eu had you had 

avaient-ils eu had they had 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

eus-je eu had I had 

eus-tu eu hadst thou had 

eut-il eu had he had 

eumes-nous eu had we had 

eutes-vous eu had you had 

eurent-ils eu had they had 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

aurai-je eu shall I have had 

auras-tu eu shalt thou have had 

aura-t-il eu shall we have had 

aurons-nous eu shall we have had 

aurez-vous eu shall you have had 

auront-ils eu shall they have had 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST.* 

aurais-je should I have aurais-je eu should I have had 

aurais-tu shouldst thou have aurais-tu eu shouldst thou have had 

aurait-il should he have aurait-il eu should he have had 

aurions-nous should we have aurions-nous eu should we have had 

auriez-vous should you have auriez-vous eu should you have had 

auraient-ils should they have auraient-ils eu should they have had 



* Also, eusse-je eu, eusses-tu eu, eut-il eu, eussions-nous eu, 
eussiez-vous eu, eussent-ik eu. 



83 



COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



4. NEGATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE FORM. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

n* ai-je pas have I not 

n' as-tu pas hast thou not 

n' a-t-il pas has he not 

n' avons-nous pas have ice not 

n' avez-vous pas have you not 

n' ont-ils pas have they not 

IMPERFECT. 

n' avais-je pas had I not 

n' avais-tu pas hadst thou not 

n' avait-il pas had he not 

n' avions nous pas had we not 

n' aviez-vous pas had you not 

ii' avaient-ils pas had they not 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

n' eus-je pas had I not 

n' eus-tu pas hadst thou not 

n' eut-il pas had he not 

n' eumes-nous pas had we not 

n' eutes-vous pas had you not 

n' eurent-ils pas had they not 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

n' aurai-je pas- •• • shall I not have 
n' auras-iu pas shalt thou not have 
n' aura-t-il pas ■ • shall he not have 
n' aurons-nous pas. shall ice not have 
n'aurez-vous pas. shall you not have 
n'auront-ils pas sAaM they nothave 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

n' ai-je pas eu have I not tad 

n' as-tu pas eu hast thou not had 

ir a-t-il pas eu has he not had 

n' avons-nous pas eu have we not had 

n' avez-vous pas eu haveyounot had 

n' ont-ils pas eu -• • • have they not had 

IMPERFECT. 

n* avais-je pas eu had I not had 

n' avais-tu pas eu hadst thou not had 

n' avait-il pas eu had he not had 

n' avions-nous paseu hadwenothad 

n' aviez-vous paseu. hadyounothad 

n' avaient-ils pas eu had they not had 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

n* eus je pas eu had I not had 

n' eus-tu pas eu hadst thou not had 

n' eut-il pas eu k-ed he not had 

n' eumes-nous pas eu had we not had 

n' eutes-vous pas eu had you not had 

n' eurent-ils pas eu had they not had 

FURURE ANTERIOR. 

n' aurai-je pas eu- • • ■ shall I not have had 
n' auras-tu pas eu- shalt thou nothave had. 
tv aura-t-il pas eu • -shall he not have had 
n' aurons-nous pas eu.shall we not 1. 
n' aurez-vous paseu. shall you not h 
ir auront-ilspas eu . shall they not ho. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST.* 

n' aurais-je pas- -should Inot hare n' aurais-je pas eu should I not" 

n'aurais-tupas • -shouldst thou not n' aurais-tupas eu- -shouldst thou not i 

[have 

n' aurait-il pas- -should he not have n' aurait-il pas eu should he not | ■« 

n' aurions-nous pas- -should ice not n' aurions-nous pas eu- -should ice not !_-s 

[have | £ 

n' auriez-vous pas • -should you not n' auriez-vous pas eu- should you not _= 

[have 

n' auriaent-ilspas- -should they not n' auraiem-ils pas en -should they not I 

[havt J 



EXERCISE XXIV. 

154. The substantive being taken in a partitive sense 
in this exercise, the article, where the adjective follows 



* Also, n' eusse-je pas eu, n' eusses-tu pas eu, n* eut-il pea eu, 
«' eussions-nous pas eu, n 1 eussiez-vous pas eu, n eussent-ils pas eu. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 89 



the substantive, must be used as directed in art. 52 and 53, 
page 56 and 57 ante. 

I have 2 very 3 black 'ink. Thou bast had 2 honest 'proceedings. 
/. honnete proc6de\ 

She has 2 U ncommon 'graces. You had had Exquisite 'melons. 

rare exquis 

They have had 2 ready 'money. I shall have 2 very 3 studious 'pupils* 
comptant argent. applique" el eve. 

We shall have 2 useless 'cares. You will have 2 true 3 and 4 real 'plea- 
inutile soin. reel 
sures. They will have 2 poignant 'griefs. 

cuisant chagrin, m. 

155. The article, however is to be omitted, if the ad- 
jective, or an adverb of quantity (as plus, more, &c), 
precedes the substantive ; and only de, d\ is to be used : 
except bien, much, which requires du, de la, de V, des. 
The article is also to be omitted in negative sentences, 
except when the substantive is followed by an adjective, 
or any other word which determines its signification. 
Examples : 

J' ai de bon pain, I have good bread. 

Je n' ai pas de pain, I have no bread. 

Je n' ai pas de F argent pour le de- I have not money to spend 

penser follement, it in a foolish way. 

I shall have good paper. She will have had charming flowers. 

m . charmant fleur, /. 

We have had good pens. I should have fine engravings. 

plume,/. gravure,/. 

They should have long conversations. We should have had a great 

/• 
deal of trouble. You have not 2 ungrateful Children. He has not 

peine. 
2 dangerous 'enemies. 

156. When a verb is followed by two or more sub- 
stantives, the proper article and preposition must be re- 
peated before each. 

Let him have modesty, and 2 more 3 correct 'ideas. Let us have 

juste /. 
courage and firmness. That I may have books and prints. That 
m. fermete\/. estampe. 

D* 



90 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

they may have more condescension and 2 more ^repossessing 

condescendance pre>enant 

banners. That I might have a sword, musket and pistols, 

maniere,/. 6p£e,/. fusil, m. pistolet, to. 

That we might have a knife, a spoon and a fork. 

couteau, to. cuiller,/. fourchette, /. 
That they might have had friendship and gratitude, 
amitie,/. /. 

EXERCISE XXV. 

We have not had generositv. They have not had money. He had 

/• 
not a skilful gardener. I shall not have great business. You shall 

habile to. affaires, /. 

not have had 2 quiet 'days. They should not have bad 

tranquille to. mauvais 

pictures. Have not such whims. Let them not have 3 so 
Tableau, to. caprice, m. 

4 whimsical 'a 2 pioject. That he may not have had perseverance. 

bizarre projet, m. /. 

Have we had Convenient ] houses 1 Had she silk 1 Shall we have 

commode /. 

2 odoriferous Shrubs 1 Should you have good wine and 2 nice 
odoriferant arbuste ? to. to. fin 

Cordials'? Have you not 2 indulgent parents'? Has she not had 
liqueur ? /. to. 

contempt, and even hatred for that man 1 Have they not 
m£pris, m. meme haine, h. asp. 

2 inattentive Children 1 Has he not . used 2 far-fetched J expres- 
enfant??n. fait usage de recherche /. 

sums'? Had they not excellent models'? Shall I not have sweet 
modele? m. con- 

meats? Shall we not have a good preacher'? Should she not 
fitures ? /. prSdicateur ? 

have 2 clear 3 and 4 just Udeas? Would they not have had 2 more 

/• 
3 extensive knowledge 1 
£tendu connaissances f f. 






CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ETRE, 
TO BE. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

fetre tote avoir e'te' to have been 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



91 



£tant- 



PARTICIPLES. 

■being 



€l€- 



• been 



ayant €t€- 



having been 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

je suis lam 

tu es thou art 

il est he is 

nous sommes we are 

vous 6tes vou are 



ils sont • 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

j' ai 6t6 1 have been 

tu as 6te~ thou hast been 

il a ^t6 he has been 

nous avons &£ we have besn 

vous avez 6t6 • • you have been 



■they are ils ont 6t<§ 



■they have been 



IMPERFECT. 

j' e"tais / teas 

tu 6tais thou wast 

il 6tait he was 

nous £t.ions we were 

vous £ticz you were 

ils £taient they were 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

je fus I was 

tu fiis thou wast 

il fut he was 

nous fumes toe were 

vous futes you were 

ilsfurent they were 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

je serai I shall be 

tu seras thou shalt be 

il sera he shall be 

nous serous zoe shall be 

vous serez you shall be 

ils seront they shall be 



PLUPERFECT. 

j' avais et€ I had been 

tu avais 6te thou hadst been 

il avail 6te" he had been 

nous avions 6t§ we had been 

vous aviez £te" you had been 

ils avaient €i€ they had been 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

j' eus £te" / had been 

tu eus 6t6 thou hadst been 

il eut 6te" he had been 

nous eumes 6t<§ we had been 

vous elites £te~ you had been 

ils eurent 6t6 they had been 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

j' aurai 6t6 1 shall have been 

tu auras <Jt6 thou shalt have been 

il aura 6%6 he shall have been 

nous aurons £te" we shall have been 

vous aurez €x€ you shall have been 

ils auront 6t<§ -they shall have been 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

je serais I should be 

tu serais thou shouldst be 

il serait he should be 

nous serions we should be 

vous seriez you should be 

ils seraient they should be 



PAST 

j' aurais 6t6 • • I should have been 

tu aurais 6t6 thou shouldst have been 

il aurait 6t6 he should have been 

nous aurions 6t6 we should have been 

vous auriez 6t6 you should have been 

ils auraient 6t6 they should have been 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



sois 

qu' il soit 

soyons 

soyez 

qu' ils soient- 



• -be (thou) 
•let him be 
■ ■ -let us be 
•• -be (you) 
■let them be 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

que je sois that I may be que j' aie 6t6 that I may have been 

que tu sois that thou mayst be que tu aies 6t6-that thou mayst have bee* 

qu' il soit that he may be qu' il ait €\€ that he may have been 

que nous soyons that we may be que nous ayons &\€-tkat we may have been 

que vous soyez that you may be que vous ayez et€-that you may have been 

qu' Us soient that they may be qu' ils aient 6te" • -that they may have been 



92 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

que je fusse that I might be que j' eusse 6te" that I might'] 

que tu fusses- that thou mightst be que tu eusses et6- • -that thou mightst \ \ 

qu' il fut that he might be qu' il eut 6t€ that he might ! ■§ 

que nous fussions- that ice might be que nous eussions 6t6- -that we might | § 

que vous fussiez- that you might be que vous eussiez ete- -that you might \ ^ 

qu' ils fussent- --that they might be qu' ils eussent €t€ that they might J 

157. The scholar will observe that the adverb, in the 
following exercise, is to be placed before the adjective. 

15$. Whenever, in interrogative sentences, a substan- 
tive is the subject, it is to be placed at the beginning of 
the sentence, adding a pronoun for the interrogation im- 
mediately after the verb : as, monfrere est-il ve.nu? is my 
brother come? instead of, est monfrere venuf 

159. In interrogative sentences, when the third person 
singular of any tense ends with a vowel, for euphony, a t, 
with a hyphen before and after it, thus -Z-, is introduced 
between the verb and the pronoun : as, parle-t-on, aura- 
t-elle, a-t-U, &c. 

EXERCISE XXVI. 

I am very glad to see you. Are your friends still in Philadelphia? 
bien aise de encore a Philadelphie ? 

Have not I been constant] Have we not been firm and cou- 

ferme 
rageous? Have those men always been good and benevolent? 

bienfaisam ? 
I was too busy to see you. Were we not too untractable ? 

occupy pour recevoir indocile ? 

I had hitherto been very indifferent. Have you not been too 

jusqu' alors insouciant, 

imprudent? Had his wife been sufficiently modest and re- 
£pouse assez 

served? Was not that princess too proud? Were you not 

princesse ner? 

too hasty? To-morrow I shall be at home till twelve o'clock. 

prompt? chez-moi jusqu'ii midi 

Will your father be at home this evening? Will -you 

Monsieur chez-lui soir? m. 

4 always 3 then ! be capricious, obstinate and particular? 
done quinteux, opiniatre pointilleux? 

I not have been too severe? Will not his sister have been 

whimsical and capricious? Shall we not have been -eager 
fantasque empress^ 



\ 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



93 



'enough 1 I would not be so rash. Would not his son 

temeraire. 
be ready in timel But for your instructions, I should have 

pret a --Sans-- conseil, 

been proud and haughty. Would that man have been 
d^daigneux hautain. 

so destitute of common sense ? Do not be so lavish, 
tellement d^pourvu bon sens? prodigue. 

Is it possible I can be so credulous] They wish us to be more 

cr^dule ? 
assiduous. That you should have been so avaricious. That 

assidu. avare. 

she might not be so arrogant. That I might have been more studious. 
That she might have been neater. 



FIRST CONJUGATION— in EIL 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



parler- 



parlant- 
parl6-- 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



PRESENT.* 



to speak avoir parl6- 
PARTICIPLES. 



speaking 
• • ^spoken 



ayant parl6- 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



to have spoken 



•having spoken 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE.f 



I speak y ai par!6- ■•- 

thou speakest tu as parte" 

■ • • ■ he speaks il a parte" — 

we speak nous avons parl£- 



je pane — --■ 

tu paries 

il parte 

nous parlons- • 

vous pafiez you speak vous avez parte" 

ils parlent they speak ils ont parte" 



■ ■■ I have spoken 
thou hast spoken 

• ■ -he has spoken 

■ • we have spoken 

• you have spoken 
•they have spoken 



* Also, I do speak, or am speaking; thou dost speak, or art 
speaking, &c. 

Remark. The additional meanings to the different tenses given 
in these notes, are as correet as those used in the text, and apply 
equally to every verb in the French language ; but are not so fre- 
quently used. The scholar, when reviewing the verbs, should re- 
hearse each tense with the meanings in the text and notes united, in 
each of the four forms. 

f Also, I have been speaking, thou hast been speaking, &c. 



94 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



IMPERFECT.* PLUPERFECT.f 

je parlais I was speaking- j' avais parte I had spoken 

tu parlais thou wast speaking tu avais parle- •• • thou hadst spoken 

il parlait he was speaking il avait parl£ be had spoken 

nous parlions- • • we loere speaking nous avions parle" we had spoken 

vous parliez you were speaking vous a-viez parl£ you had spoken 

ils parlaient- • • they were speaking ils avaient parle they had spoken 



PRETERIT DEFINITE.^ 



je parlai- 

tu parlas 

il parla 

nous parlames- 
vous parlates- • 
ils parlerent • • ■ 



■I spoke 

thou spokest 

he spoke 

■ •• ■ we spoke 
•• • you spoke 
• • • they spoke 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE-H 

je parlerai I shall speak 

tu parleras thou shalt speak 

il parlera he shall speak 

nous parlerons ice shall speak 

vous parlerez you shall speak 

ils parleront they shall speak 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR.^ 

j' eus parte J had spoken 

tu eu parte thou hadst spoken 

il eut parle" he had spoken 

nous euines parte we had spoken 

vous elites parle you had spoken 

ils eurent parle" they had spoken 

FUTURE ANTERIOR.^" 

j' aurai parle I shall have spoken 

tu auras parle- • • • thou shah have spoken 

il aura parle" he shall have spoken 

nous aurons parte- -we shall have spoken 
vous aurez parle- • you shall have spoken 
ils auront parle- • • they shall have spoken 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT.** 

je parlerais I should speak 

tu parlerais- • • thou shouldst speak 

il parlerait he should speak 

nous parlerions- --weshould speak 
vous parleriez- • you should speak 
ils parleraient • • they should speak 



PA ST. ft 

j' aurais pari 6 I should have spoken 

tu aurais parl6-thou shouldst have spoken 

il await parte he should have spoken 

nous aurions parte ?ce should have spoken 
vous auriez parte- yau should have spoken 
ils aurient parle- they should have spokt.% 



IMPERATIVE MOOD.tt 

parle speak or do speak {thou} 

qu' il parle let him speak 

parlons let us speak 

parlez speak or do speak (you) 

qu' ils parlent let them speak 



* Also, I spoke, tJiou spokest, &c. 

f Also, I had been speaking, thou hadst been speaking, &c. 

i Also, I did speak, thou didst speak, &c. 

§ There is a fourth preterit, called preterit anterior indefinite, which 
is used, instead of the preterit anterior, when speaking of a time not 
entirely elapsed : as f ai eu acheve mon ouvrage ce matin, cette 
semaine, &c, and not f eus acheve. As it is found in every conju- 
gation, it will be inserted here : f ai eu parle, tu as eu parle, il a eu 
parle, nous avons euparld, vous avez eu parle, ils ont eu parle. 

|| Also, / will speak, thou unit speak, &c. 

f Also, I mill have spoken, thou wilt have spoken, <kc. 

** Also, I would, could, or might speak ,• thou wouldst, couldst, 
or mightst speak, &c. 

ff Also, I would, could, or might have spoken ,• thou wouldsf, 
couldst, or mightst have spoken, &c. 

i$ The second person singular of the imperative of this conjugation, 
and likewise of some verbs of the second, takes s after e, before the 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 95 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT.* PRETERIT.! 

que je parle that Iviay speak que j' aie parle" that Imay~\ 

quetu paries- that thou mayst speak que tu aies parle' that thou mayst a 

qu' il parle -that he may speak qu' il ait parle" that ha may \ .| 

que nous parlions- • • • that we may que nous ayons parl6- • • that we may \ §, 

[speak 

que vous parliez that you may que vous ayez parl6- • -that you may 

f 'speak 

qu' ils parient -that they may speak qu' ils alent parle* that they may 4 

IMPERFECTj PLUPERFECT.*? 

que je parlasse that J"] >« que j' eusse parle" that I mighty e 

que tu parlasses thatthou § que tueusses parl6- that thou mightst .2 

qu' il parlat that Ik 1 §* qu' il exit par!6- that he might I a, 

que nous parlassions- that we f 5 que nous eussionsparle\£/ta£ we might | £ 

que vous parlassiez- -that you\ ,%n que vous eussiez parle\£Aa£ you might | § 

qu' ils parlassent that they J § qu' ids eussent parl6- -that they might] •« 



OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS OF THE FIRST 
CONJUGATION. 

160. 1. In verba ending in ger, in those tenses where 
g is followed by the vowels a or 0, the e is preserved, in 
order to prevent the g from taking its hard sound : as, 
mange ant) jugeons, je negligeai. 

2. In verbs ending in cer, for a like reason, a cedilla is 
put under c, when followed by a or : as, sugant, pla- 
tans, f effagai. 

3. In verbs ending in ayer, eyer, oyer, uyer, the y is 
changed into i before a mute e : as, il paie, il gr'asseie, 
j* emploie, il essuie, f appuierai. 

4. In some few verbs ending in eler and eter, the Zand t 
are doubled in those inflections which receive an e mute 
after these consonants : as, from appeler, il appelle ; from 
jeter, je jetterm. 

words y and en, for the sake of euphony : as, portes-en d tonfrere, 
carry some to thy brother ;. offres-en a ta soeur, offer some to thy sis- 
ter ; apportes-y tes livres, convey thy books there. But when the 
word en is a preposition, the letter s is not to be added : as, demeure 
en France, remain in France. 

* Also, that I can speak, that thou canst speak, &c. 

■f Also, that I can have spoken, that thou canst have spoken, &c. 

$ Also, that I should, could, or would speak; that thou shouldst, 
couldst, or wouldst speak, &c. 

§ Also, that I should, could, or would have spoken; that thou 
shouldst, couldst, or wouldst have spoken, &c. 






96 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

161. The first person singular of the present of the 
indicative, in verbs of the first conjugation, when used 
interrogatively, takes, for the sake of euphony, an acute 
accent on the e mute final : thus, parle-je y prefere-je, &c. 
The same is also the ease with some verbs of the second 
conjugation, ending in -vrir, -frir and -lir? as, cfflre-je t 
cueille-je y Slc. 

EXERCISE XXVm 

i play sometimes, but I 2 never 'win. We do not command; we 
jouer gagner. 

entreat. You 2 always 'borrow ; you 2 never 'lend. I was desiring 

eniprunter; preter. prier 

them to sing a song. We wept for joy when we found 

de chanter chanson,/; pieurer de joie trouver 

her. They will empty the bottle if you do net take it away, 

vider bouteille,/. emporter — 

Bridle my horse, and bring him to me. They have broken all the 
Brider amener On casser 

panes of glass in their windows, because they had not illuminated 
carreau vitre fenetre,/. illuminer 

as had been ordered. We would have sent them to 

comme on le — ordonner. envoyer er: 

prison, if they had resisted. Do I prefer pleasure to my 

register. preftirer. art. 

duty? He does not propose Salutary 'advice to his frienchv 
devoir? m. proposer un avis, m. 

We do not neglect any thing to please you. I have given up 

negliger • --riea pour • c£der ■ 

my 2 favourite 'horse to my cousin. We did not protect that bad 

favori m. prot^ger m^chanr 

man. The bees were there sucking the cups of the flowers. I 

abeilie y sucer caiice, m. 

had drained an 2 unwholesome 'marsh. Had his father re- 

dess^cher mal sain anarais. n. 

jected these Advantageous 'offers T He judged lightly cf my inten- 
rejeter avantageux f. juger 

tions. I had soon wasted my money, and exhausted my resources, 
manger epuiser ressource,/ 

We had not 2 soon 'enough closed the shutters, and let down the 

tot assez fermer voiet, •baisser- 

curtains. In the twinkling of an eye, they had dispersed the 
— un din — ceil, disperser 

mob. We relieve the poor. Will he support you with all . 
populace,/. soulager pauvre, pi. appuyer de 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 97 

his credit? We do not afflict them. 2 We, ^rhaps, shall not 

i«. affliger 

have Rewarded ^ough the merit of this 3 good 'man. Would 

recompenses 2 de bien 

not his attorney clear tip that business ? They would not unravel 

procureur d£brouiiler affaire 1 ? demelcr 

the clue of that intrigue. Would those merchants have paid 

fil, si. /. martkand payer 

their debts 1 In all thy actions, consult the light of reason. 

dette.1 Dans ./. consulted /. art. f. 

Let us not cease to work. That you may pout incessantly, 
cesser de travailler. bouder sans cessc. 

That lie might inhabit a hut, instead of a palace. That 

habiter chaumiere,/. $a 

Shey would have struck their enemies with fear. 
Irapper de crainie. 



SECOND CONJUGATION— in IR. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT- PACT. 

Ifinif • •• • - ••• -to finish avoir fini — - *to have finished 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

finissant- • -finishing past. 

past. ay&nt fini . ■ — • • having finished 

ifini - finished 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT, PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

jc finie — ■ •■•• £ finish j' ai fini — ■ I have finished 

tu finis thou finishest tu as fini thou hast finished 

il finit -he finishes il a fini he has finished 

-nous finissons we finish nous avons fini ■ • • ice have finished 

vous finissez you finish vous avez fini — you have finished 

ilsfinissent they finish ils ontfini they have finished 

imperfect. pluperfect. 

je finissais I was finishing j' avais fini I had finished 

tu finissais thou wast finishing tu avais fini thou hadst finished 

il finissait he was finishing il avait fini he had finished 

nous finissions- • -we were finishing nous avions fini we had finished 

vous finissiez- • -you were finishing vous aviez fini you had finished 

ils finissaient- • -they were finishing ils avaient fini they had finished 

preterit definite. preterit anterior. 

je finis - /finished j' eus fini I had finished 

tu finis thou finishedst tu eus fini thou hadst finished 

il finit he finished il eut fini he had finished 

.nous finimes ice finished nous euines fini we had finished 

voue finites you finished vous eutes fini you had finished 

il finirent — £}iey finished ils eurent fini they had fi?iish ed 

E 7 



98 



COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



J 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

je finirai J shall finish 

tu finiras thou shalt finish 

il firiira he shall finish 

nous finirons we shall finish 

vous finirez you shall finish 

ils finiront they shall finish 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

Y aurai fini I shall have finished 

tu auras fini thou shalt hare finished 

il aura fini he shall have finished 

nous aurons fini we shall have finished 

vous aurez fini you shall have finished 

ils auront fini they shall have finished 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. FAST, 

je finirais I should finish jj* aurais fini ~-It?iouJd~) "§ 

tu finirais thou shouldst finish tu arais fini thou slouldst ( *j 

il finirait he should finish il aurait fini he should { « 

nous finirions- •• — we should finish nous aurions fini we should |*% 

vous finiriez you should finish vous auriez fini you should 5 

ils finiraient they should finish ils auraient fini they should} J| 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

finis -finish $thou) 

qu' il finisse let him finish 

finissons let us finish 

finissez finish (you"} 

qu' ils finissent let them finish 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

que je finisse that I may finish 

quetufinisses that thou may st finish 

qu' il finisse that he may finish 

que nous finissions- • ■ -that we may 

[finish 
que vous finissiez that you may 

[finish 
qu' ils finissent -that they may finish 

IMPERFECT. 

que je finisse that I~) .*» 

que tu finisses that thou | 

qu' il finit that he ! «, 

que nous finissions that we j;§ 

que vous finissiez- • • • that you \ .*=o 
qu' ils finissent that they J § 



PRETERIT. 

que y aie fini that I may' 

que tu aies fini that thou mayst 

qu' il ait fini that he may 

que nous ayons fini that we may 

que vous ayez fini- 



•that y»n may \ 5 



qu' ils aient fini that they may) 

PLUPERFECT. 

que j' eusse fini that I might 

que tu eusses fini- --that thou mightst 

qu' il eut fini that he might 

que nous eussions fini- -that we might 
que vous eussiez fini- -that you might 
qu' ils eussent fini that they might J 



I J 



OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS OF THE SECOND 
CONJUGATION. 

162. 1. The verb benir has two participles past : . 
benit, which means consecrated; as, pain benit, holy 
bread ; eau benite, holy water : and beni, which has all j 
the other significations of the verb ; as, peuple beni de 
Dieu, people blessed by God, &c. 

163. 2. Hair takes a diaresis on the i in the whole 
conjugation : except in the three persons singular of the I 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 99 

1 ' ' — 

present of the indicative, je hais, tu hais, il hait; and in 
the second person singular of the imperative, hais. 

164. 3. Fleurir, when used figuratively, makes floris- 
sait in the imperfect of the indicative, and Jlorissant in the 
participle present: as, les sciences florissaient, the sciences 
were flourishing ; un etat jlorissant, a flourishing state 
Rejleurir follows the same rule. 



EXERCISE XXVIII. 

Why do you hate him 1 They cure the diseases of the body 

hair guSrir maladie, /. 

and not those of the mind. I was building my house, when you 

b&tir /. quand 

demolished yours. We hated him because he did not act 
demolir agir 

kindly towards us. We leaped over the ditch, and seized the 
honnetement envers • -franchir- • fosse\ m. saisir 

guilty. This plant will soon blossom if you water it often. 

plante,/. fleurir arroser 

Let him enjoy the fruit of his labours. Does he thus define that 

jouir du travail. ainsi d^finir 

Word 1 Do you not pity his sorrows 1 I fortified his soul 

at. compatir a mal ? premunir 

against the dangers of seduction. Did we not frequently 

contre art. f. frSquemment 

warn our friends of the bad state of their affairs 1 Did not the 
averti* 

enemy invade an 2 immense 'country 1 I softened my father by my 

envahir pays 1 m. flechir 

submission. He did not succeed through thoughtlessness. Did not 
Boumission, /. rSussir par 6tourderie, /. 

Alexander sully his glory by his pride 1 We never betrayed that 

ternir trahir 

2 important 'secret. Will he not embellish his country-seat 1 

m. embellir maison de campagne ? 

Will those men enrich their country by their industry 1 I should 

enrichir pays 

still cherish life. Couldst thou soften that 2 flinty 'heart 1 

cherir art. f. attendrir de rocher 

Would men always grow old without growing wiser, if they 

art. vieillir devenir 

reflected on the .shortness of life 1 Shudder with horror and 

rgftechir brievet6 art. Fremir de 



100 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



terror. Let us feed the poor. Never submit to 3 so 4 unjust 
de effroi. nourrir m. vl. fiechir sous 

'a 2 yoke. That I may never blemish my reputation. That they 
joug, m. fl^trir /. 

may establish 3 wise 4 and 5 just 2 laws. That I might stun 2 the 

1 des etourdir 

^hole neighbourhood. That they might weaken Jhe force of their 
tout voisinage, m. • • • -affaiblir /. 

reasons. That we might become younger, 
raisonnement. rajeunir. 



THIRD CONJUGATION.— in OIR. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



recevant- 
regu 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



•to receive avoir regu 
PARTICIPLES. 



■receiving 
• -received 



ayant regu- 



■to have received 



•having received 



PRESENT 

je regois 

tu regois 

il regoit 

nous recevons 

vous recevez 

ils regoivent 



INDICATIVEJVIOOD. 

PRETERIT INDEFINITE." 

I receive j' ai regu I have received 

thou receivest tu as regu thou hast received 

•■ he receives il a regu he has received 

• • -ice receive nous avons regu tee have received 

■ you receive vous avez regu you have received 

■ -they receive ils ont regu they have received 



IMPERFECT. 

je recevais I was receiving 

tu recevais- • ■ • thou wast receiving 

il recevait he was receiving 

nous recevions- -we were receiving 
vous receviez- -you were receiving 
ils recevaient- -they were receiving 



PLUPERFECT. 

j' avaisregu J had received 

tu avais regu thou hadst received 

il avait regu he had received 

nous avions regu we had received 

vous aviez regu you had received 

ils avaient regu they had received 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 



jeregus 

tu regus 

il regut 

nous regumes 
vous regutes-- 
ils regurent • • • 



I received j' eus regu I had received 

■thou receivedst tu eus regu thou hadst received 

he received il eut regu he had received 

we received nous eumes regu we had received 

■ • • you received vous elites regu you had reeewed 

■ • -they received ils eurent regu they had received 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



101 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

je recevrai I shall receive j' aurai regu I shall have received 

tu recevras thou shalt receive tu auras regu thou shalt have received 

il recevra he shall receive il aura regu he shall have received 

nous recevrons- • • -we shall receive nous aurons regu- we shall have received 

vous recevrez- • • -you shall receive vous aurez regu -you shall have received 

ils recevront they shall receive Us auront regu- • they shall have received 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

je recevrais I should receive j' aurais regu I should have received 

tu recevrais- -thou shouldst receive tu aurais regu. thou shouldst have received 

il recevrait he should receive il aurait regu- • • he should have received 

nous recevrions- -ice should receive nousnurions requ.weshould have received 

vous recevriez- -you should receive vous auriezregu.^o?* should have received 

ils recevraient- -they should receive ils a.ura.i<mtie<}u.they should have received 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



regois 

qu' il regoive 

recevons 

recevez 

qu' ils regoivent 



• -receive (thou) 

• let him receive 

■ • -let us receive 

■ ■ -receive (you) 
■let them receive 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

que je regoive that I~) <o 

que tu regoives that thou I •§ 

qu' il regoive- ••" that he I g 

que nous recevions- ■ • that we j" *■ 
que vous receviez- • • -that you a 
qu' ils regoivent that they J § 



IMPERFECT. 



que je regusse 

que tu reuusses 

qu' il regut 

que nous regussions 
que vous regussiez- 
qu' ils regussent 



• • • -that r 
that thou 

■■ -that he , s 
•-that we j « 
•that you to 

• that they J 'g 



PAST. 

que j' aie regu that Tmayl "g 

que tu aies regu- •• -that thou may est .2 

qu' il ait regu that he may I « 

que nous ayons regu- •• thafwemay j *« 
que vous ayez regu- • • -that you viay | p 
qu' ils aient regu that they may J J 

PLUPERFECT. 

que j' eusse regu that I might~) "2 

que tu eusses regu . that thoumightst. I .| 

qu' il eut ^egu that he might I S 

que nouseussionsregu. that we might j *■ 
que vous eussiezre^u-thatyotimight | E 
qu' ils eussent regu- that they might J 4 



REMARKS ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 

165. This conjugation contains only seven regular 
verbs : which are, 

percevoir, to receive,- decevoir, to deceive,- 
apercevoir, to perceive,- devoir, to owe,- 
concevoir, to conceive ,- redevoir, to owe again ,- 

and recevoir, the model verb, which has just been con- 
jugated. 

166. In verbs ending in cevoir, the c, to preserve its 
soft sound, takes a cedilla, when followed by o or w. 



102 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

EXERCISE XXIX. 

I perceive the summit of the Alps covered with 2 perpetual 
apercevoir sommet Alpe3 de kernel 

] snow. What gratitude dost thou not owe to her who, in 
neige, /. pi. reconnaissance, /. devoir 

thy infancy, has discharged to thee the duty of a mother ! Do 

remplir pres de 
you not perceive the snare? Did I not receive him kindly ? 

piege ? m. avec amine" ? 

We did not receive our income. I perceived him walking by 

qui se promenait a 
moonlight. Shall men always owe their misfortunes 
art. clair, m. de la Iune. art. malheur 

to their faults 1 4 Should 1 a 3 wise 2 man give himself up thus to 

faute ? Devoir • -s'abandonner- • art. 

despair 1 You would easily perceive 3 S o 4 gross *a 2 trick. Do not 

m. grossier ruse,/, 

receive that mark of confidence with indifference. Let us entertain a 

•■•Concevoir — 

horror of vice. That they may not collect 

de art. pour art. m. percevoir de 

2 unjust Jtaxes. That you could not conceive the depth of this 

/. profondeur,/. 

book. I am to write to your brother to-morrow, to 2 let 'him 
devoir ecrire pour faire lui 

know that your father is arrived. Were you not to 3 let 2 them 4 know 
savoir Devoir — 

Ut sooner 1 Receive this small present as a token of ray friendship. 

marque,/. 
When did you hear from your sister ? We have not 

avez-vous re§u des nouvelles 

heard from her since her departure. That they might not per- 
re$u de ses nouvelles depart, m. 

ceive the masts of the ship. 

mat vaisseau, m. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION— nr RE. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

vendre to sell avoir vendu to have sold 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

vendant selling' past. 

past. a yam vendu having sold 

vendu sold 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



103 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT.* 

je vends I sell 

tu vends -thou sellest 

il vend he sells 

nous vendons toe sell 

vous vendez - you sell 

lis vendent they sell ils ont vendu- 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

j' ai vendu J have sold 

tu as vendu thou hast sold 

il a vendu he has sold 

nous avons vendu we have sold 

vous avez vendu you have sold 

they have sold 



IMPERFECT. 

je vendais / was selling 

tu vendais tkou wast selling 

il vendait he was e-elling 

nous vendions we were selling 

vous vendiez — • you were selling 
ils vendaient • • - • they were selling 



PLUPERFECT. 

j' avais vendu / had sold 

tu avais vendu thou hadstsold 

il avait vendu he had sold 

nous avions vendu we had sold 

vous aviez vendu you had sold 

ils avaient vendu they had sold 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

je vendis 



tu vendis • — *> — thou soldest 

il vendit - he sold 

nous vendimes we sold 

vous vendites you sold 

lis vendirent -they sold 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

• I sold y ens vendu I had sold 



tu eus vendu • thou hadst sold 

il eut vendu he had sold 

nous e times vendu we had sold 

vous elites vendu you had sold 

ils eurent vendu - • • . they had sold 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FURURE ANTERIOR. 

je vendrai I shall sell f aurai vendu — I shall have sold 

tu vendras thou shalt sell tu auras vendu thou shalt have sold 

il vendra -Ae shall sell il aura vendu -he shall have sold 

nous vendrons- • we shallsell nous aurons vendu we shall have sold 

vous vendrez you shall sell vous aurez vendu you shall have sold 

ils vendront they sliall sell ils auront vendu they shall have sold 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PAST. 

j' aurais vendu / should have sold 

tu aurais vendu- -then shouldst have sold 

il aurait vendu he should have sold 

nous aurions vendu- we should have sold 
• they should sell vous auriez vendu -you should have sold 
- they should sell ils auraient vendu- -they should have sold 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

vends-- — — • sell (thou) 

qu' il vende • let hint sell 

vendons let us sell 

vendez sell (you) 

qu' ils vendent let them sell 

" SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

que je vende that I may sell que j' aie vendu that Imay"\ 

que tu vendes-tfeat thou maystsell que tu aies vendu- --that thou mayst 2 

qu v il vende that he may sell qu' il ait vendu that he may 1 § 

que nous vendions that we may sell que nous ayons vendu- -that we may j g 

que vous vendiez -that you may sell que vous ayez vendu- • that you may j| 

qu' ils vendent- that they may sell qu' ils aient vendu that they may) 



PRESENT. 

je vendrais I should sell 

tu vendrais thou shouldst sell 

it vendrait he should sell 

nous vendrions we should sell 

vous vendriez- 
lis veadraient- 



* The first person singular of this tense, in verbs of all the conju- 
gations in which it has only one syllable, is used thus, interrogatively : 
instead of vends-je, we say, est-ce que je vends ? The only excep- 
tions that custom authorizes are : fais-je ? dis-je ? 
ai-ie ? nois-ie ? 



dois-je? vdis-je, 



ai-je/ vois-je 



104 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

que je vendisse that 1^ ^ que j' eusse vendu that I mighty 

que tu vendisses that thou | « que tu eusses vendu that thou mightst 

qu' il vendit that he 1 « qu' il eut vendu that he might 

que nous vendissions-«Aat we j "^ que nous eussions vendu thatwemight 

que vous vendissiez-t/ta£ you g que vouseussiez vendu that you might 

qu' ils vendissent - • • that they] " qu' ils eussent vendu thai they might 

EXERCISE XXX. 

I wait his return with impatience. Do you not confound these 

attendre confbndre 

notions one with another ? Do not those workmen waste 
/. art. art. ouvrier perdre 

their time about trifles ? Did those orators throw the graces 

a des bagatelles "? r£pandre 

of expression into their speeches T I aimed at an honest 

art. discours - ? tendre a, 

'end. Did we offer our incense to the pride of a blockhead? 
but, m. vendre eocens sotl 

Did not the children come down at the first summons 1 Shall 

descendre ordre'Jm.Sv 

I hear the music of the new opera ? Will you not new-model a 

entendre /. m. refondre 

work so full of 2 charming 'ideas ? They will assiduously correspond 
/. assidument corresponds 

with their friends. Should we sell our liberty? Expect not 

Attendre 
happiness from " External 'objects ; it is in thyself. Let us 
art. art. este'rieur m, 

not descend to 2 useless 'particulars. Ye sovereigns, make 

descendre dans des particularity. — rendre 

the people happy. That he may not reply to 2 such 3 absurd 

repondre un 
'criticism. That we may have aimed at the same end. That they 
critique, /. 
may not depend on anybody. That she might not melt into 

dependre de personne. fondre ea 

tears. That they might wait for the opinion of 2 sensibJe 'persons, 
larmes. • --attendre -• • sense" /. 

Did I not interrupt him, while he was answering them? 

interrompre pendant que • --repondre- • • 

As soon as I had received my m^ney, I returned them what they 
•Des que- • rendre 

had lent me. I shall shear my flock in the month of May. 

preter --tondre- troupeau, 771. 

If you do not take care, the dog will bite you. Speak loud, 
prendre garde, mordre haat, 

that I may hear what you say. 
entendre 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



105 



OF THE NEUTER VERBS. 

167. There are, in the French language, about six 
hundred neuter verbs, the larger portion of which, like 
the active verbs, take the auxiliary avoir, to form their 
compound tenses. The exceptions, given below, are 
some few which take etre ; and others which take avoir 
or etre, according to the sense. The latter are marked 
with an asterisk, *. 



aborder* to land 

accoucher* to be brought to bed 

accourir to run to 

accroitre* to increase 

aller to go 

apparaitre* to appear 

arriver to happen 

avenir • • • • to happen, to chance 

cesser* to cease, to leave off 

changer* to change 

choir to fall 

convenir* to agree, to suit\ 

croitre* to grow 

decamper*- • -to decamp, to run away 

deader to decease 

d6choir* to decay 

d6croitre* to decrease 

demeurer* to remain, to stay 

descendre* to go down, to descend 

devenir to become 

disconvenir to deny, to disown 

disparaitre* to disappear 

6chapper* to escape 

6choir to become due 

6chouer*-£o run aground, to miscarry 

6cloro to be hatched, to blow 

embellir* to embellish 

empirer* to grow worse 

entrer* to enter, to go in 



expirer* to expire 

intervenir to intervene 

m^savenir to succeed ill 

monter* to ascend, to go up 

mourir to die 

naitre • • • • to be born 

partir to depart, to set off 

parvenir to attain, to reach 

passer* to pass 

perir* to perish 

pro venir to proceed 

rajeunir* to become young 

redescendre* to go down again 

redevenir to become again 

remonter* to go up again 

rentrer* ■•■ -to re-enter, to go in again 

repartir • -» to set off again% 

repasser* to pass again 

ressortir* to go out again 

rester* to remain, to stay 

resulter* to result, to follow 

retomber to fall again 

retourner to return, to go back 

re venir to come back again 

sortir* to go out 

survenir to befall, to happen 

tomber to fall 

venir to come 

vieillir* to become old 



168. The verb avoir is used to form the compound 
tenses of those verbs which express the action of the 
subject; and the verb etre, the compound tenses of such 
verbs as express the state of the subject. 

169. The participle of those neuter verbs which take 
etre for their auxiliary, must agree, both in gender and 
number with its subject. 

f Convenir, to agree, takes etre ,• and convenir, to suit, to become, 
takes avoir. 

J Repartir, to set off again, takes etre ; but repartir, to reply, takes 



106 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

The following are examples : 

state: Elle est sortie. She is out. 

action : Elle a sorti ce matin, et She went out this morn~ 
elle est de retour. ing, and she has returned. 

state: Elle est montee dans sa She is gone up to her 

chambre, et elle y est restee. room, and has remained 
there. 

action ; Elle a monte quatre fois She went up to her room 
a sa chambre pendant la four times in the course of 
journee. the day. 

EXERCISE XXXI. 

They came to see us with the greatest haste. When 

— voir empressement. Quand 

did they arrive ] That estate fell to his lot 

est-ce que arriver? terre, /. lui est £chu en — partage. 

He fell from his horse, but happily received only a slight 

tomber — il ne 16ger 

contusion on the knee. That thing escaped from my 

/. a genou, m. m'est — 

memory. She expired in the arms of her mother. All those 

art. a 

that were on board of that ship have perished. He is gone up to his 

room, and has remained there. 



OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

170. The pronominal verbs are those in which each 
person is conjugated through all the tenses with a double 
personal pronoun : as, 

Subj. Obj. Subj. Obj. Subj. Obj. Subj. Obj. 

je me, I myself,- nous nous, we ourselves,- 

tu te, thiru thyself; vous vous, you yourselves,- 

il se, he himself,- ils se, they themselves; 

elle se, she herself ; elles se, they themselves. 

171. There are four kinds of pronominal verbs. 

172. I. The pronominal verb active* which expresses 
an action of the subject falling, or reflected, upon the ob- 
ject : as, ye mejlatte, I flatter myself. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 107 

173. The participle past of these verbs must always 
agree in gender and number with the objective pronoun : 
as, elles se sont flatties, they have flattered themselves. 

Almost all the active verbs are susceptible of being re- 
flected. 

174. 2. The pronominal verb neuter, which indicates 
only a state or disposition of the subject : as, se repentir, 
to repent. 

175. 3. The reciprocal verb, which expresses a re- 
ciprocity of action between two or more subjects : as, 
s' entr> aider, to help one another. 

176. 4. The pronominal verb impersonal, which is 
only used in the third person singular. Active verbs fre- 
quently assume this form for the sake of brevity and 
energy : as, il se faisait, there was doing ; il s' est dit it 
has been said. 

177. All the compound tenses of the pronominal verbs 
are formed by means of the auxiliary verb etre. 

178. The inflections of all the tenses of these verbs 
follow the conjugations to which they belong. 

CONJUGATION OF THE PRONOMINAL VERB SE 
LEVER, TO RISE, IN THE FOUR FORMS. 

1. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

se lever to rise s' fitre leve" to have risen 

PARTICIPLES 

PRESENT. 

se levant rising past. 

past. s' 6tant leve" having risen 

leve" risen 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

je me 16ve Irise je me suis leve" I have risen 

tu te leves thou risest tu t' est leve" thou hast risen 

il se leve he rises il s' est leve" he has risen 

nous nous levons we rise nous nous sommes levgs- -we have risen 

vous vous levez you rise vous vous etes Iev6s you have risen 

il se levent they rise ils se sont lev6s they have risen 



108 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

je me levais I was rising je m' £tais leve* I had risen 

tu te levais thou wast rising tu t' £tais leve* thou hadst risen 

il se levait he was rising il s' 6tait le\6 he had risen 

nous nous levions--we were rising nous nous 6tions lev6s we had risen 

yous vous leviez- -you were rising vous vous etiez leves you had risen 

ils se levaient- • • -they were rising ils s' 6taient lev6s they had risen 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

je me levai I rose 

tu te levas thou rosest 

il se leva he rose 

nous nous levames we rose 

vous vous levates you rose 

il se leverent they rose 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

je me fus leve" I had risen 

tu te fus leve" thou hadst risen 

il se fut leve he had risen 

nous nous fumes leves we had risen 

vous vous futes lev6s you had risen 

ils se furent leves they had risen 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

je me leverai I shall rise 

tu te leveras thou shalt rise 

il se levera he shall rise 

nous nous leverons ■ --we shall rise 
vous vous leverez- • -you shall rise 
ils se leveront they shall rise 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

je me serai leve" I shall have risen 

tu te seras leve- •• -thou shalt have risen 

il se sera leve he shall have risen 

nous nous serons lev6s we shall have risen 
vous vous serez leves you shall have risen 
ils se seront leves- -they shall have risen 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

je me leverais /should rise je me serais leve* I should'] .. 

tu te leverais- • • -thou shouldst rise tu te serais leve* thou shouldst \ 

il se leverait he should rise il se serait lev£ — ^ he should I £ 

nous nous leverions -weshouldrise nous nous serions leveV -we should \ g 

vous vous leveriez- you should rise vous vous seriez leveV -vow should j g 

ils se leveraient- ■ -they should rise ils se seraieut lev6s they should J ** 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Ieve-toi rise (thou) 

qu' il se leve let him rise 

levons-nous let us rise 

levez-vous rise (you) 

qu' ils se levent let them rise 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

que je me leve that I~\ 

que tu te leves that thou | | 

qu' il se leve that he I '£ 

que nous nous levions that we [ g> 
que vous vous leviez that you \ g 
qu" ils se levent that they J 



PRETERIT. 

que je me sois leve* that 7~) 

que tu te sois leve* that thou U 

qu' il se soit leve that he [j* § 

que nous nous soy ns leves that ice f ^.-2 
que vous vous so\\>zlev£s that you 5 
que' ils se soient lev6s- -that they J 



IMPERFECT. 

que je me levasse that I~\ 

que tu te levasses that you I „ 

qu' il se levat that he \ .2 

que nous nous levassions that [V 

[»« | it 
que vous vous Ievassiez- -that I ~ c 
[.you | *"" 
qu' ils se levassent- -that they J 



PLUPERFECT. 

que je me fusse leve* that 7~j « 

que tu te fusses leve* that you J 2 

qu' il se fut leve* thai he £ 

que nous nous fussions leveV • that ! g 

[ic e *" 
que vous vous fussiez leve'?- • • -that 

[you > 
qu' ils se fussent lev£s • 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



109 



2. NEGATIVE FORM* 



PRESENT. 

ne pas se lever 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PAST. 

•not to rise ne s' 6tre pas leve not to have risen 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

ne se levant pas not rising ne s' etant pas leve" not to have risen 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

je ne me leve pas I rise not je ne me suis pas leve" I~) Is 

tu ne te leves pas • -thou risest not tu ne t' es pas leve thou I -g 

il ne se leve pas he rises not il ne s' est pas leve" he [ £ 

nous ne nous levons pas we rise not nous ne nous sommes pas leves- -zee f se 

vous ne vous levez pas you rise not vous ne vous 6tes pas lev6s you £ 

ilsne se levent pas- --they rise not ils ne sont pas leva's they] „§ 

&c. &c. &c. &c. 

3. INTERROGATIVE FORM. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

me leve* je do I rise 

te leves-tu dost thou rise 

se leve-t-il does he rise 

nous levons-nous do we rise 

vous levez- vous do you rise 

se levent-ils do they rise se sont-ils lev6s 

&c. &c. &c 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

me suis-je le v6 have I risen 

t' es-tu leve liast thou risen 

s' est-illev6 has he risen 

nous sommes-nous leveV -have we risen 

vous etes-vous leves have you risen 

• --have they risen 

&c. 



4. NEGATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE FORM. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. . 

ne me lev6-je pas do r 

ne te leves-tu pas dost thou 

ne se leve-t-il pas does he 

ne nous levons nous pas do we 
ne vous levez-vous pas do you 

ne se levent-ils pas do they , 

&c. &c 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

ne me suis-je pas lev6 have /"l 

ne t' es-tu pas lev6 hast thou § 

ne s' est-il pas lev6 has he I ~ 

nenoussommes-nouspasleves/taoejoe [„ 
ne vous 6tes vous pas lev£s have you I g 
ne se sont-ils pas lev6s- • -have they J 
&c. &c. 



Dost thou not 



when he is doing 

& faire de art. mal!m 



EXERCISE XXXII. 

deceive thyself? He 

• • -se tromper ? 

wrong ! 



is never happy but 

• -ne se plaire-- que 

Do we not nurse ourselves too 
• -s' £couter- •• 



* It is not deemed necessary to give an example of more than two 
or three tenses of the negative, interrogative, or negative-and-inter- 
rogative forms of the pronominal verb ; as the scholar is already fami- 
liar with these forms in preceding verbs If he should find any 
difficulty in conjugating them, he will readily surmount it by refer- 
ing to pages 85, 86, and 87, taken in connexion with page 108, ante. 



110 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

much ? They mean to travel in the spring. Didst thou not 

se proposer de a m. 

lose thyself in the wood ? It is said that he killed himself from 

••s'egarer-- Ondit- se tuer 

despair. Wast thou not laying the foundation for much sorrow 

se preparer Men regret, pi. 

by thy foolish conduct? Did you not laugh at us? They 

se moquer de 
ruined themselves wantonly. Didst thou not confide to- 

se perdre de gaite" de cceur. se courier 

inconsiderately in this man ? Had you not been engaged i 
legerement a ■ s' occuper • • di 

trifles ? Had those travellers gone out of the right way ? 1 
bagatelle ? se delourner droit chemin 1 

repented, but too late, of having taken 2 such 'a step. Did 

se repentir, tard, avoir fait demarche, /. 

not those 2 rash children applaud themselves for their folly ? 

temeraire s' applaudir de sottise ? 

As soon as I discovered that they sought to deceive me, I was 
••Desque-- s' apercevoir chercher se tenir 

on my guard. When he had rejoiced sufficiently, we parted. 

pi. se rejouir assez, se separer. 

When they had walked enough, they sat down at the foot 

se promener s' assirent a 

of a tr.ee. I will yield if they convince me. We shall not 

se rendre on convainc 
forget ourselves so far as to be wanting in respect to him. Will 

• • • s' oublier • • • jusque- -manquer- de 

you employ the means I point out to you ? He will have 

se servir de indiquer — 

been proud of this trifling advantage. Should I suffer myself 

s'enorgueillir faible m. • • se laisser • • 

to be drawn into the party of the rebels ? We should not rejoice 

• entrainer- • m. se plaire 
to see the triumph of guilt. Would those lords avail 

triomphe art. crime, m. seigneur ■■■se 

themselves of their birth and fortune, to do violence to our 
prevaloir • • /. richesses, pour 

feelings ? Would this pleasing hope have vanished so soon ? 
sentiment * doux espoir s' eVanouir 

Let us take an 2 exact Account of our actions. It is time that they 
•Se rendre- campte 

should have relaxation from the fatigue of business. Did they 

se delasser /. art. pi. on 

not wish that he should practise fencing ? They required 

voulait • • s' exercer • • • a faire des armes ? On exigeait 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 1 1 1 

that I should go to bed at ten o'clock. Would they have wished 

se coucher a vouloir 

that I had revenged myself] We could have wished that they had 

se venger ? 

extricated themselves more skilfully from the difficulties in which 

se tirer adroitement embarras • • • ou • • • 

they had placed themselves. 
se inettre. 



OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
179. There is but one mode of conjugating passive 
verbs : it is by adding to the verb etre, through all the 
moods and tenses, the participle past of the verb active ; 
which must agree in gender and number with the sub- 
ject : as, 

Je suis aime. I am loved. 

Mon pere fut respecte. My father was respected. 

Ma mere fut reveree. M y mother was revered. 

Nous serons loues. We shall be praised. 

EXERCISE XXXIII. 

That young lady is so mild, so polite, and so kind, that she 

jeune demoiselle doux, honnete, bon, 

is beloved by every body. He performed with so much 

aimer de jouer tant de 

ability that he was universally applauded. He is known by no- 
intelligence applaudir. de 
body. How many countries, unknown to the ancients, have been 

Que de pays, inconnu 

discovered by 2 m odern 'navigators ! If they had got into it 

art. navigateur ! 

through the door, they should have come out of it through the window. 

To be happy and to be praised are two very different things. 

art. 
Men are too often exposed to lose their life in order to get their 

— art. 
livelihood. 



OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
180. Verbs that are conjugated only in the third per- 
son singular are called impersonal verbs ; and are gene- 



112 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

rally preceded by the pronoun il. Observe that the il has 
no relation to a substantive, as may be seen by the im- 
possibility of substituting a noun for it in the following 
examples : 

il pleut it rains il convient it becomes 

il sied it is becoming 

il messied it is unbecoming 

il semble it seems 

il parait it appears il y a there is, or are 

il suffit it suffices il importe it matters 



s' ensuit it follows 

est a propos it is proper 

1 faut it is necessary 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB NEIGER, 

TO SNOW. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

aeiger to snow avoir neig6 to have snowed 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

neigant snowing past. 

past. • ayant neige" having snowed 

neig6 snowed 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

il neige itsnotcs il a neige it has snowed 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

il neigeait it teas snowing il avait neige it liad snowed 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

il neigea it snowed il eut neige it had snowed 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

il neigera it will snow il aura neige it will have snowed 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

il neigerait it should snow il aurait neig6- -it should have snoiced 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

qu' il neige that it may snow qu' il ait neige. f^ot it may have snowed 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

qu' il neigeat that it might snow qu' il eut neige. • • • -that it might have 

[snoiced 

Conjugate in like manner the following verbs. 

il arrive it happens il regele it freezes again 

il bruine it drizzles il grele it hails 

il degele it thaws il gresille it rimes 

il eclaire it lightens il resulte it follows 

il gele it freezes il tonne it th wider* 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 113 

EXERCISE XXXIV. 

Does it rain this morning 1 Did it hail 2 i as t i n ight 1 I thought 

pleuvoir m. greler /. croyais 

it had thundered. Does it not lighten'? Do you think 

que tonner. croyez 

it freezes ? It was not my friend's fault that it was not 

que geler ? • -n' a pas tenu a mon ami- • la chose fttt 

so. It was of great importance to succeed. Would it be proper to 
ainsi. • ••importait beaucoup- • • de apropos de 

write to your friends] It appears that he has not attended to that busi- 

s' occuper de 
ness. Perhaps it would be better to abandon the undertaking. It 

vaudrait entreprise. 

was sufficient to know his opinion. I advise you not to go out 

suffisait-' de conseiller de 

this morning ; I think it will soon rain. It matters little whether 

que que J 

yoa do your exercise now or later, provided it be well done. 

fassiez pourvu que 

2 You ^u-st speak to him about that affair. It was necessary 

II faut que sub. pr. de a fallu 

for him that he should consent to that bargain. How much do you 
— . marche, m. Combien 
want 1 He does what is requisite. Do that as it should be. What 
falloir ? •••falloir faut Que; 

2 must ! he have for his trouble? I could not suspect that I 
falloir lui — peine ? /. pouvais soupc/mner 

ought to ask pardon for a fault I have not committed, 
dusse — de /. que commise. 

Observe that the impersonal verb falloir can be used 
in two different ways, thus : 

II me faudra payer les frais ; or, il faudra que je paie les frais. I 
must pay the costs. 

CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB Y AVOIR, 
THERE TO BE. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

y avoir there to be y avoir eu" there to have been 

PARTICIPLES. 

PBESENT. PAST. 

y ayant there being y ayant cu there having been 

E* 8 



114 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PEESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

i] y a there is, or there are il y a eu.there has heen,or there have been 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

il y avait- • • there was, or there were il y avait eu •■ there had been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

il y eut there was, or there icere il y eut eu there had been 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

il y aura there will be il y aura eu there will have been 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

il y aurait there should be il y aurait eu there should have been 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

qu' il y ait let there be 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

qu' il y ait that there may be qu' il y ait eu- that there may have been 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

qu' il y eut that there might be qu' il y eut eu.that there might have been 

181. Y avoir, in English, is used in the plural, when 
followed by a substantive plural ; in French it remains 
always in the singular. 

EXERCISE XXXV. 

2 There J must be a great difference of age between these two persons. 

II doit /. 

There being so many 2 vicious 'people in this world, is it 

•••tant-- de gens, m. 

astonishing that there are so many persons who become the vic- 

6tonnant ait deviennent 

tims of the corruption of the age 1 It is a thousand to 

perversity siecle ? m. — mille a parier contre 

one that he will not succeed. There would be more happiness 

de bonheur 
if every one knew how to moderate his desires. I did not think 
••chacun-- savait — — croyaia 

that there would be any thing to blame in his conduct. There 

rien reprendre 

would not be so many duels, did people reflect that one of the first 

ei P on 
obligations of a Christian is to forgive injuries. Could 

/. Chretien de pardonne art. Pourrait-il 

there be a king happier than this, who has always been the father 

celui-ci, 
of his subjects ? 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 115 

OF THE FORMATION OF TENSES. 

182. The tenses of the verbs are divided into primi- 
tive and derivative. 

183. The primitive tenses are those which form all the 
other tenses, and are five in number, viz. : 

The present of the infinitive, 

The participle present, 

The participle past, 

The present of the indicative, and 

The preterit definite. 

184. The derivative tenses are those which are formed 
by the primitive tenses. 

185. The present of the infinitive forms two tenses : 

186. 1 . The future absolute, by changing r, re, or oir, 
into rai : as, purler, je parlerai ; finir, jejinirai ; vendre, 
je vendrai ; recevoir, je recevrai. 

187. 2. The conditional present, by changing r, re, or 
oir, into rais : as, parler, je parlerais ; jinir, je finirais ; 
vendre, je vendrais ; recevoir, je recevrais. 

188. The participle present forms two tenses : 

189. 1. The imperfect of the indicative, by changing 
ant into ais : as, parlant, je parlais ; finissant, jefinissais. 

190. 2. The present of the subjunctive, by changing 
ant into e : as, parlant, que je parle ; finissant, que je 
finisse ; vendant, que je vendisse : 

191. Except the verbs of the third conjugation, which 
change evant into oive : as, recevant, que je regoive. 

192. Observe, that the first and second persons plural 
of these two tenses, which end in ions and iez, make iions 
and iiez, when the participle ends in iant ; and make 
yions and yiez, when the participle ends in yant : as, 
priant, nous pr iions, vous priiez ; pay ant, nous pay ions, 
vous payiez. 



116 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH; 

193. The participle past forms all the compound tenses 
with the help of the verb avoir, or elre : as, f ai estime\ 
je suis estime ; il avaitfini, il etait Jini. 

194. The present of the indicative forms the impera- 
tive, by suppressing the pronouns which serve as subjects : 
as, tu paries, paries ; nous parlous, parlous ; vous parlez, 
parlez. 

195. Observe, that in the first conjugation only, the 
second person singular of the imperative does not take the 
s final of the same person of the indicative. 

196. The preterit definite forms the imperfect of the 
subjunctive, by changing i into sse, for the first conjuga- 
tion, and by adding se, for the three others : as, je parlai, 
que je parlasse ; je finis, que je finisse ; je regus, que je 
regusse ; je vendis, que je vendisse. 

TABLE OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE SIMPLE 
TENSES OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 









PRESENT. 










pari 


er 


fin ir 
PARTICIPLES, 

PRESENT. 


rece^ 


• oir 


vend re 




pari 


ant 


fin issant 


rec evant 


vend ant 








PAST. 










pari 


£ 


fin i 


rec 


u 


vend u 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 












PRESENT. 








je 


pari 


e 


fin is 


re § 


ois 


vend s 


tu 




es 


is 




ois 


5 


il 




e 


it 




oit 


it 


nous 




ons 


issons 




evons 


on3 


vous 




ez 


issez 




evez 


ez 


lis 




ent 


issent 

IMPERFECT. 




oivent 


ent 


je 


pari 


ais 


fin issais 


rec 


evais 


vend ais 


tu 




ais 


issais 




evais 


ais 


il 




ait 


issait 




evait 


ait 


nou 




ion 


issions 




evions 


ions 


vou 




iez 


issiez 




eviez 


iez 


ils 




aient 


issaient 




etaient 


aicnt 








PRETERIT DEFINITE. 






je 


pari 


ai 


fin is 


rec. 


us 


vend is 


tu 




as 


is 




us 


is 


il 




a 


it 




ut 


it 


neus 




Ames 


imes 




umes 


imes 


vou» 




dtes 


ites 




utts 


ites 


ils 




irent 


irent 




urent 


irent 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



117 









FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 






je 


pari 


erai 


fin irai 


rec evrai 


vend 


rai 


tu 




eras 


iras 


evras 




ras 


fl 




■era 


ira 


evra 




ra 


nous 




erons 


irons 


evrons 




rons 


vous 




erez 


irez 


evrez 




rez 


ils 




eront 


iront 


evront 




ront 








CONDITIONAL MOOD. 




, 








PRESENT. 








je 


pari 


erais 


fin irais 


rec evrais 


vend 


rais 


tu 




erais 


irais 


evrais 




rais 


a 




erait 


irait 


evrait 




rait 


nous 




erions 


irions 


evrions 




rions 


VOUS 




eriez 


iriez 


evriez 




riez 


lis 




eraient 


iraient 


evraient 




raient 








IMPERATIVE MOOD. 








pari 


e 


fin is 


rec ois 


vend 


s 


qu' il 




e 


isse 


oive 




e 






one 


issons 


evons 




ons 






ez 


issez 


evez 




ez 


qu' Us 




ent 


issent 


oivent 




ent 








SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 












PRESENT. 








que je 


pari 


e 


fin isse 


rec oive 


vend 


e 


que tu 




es 


isses 


oives 




es 


qu' il 




e 


isse 


oive 




e 


que nous 




ions 


issions 


evions 




ions 


que voua 




iez 


issiez 


eviez 




iez 


qu' ils 




ent 


issent 
IMPERFECT. 


oivent 




ent 


que je 


pari 


asse 


fin isse 


Tec, usee 


vend 


isse 


que tu 




asses 


isses 


usses 




isses 


qu' il 




At 


it 


<it 




it 


que nous 




assions 


issions 


ussions 




issions 


que vous 




assiez 


issiez 


ussiez 




issiez 


•qu' ils 




assent 


issent 


ussext 




issent 



OF THE IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



197. Irregularities never occur but in the simple 
tenses. 

198. When a primitive tense is wanting, its derivative 
tenses are also wanting. 

199. The imperfect of the indicative is always regu- 
larly formed by the participle present. 



118 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

200. The future, and conditional never change their 
terminations, and the irregularity which they undergo is 
always uniform ; so that, the first person of the future 
being known, it is easy to form both tenses. 

201. The preterit definite is always regular. 

202. The imperfect of the subjunctive is always regu- 
larly formed by the preterit definite. 

203. The imperative is always regularly formed by 
the present of the indicative, except in the verbs avoir, 
etre, and savoir y for which see the following table. 

204. The third person singular and plural of the 
imperative being always the same as in the present of 
the subjunctive, may be considered as belonging to that 
tense. 

205. By attending to these directions, and applying 
them to the annexed " Table of the Irregular and Defec- 
tive Verbs," and the " List of all the Irregular and Defec- 
tive Verbs in the French Language not contained in the 
Table," immediately following it, the study of the im- 
portant branch of grammar here treated of may be mastered 
certainly, and without difficulty. 

206. In the "List," which consists chiefly of com- 
pounds of verbs in the Table, reference is made from each 
verb to a model in the Table, conformably to which it is 
to be conjugated. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



110 



*<% 



*• £ 
£* 



» N ~ IN 



> a a 

S4)» 



«^J « > > > 

.-33: .-a c a a 
- - kj 4) a> v 



a o> a 

.-2 : 31 

a as, 
a, 



c - v j. -7 
- 3 3d te oa 

£. 0.6,0, S3 -jin 



? ** > 
£ S a 



.3 -a .3 &, 

000 a 

> > > .5 

a a a _, 

05 0> 0) ~ 



c»b a a a 

C 3 w o »» 

3aS £-22 « 
c 



M s 



* "2 



« a 



■a rt 

3 4) 



-~ 5 o 

« "* s> 

2 ^2 

a ce *^ 

— to o> 

5 * O 

« 3 o 



i? to 3 

" 2 « 



S .2 



J%gS 

O =0 to 63 

fc W "< £_, Co 



ajaj a 



to is 

a to 






H £ 

& a 

w> a 

S S 



~ 3 r? 



*^> 



1- pi, a; to 
&> a ^ 






5 * 

3 5 
5 ££ 



120 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



fc s 



A. ft, 



£* 









= = = = 5 



cr w cr x J; ao 

uSu 2 « e> 



DCS 

,»££ .2.2.2; =» 9 S «3 

■S '3 "2 S5S — = = ~ ~ vo ^ = s 

O'CTD' ■■■*, 099 3 3 3 ® "3 « 



- - - s - - — ^L .= _= wow 



5 Ja 



r a 

w a 



g.|| 

>- O o 



=3 «S 



is s 



c 9 

O *" 



3 s c 

C J) c 

« x"3 

V. s. -j. 

S?3 



O 1 s -• 



coc cos ccc e « c =-r 
c — 2 o £ ffl oa " 535 2 E - 

HI Iff iff iff III 

• • • ; '. • • * • : • • ! r ; 

..• . ■ . eo«i , • . . . 



id k 
s3 ei 



3 S «"33 



333-s3a.-c;s==- *-*»*; 
;co ccc sss cc_x o o o 
: .a .a wow wow 13 >-5J VO *a 



||| 

•- ?- "Z 



r = 3 



■3 «S 



S a 



*® 33 



5 55 



as 



2 4+ ft. 

•*? 3T 5" 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



121 



SJ)fi 3 45 s 



><3<C 



o O J) 
<n to en 
en to en 






§•2 § 

ill 



3 3 3 
05 05 05 

ESS 



cti co 



* I 

a s 



! N ■£ <» N *J «B N *J 

: <a s fi«a c <u -s • 
i to 45 o >> 45 oS® 



3 O 3 

2S C 



aas 



3§3 
O 



> > > 
3 3 3 
O O O 



*2'g 



£ S 



II 






O <*> O 

.55 g« 
ts : s to 
a> s as 

s 3 a> w c3 
•S tog S 

Ills 

»«;•'! 
•«"s s» .§ -3 






si 1 , s ° 

i_, > — 

O C 0) 



5 3 



.5 S 



o a. 






« ¥ 



i_ O "> o _^ ■« «- 

£-2 ••§£>> >> 

£.3 > 3 ^ co jo 

*±:S±±Sg= 



«2. - 

a* .8 

2 § 

to -~ 

S I? 



fcfi 



Go 
- £ • S ^ 

S v> to 45 "2 
O -^3 » § 

is ^ 

•3 « 2 

o> to to V* ^ 

>> .£ «.s * 

2 .S5a g 

45 T5 o o -5 
05.5 « .-s 

5 « 3 ^ c< 
%-5cp5.a 

o o ^ •» js -a 
"g o CD k) -3 

<45 £ .£; (SO 4> 



C 
CO 

.3. to 
♦3 en 

45 "* 

,3 » _ 

5 «'~ 
° > _ 

CD 



Hi 

>-. 3 






122 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



i 



° - «; .2 > 
•£ 5 s~ > J* 



« 




s~ 


tf 




| 


W 






f> 






H 




^ 


> 


'a 


-a 


H 




11 




cj 

g 

o 

o 


1 


w 


J 




ft 


^ 






O 




ft 




8 
1 


< 


5 


a. 


rt 


b 


at 


•4 


k 


a 


hi 


o 


'S 


S3 


o 


i 




Q 


•i Co 


i— « 






w 


'-a 


Si 


« 






H 




» 


Pm 




!§.■§ 


o 




• ~ % 


w 




*t 


hi 






PQ 










CO . 



oo t*-» w S ~ 

§.2g g|S 



CSS 

c c c 3 ~ s 

o> cu cu <J <c; o 

•C-3-3 !> S- > 



k > 
00 W 



g 5 § <B 5 £ 

05 m 00 CD iB 00 



00 5 50 

■ S od 



"3 • • 



*S 00 tJ r* 

- *5«® *» 

S « >* 



O 0) 0> <fl} *•© *4i 

3 3-3 >>f 



O 

o 
o 



S 1.2 » 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



123 



E b 3 
>,o 2 

OJ=-g 



> 3 3 
3 O J 



.£ t-S 

>>o o 

c > > 

gaa 



SO H ♦* to N *J 

E a> S coC 

.2 « g .g 3 a 

>«« 



ft 



u ft ceo 

-j >>>— >>> 

3 3 3 ™ - 3 3 

3 "S S oo5 

c S £ s cr ftftft 



ai w o> P * «5 
co to a) > > > 

.— .^- .,3 ^)^j\4) 

ftftft 



>>0 O 
o > > 



coo 
> > > 

^ v^ N^) 



ftftft 



IS"?* 



o'oo 
.3.3.3 
o o o 

.©>a)XD 

•a -una 



CO s 

ce 
.3.3 
o o 
sasu 
•0*0 



II 

™ 3 e 



& S ^ 



B OJ 3 
o >> SJ 



^ s 






A =3 



B <o 3 C»S 

O > cu 0-=_2 

£§B «>g 

Oft| >^£ 

& )H ft »H 

• ft • ft 



3 3 3 
.. • ea ctf ci 

B B B -^ B E vrnvrnvfli 
OOO 3 c a> n >-. i« 

ftftft ftftft ftftft 



— 1= 



OOO 



>>o' 

O > 



ft ft S 



B S 
p< ft 



3 >H U 

1 1 I 



11 

I i 

ft ft 



5 >..S 
f c o 

6 ° 5 
,2 >> £ 

to -h o 

B be ft 

O tc g 






» x .3 

t= P H 



124 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



m 




CQ 




PS 




W 




> 


•a 






W 


-S3 


t> 






8 


O 


o 


fin 


4 


W 


o 


Q 


K 


ft 


"3 
03 


K 


b 


< 


§ 


tf 


o 


< 


o 




3 

1 


Pi 


g 


K! 




i— t 




w 




« 




Eh 




Ph 




o 




w 




J 




PQ 




< 




h 





r 



11 



CD N « 

c n — 

g g <g 



53 SI) 



c a) s g a a 
.2 >,•£ o ~ .2 



us*: 



c-r » cr.2 

'Is s f?3 



> > 






5) S3 4) 



,2.2.2 
a> a> a> '3'- 



- ._ .2 333 
a 3 3 '3 S "S coo a> o <u 
SSS £>> >>> ► ►> 



sra 



C 03 C 

o > a> 

> ri 5 

« » S 



as N ^J co S3 *j 



c s».2 
£*£ c 

O 5° «> 



to S) *J m N ri 

**i r>g ill 



o°2 x x ^ 

£ £ 2 s s fl 

3 3 3 tS c3 ej 



3 .-» -J WWW w — w 

III >>> >?•>■ 



,2 .2 .tj 3^3 

o o o 5 » ® 



£ 8 s § 



;~ 



•fee 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



125 



a <" 5 

.2 o o 

O oo in 

w J5 ,Q 



o o o 

Jq.o ja 



S ill ^ Rt!H 

.2 '3 2 2 > * 

111 IjI 






C 4> C 

•2-Sg 

.af-a 
g 1 § 

« « £ 

•k '« '3 



_ro m in 
"3 'o 'o 
CCS 
O O O 



C o> C b <u C 

O > *> O >.« 



x> es.fi bj 2 



m i " .2 .2 .« 

S S fl c3 cS o3 

o o o 3 3 3 

to jo oa m xn xn 

■3-2- .fi.fi.fi 

<8 « ed c3 ej ctf 



5^ 

5 => 
2 ° 

2 to 

•9 <o 



C o> 

o-« o > » 

SSS > c > 

ca.o 2 "" 



fl.fi' 



„ .2.5.15 £• 

* cJUsl OOO* 
C3 «£j ii^ -; 



o u 

c c 

o o 



« .2 



o ^ 
03 n3 



III 



1 ^ .2 

c3 ^ ^ 

a * 4 

I 1 i 

-j .On) 



•a c 






« 5 2 

.5 a, 'S 



S a ? Si 

il £ *% 

I — * 03 • ! - I ! ■.«&-= 



13 • s 
<»2o 



<3 «. 



0> • gS oi 

> . >>S« . W 

c-3° S|S-§ 

4) .S.-C ^2mO. 

!ll»lis 



-osa > -c.2 

45 £~ ♦* .£ 05 — £3 

§ o c £ 3 .g « 

>>0 T3 0) 'S T3 -O 
"C ,4) 4) fi« w 4) 4) 



126 



COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



C » C = 

o : - ^ <3 • 



-7 .r ■ i ■- >-•- ~ B ■ 

C -' = = >. = - 

s s.o o o *; 2 ~ ~ z 

a O o « --- g r - 

o o . _ o ■ • >_ - -- 



^ 



D ■ 5 2 

s = 3 o '5 '3 o o '3 

o c - - - 
- -_ -- - - - 



a a Z 



o 

I 

w 

CQ 
« 

!> 

w 
> 

o 

w 
p 

P 



t. s •; 



■ s: 



a s *J 

o $ « 5 >. * 

>» o d 
c >- ■ 

R O £ 

c - - 



5 G " 



= = 2 Egg 

~ "~ -_ ■- - - -- - - ----- - - - 



- - - 

- 2 ^ 

S = : 



: z z 

- - - 
. - - 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



127 



» CO 
» XD 

rasa 



« OH 

-o2 -c 
33 £ 



S & 
O > 



B <D S 

.Si CD M 



bc-2 -2r 
•S o o 



tv> a) o 

s s B 

bcboM 



d N ti 

c 4 S 
O B § 
C 60 B 

o -7? O 



O •£ 



-B *» 

I I 



SO! 1- 



1 Is 






B "to 

fi q><? 

8 3 3 

£ ««« 

B *« 



5= P & 



128 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



•2 s 
•If 
ft*. 



B « B 



s © a 

c •- ^ 
■ — • ~ 



511 



ESS ESS 



S a) a 

O r. Q 



? - 



E ■ - 



E © 

C it - 

m ■ ■ _ 
.- t: ■— -3 *o ~ 

R<3 £ : S 



£S 2 



-c — — " Jg *J 

999 >S "O T3 

p3 eS Gd -o -i sy 

5 E S SS S 



t» N -3! BS« tr-N 

S « S 3 i> E e © 

B39 c — © o "fl 

ill HI I! 

S-r fSS |= 



III 

= '=•3 

E = s 



i So *3 i S I J a 3 i 

£ Jj J3 3 3 3 to JJ 3 x -x 71 

© 0) W OQO 3 "3 "3 S = 3 



SSS s s s 



c s a sss 



B © E s © B 
= = g c - 2 
r s "~ "3 o 9 
- - " = = £ 
S 7 s 



= y - s 

B : - 



3 3j S 

X 0C X X 



ac 31 

•3 3 3 

3 3 3 



X X ^J 

£ £ "3"3 - 3 3 '3 

33 eSfl bSs 



s s 



s s 



■ 


1 3 


w 


i 


■J 




e8 33 




va> 




B 


S S 




E 


s 


1 


2 » 


•§ 

1 

5i 


* 
*s 

to 
1 


s 


to 


~s W 


to 


w. 


2 


c © 


3 


a 


a 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



129 



s a> 3 
I'll 



4) « aj 



O) « -Jl 



a v a 
°'3 ?" 



•3 5s « -a ■ 



<W <B « 



k r. 53 

'3 '3 '3 .22.22.S2 

333 .2** 

O.Q.O. B.O.O. 



- — 



B 'S •- .2 

c .22 3 3 

W 3 -3~ 



03 N • 

c u 
0:3 



fljoo * oo m a)4)u> 
EBB -— -— — fi ™ 'A > > > 
3 3 ?? i 



- v 

B.S.B, 



3 3 3 g a 3 

-3 — -3 &aa 

*C} *G) »0 O 0) d) ^)\4)^) 



e - ~ 



r 



3 a H 

c a i> 
.22 '3 -2 
cs-3 J2 

"3. 



S .S 3 -3 



03 N *■» CON 

E <U 3 c o 

c > « o "C 

■- S - C 3 3 

g O. g S -a x 



•~ -n 



tf 03 03 

.J 2«h " " • 5 "3 TS 13 .ii ^s .-^ 

oa i *J 'sj 'ed 3 .22 .22 £ 3 3 E B 3 3 3 

•S'313 8*3 JSAS & £££ S3S 

0.0.0. O.O.O. 0,0,0, 5S CO.O. >h >. >-, 



a 


« 


S§ 




« 




1 






ca 

2 


s 
1 




Q 


2 


* 


2 


2 


2 



130 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



> 1 



H 
O 

K 

ft 

Q 

is 

«i 

£> 
O 
W 
PS 

s 

w 
w 

H 

C 

£3 
iJ 

<J 
H 



i 



•Sg-ft 

II s 

S O o 



£53 
o o o 



£* 



£ 3 - 



c s.o« 

s = a 

ceo 



m " - 

s a> e 

o •£ « 

•- 2 * 

111 

3m» 



£.5 £ 

f- 2 — 



HI I|| 



s 9- 



go* 



d) o o 

S 5 3 
cr a* C 
.£.£.£ c = 2 f 
ps s"s"s £ £ £ 'I'l'g >>> 

(cui toaioa -www >>> ■*•">* 



5SSES £>. 



o — o 



I J5 0= N *J B S« 



in N« 

?ll &&g §|§ 

•3g3 gag g-.2| 

"3 > .- 



5 S 



so to 2 ti • • 

°> m s = = = S S 

73 •«-* gQQQOQ X cq {Q 



= £ * £ 



o o o 

see 



'£ >> 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



131 



W 
> 
> 

F 

c 

h 
N 
ft 

ft 

P 

o 

w 

P=i 

w 
a 

H 

< 
o 

</2 



8 S 



a 

•- 

H 



j , , i , 



e 

J: o 

£ c 
o « 






> 1"° ? 



j. s o * 



SSS89 



O 3 O *j 






OT3 <U £ O £ £ tt 



o.e.„ , 

t, fl K fl B ft t 



1- a; O <6 <D 0) O 

^, ^, '/. ^ u'j i, .-jl 



Hill I I Hi! I ill.! 



COP" 



<5 » 



3. §,§, 
'to "3> 






1 "S a 'i: *| a "S "C 5 5 a 

a sc 5 ao = a 2 *> £ 

2 s s 8 e e s ° 3 I £ 



9 o 2 5 = = 






.a.S 

ss 



132 



COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 




B o 




GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



133 



**»* § 2 -S •« .-S 



« © <3 



S.5S.-B S g 

- ^ » tt" ? *t 



5 s, 

5? » 






o 



2 : £ 

■3 0) >H 



ffSssHfHS 

*».S»--«rs:.Sw*w 
» ,3 ^ *» 8 



ITS rag's 8 'SgS.s-g gfSti o ^.5 2'5'S £*|«£T3 

» ;; a> >-«« o u o^> m tf id aj a> si 3 co . "= s» „ «>ajcoo i* ^ 



8 8 
<s © 
'WIS 



5 S * ™ *B S 

e bos 




^"^ £ h § s © « ~ © « 



g © Q 



•*.<8 42 



"^ ■£„ <U O^J 4)^ C rf <p <u 
•O CSoOBPOTSiaoOCOMIfiJ-l 



i i i 

t ^ o 



•Sis 



•S3 

©■ © 



0) <j) 



• • . <u 

0} <D O) i) £ 



b ~ 

■s «s w 



o « o 



o>« e3 CO 
cd 13 f- so i- 



134 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



8 3 



Hi? -p-MWPlI 

> 5 ~ S •S5|23« 5 :-; 



&* a » -a 



= 5 



0) v 



n 

H 









<U 0) 



•S-S 



S£ 



, w » 3 5 



O *« ai -- :- 'wOOaj'G'qiB. 



j -5 ni C C C 



6 g £ g c E 2 o 2 

s *■ • g § 1 s 



■S ? 







g i 2 -a £ vi a> 

-c — 3 ~~z -~ — _ 

c H.5'3=-=H=-= = 2^<u 
xu -aj .2 5 a s HftSi'SsS 

•3 — -3 0> 4> OJ 4><4>-*v«Ci ts>o 



S.B.S2 2 2 22 «KSS ££ 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



135 



i t'S'S 3 « S-'S.g '~ f'5 
fco fc* to g -a ^ «o 

> a ; <3 ss J 3 p ~ S 




2 ~-3 a s 







l§s 



O fcj; u 






£ £ £ 



S * £ 5^= 









111 



136 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE FIRST 
CONJUGATION. 

EXERCISE XXXVI. 

Will you go this evening into the country] I am going 

soir a campagne 1 f. 

to pay some visits, and if I be at liberty early I 

— faire suis ••••libre- de bonne heure 

shall certainly go home. Go there with thy brother. Go 
chez moi. 

and do that errand. Go there and put every thin? 

— commission,/. — mettre 

in order. Let him go to church on holidays. 

en art. f. — art. jours delete. 

By being loaded with scents, and particularly amber, he 

a force d' fitre de odeur, surtout ambre, 

offends the smell. They have woven silk and 

• -aentirmauvais- •• de art. 

cotton together, and made a very pretty 

de art. en ont fait 

stuff. I shall send 2 spring 'flowers to those ladies. I 

6toffe,/. des printanier /. 

would go to Rome if I could. We would send back our horses. 

pouvais. 
Why do you go away so soon 1 ? My brother and sister went 

yesterday to Boston. I will not go any more a-hunting. 

plus a art. chasse. /. 

Are they not going away ? I would go with them, if I was not 

engaged. 
occupe\ 

IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE SE- 
COND CONJUGATION. 

EXERCISE XXXVII. 
May the name of that good king be blessed from generation to 

generation ! These trees blossomed twice every year. 

deux fois tout art. an, pi. 
The arts and sciences flourished at Athens in the time of Pericles, 
a Athenes Pericles. 

Horace and Virgil flourished under the reign of Augustus. We 

Virgile m. Auguste. 

discovered from the top of the mountain a vast plain full of 
de"couvrir haut /. rempli 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 137 

2 flowery 'meadows. The empire of the Babylonians was long 

fleurissant m. Babylonien 

a flourishing one. We did not hate the man, but his vices. 

Does she really hate that vain pomp, and all the parade of 

pompe, f. appareil art. 

grandeur. 

EXERCISE XXXVIII. 

Take that water off the fire, it boils too fast. Do not 
Retirer /. de dessus m. fort. 

let 2 the 3 soup 4 boil-away so much. That sauce has 
laisser pot ••• 1 tant-- /. est 

2 boiled-away too much. Boil that meat again, it has not 

•• ltrop--- Faites viande,/. 

boiled 2 long 'enough. He runs faster than I. I ran about use- 

vite moi. — 

lessly all the morning. We ran at the voice of that honest man, 

matinee. 
and assisted him. The moment he saw us in danger, he ran 

• • Des que- • • en 

to us and delivered us. By conduct so whimsical, should 

un /. bizarre, 

we not contribute to our destruction ? He discoursed so long on 

concourir perte 1 

the immortality of the soul, and the certainty of another life, that 

certitude, /. 
he left nothing unsaid. If we were to act thus, we should 

en arriere. agir 

certainly incur the displeasure of our parents. I would not, have 

disgrace, /. 
recourse to 3 so 4 base 'a 2 method. Will men always run 

moyen,w. art. 

after shadows 1 

de art. chimere ? 

EXERCISE XXXIX. 

He was near losing his life in that encounter. He was 

faillir perdre — art. rencontre,/. 

near falling into the snare which was laid for him. His 
donner on avait tendu — lui. — 

strength 2 fails 'him every day. Let us have something 2 to 
art. d^faillir Donnez-nous — 

3 eat 'directly ; we are fainting with fatigue and hunger. I 
vite ; de faim. 

cannot meet him ; he shuns me. When we know not how to 
le i sait 



138 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

employ our time, we endeavour to fly from ourselves. Would 

chercher se — soi-meme. 

he not avoid flatterers, if he knew all their falsehood] He 

fuir art. f. 

died by a 2 very 3 painful disease. She died of grief for the 
de cruel maladie,/. chagrin de avoir 

loss of her son. He is dying. She was expiring with grief, 
perdu se mourir. ••semourir-- de 

when the fear of death at last wrested her secret from her. 
crainte/. art. enfin arracher m. — lui. 



EXERCISE XL. 

Send for the physician and follow exactly his advice. Go 

and fetch my cane. Every day he acquired celebrity by 

— canne,/. de art. f. 

works calculated to fix the attention of an 2 enlightened 'public, 
des fait pour 

That I would acquire riches at the expense of my honesty ! 

des depens probite ! /. 

He had acquired by his merit great influence over the opinions 

m. un /. sing. 

of his contemporaries. I have inquired about that man every where, 

contemporain. de -la partout, 

and have not been able to hear any thing of him. Who 3 has 

je ••■pu--- avoir de nouvelles •••en--- 

^requested 2 it of ^ou? Sesostris, king of Egypt, conquered a 

en- 
great part of Asia. The formidable 'empire which Alexander 
art. - Alexandre 

conquered, did not last longer than his life. I have heard that 

ou'i dire 
2 important 'news. He dressed himself in haste, and 

/. • • • se vetir a art. h asp. hate,/. 

went out immediately. I wish she would dress the children 

sortir sur-le-champ. voudrais que •••vetir 

with more care. If his fortune permitted him, he would clothe 

le lui, 
all the poor of his parish. Two servants clothed him with his 

domestique rev6tir de 

2 ducal 'mantle. He passed only for a traveller ; but lately 

manteau. ne depuis peu 

he has assumed the character of an envoy. It begins to be very 

revetir — envoye\ 

warm ; it is time to throw off some clothing. 

de se devetir. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 139 

EXERCISE XLI. 

I will gather, with pleasure, some of these flowers and fruits, since 

you wish to have some. Do not gather these peaches before 
en. /•' 

they are ripe. That is a country where they 3 neither 

que ne soient Ce pays on ni 

2 reap corn, nor gather grapes. We shall collect in 2 an- 
*ne recueillir ble\ ni — vin. recueillir 

cient 'history important 5 and 6 valuable 3 facts. He received us in 

precieux accueillir de 

3 the 4 most 5 polite 2 manner. Poverty, misery, sickness, perse- 

lart. 
cution, in a word, all the misfortunes in the world have fallen upon 
en malheur de -accueillir • 

him. If you give six inches to that cornice, it will project loo 

corniche,"/. 
much. That balcony projected too much ; it darkened the dining 

balcon, m. obscurcir 

room. When Moses struck the rock, there gushed out of it 
Moi'se roclier, m. il -en- 

a spring of 2 living 'water. The blood gushed from his vein 

source veine,/. 

with impetuosity. We shall assault the enemv to-morrow in their 

pi. 
intrenchments. Were we not overtaken by a horrible storm ? 
retranchement. assailli tempete ? /. 

At every word that they said to him concerning his son, the good 
a chaque de 

old man leaped for joy. Will you not shudder with fear? 
vieillard tressaillir de tressaillir de peur? 

You may set out this morning, but remember to come back at night. 

ce soir. 

EXERCISE XLII. 

Tell me what she has done to you ; but, above all, do not lie. 

2 Were 'I in your place, I would not offer her any money. Why 
Si a de 

do you not open the door for your sister 1 Your actions never belie 

a 
your words. Y~our brother repents much of having sold his books, 
parole. avoir 

I would serve him with all my heart, if I could. The more we 
de — 



140 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

are above others, the more it becomes us to be modest and 

au-dessus des — 

humble. My aunt and I came yesterday to see you, but 

nous pour 

you were not at home. I hope that you will keep your word 

and come to-morrow. At last she has agreed to pay her an 

que Enfin de 

annual pension of two hundred francs. Come on Friday morning 

at nine o'clock. You will obtain leave to go out another 

art. permission 
time, if you come back soon. The first time you come to see me, 

que fut. — 

I will keep you two or three days. He is so prepossessed against me, 
that he will not agree that he is in the wrong. The first time I go 



out, remind ? me to call on your brother. That hat 

ifaire 3 souvenir de passer chez 

would suit you very well, if you were a little taller. I should not 
suffer so much if it were fine weather. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 

EXERCISE XLTII. 

I had apartments that I liked ; I will endeavour to have them again. 

un logement de 

Beware of falling. Since the publication of his last work, he has 

much fallen in the esteem of the public. If he do not alter his 

d^choir changer de — 

conduct, he will decline every day in his reputation and credit 

• • dechoir • • de jour-en-jour de /. m. 

He has put in the lottery, and he hopes that a capital prize 

mis a loterie,/. — art. gros lot 

will fall to him. That bill of exchange has expired. The 
£choir iettre,/. change etre 6choir. 

first term expires at midsummer. You have drawn on me a bill 

terme a la Saint-Jean. 

of exchange ; when is it payable ? I did not believe that I must 
• • 6choir il ? • • devoir 

so soon take that journey. He must have sunk under 

faire voyage. qu' il — succombat 

the efforts of so many enemies. 
• • tant • • de 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 141 



EXERCISE XLIV. 

The spring which moves 2 the 'whole machine is very ingenious, 

Tessort, m. tout /. 

though very simple. Can you doubt that the soul, though it is 

spiritual, moves the body at pleasure! That is a man 

ne subj.pl. a sa volont6? 

whom nothing moves. We were moved with fear and pit- 

ne emouvoir. emu de 

When the famous D'Auguesseau was promoted to the dignity o. 

celebre 
chancellor, all France showed the greatest joy. That bishm 
chancelier, art. en t^moigner /. 

well deserved, by his talents and by his virtues, that the king should 

menter, 
promote him to the dignity of primate. The people think that it 

primat. sing, croit 

xains frogs and insects at certain seasons. It will not rain to- 

de art. en temps. 

day, but I fear that it may rain to-morrow. Let us sit down upon 

ne 
the grass. Do not make so much noise, I cannot learn my 

herbe,/. •••tant-- 

lesson. Do you know what has happened to her? No; I do 

est 
not know. 

EXERCISE XLV. 

When he arrived at home, he was quite exhausted. The minister 

chez lui, --n' en pouvoir plus-- 

had so many people at his levee that I could not speak to him. Are 

monde a audience 
you afraid that he will not accomplish that affair ? 1 

pouvoir, subj. pr. venir k bout de 

know that he is not your friend, but I know likewise that he is 

de pi. aussi ce 

a man of probity. Let them know that their pardon depends on 
bien. grace de 

their submission. I could wish that he knew his lessons a little 

soumission. 
better. Let us see if this 2 new-fashioned 'gown becomes you, or 

d' un nouveau gout robe,/. 
not Be assured that 2 too 3 gaudy 'colours will not become you. 

non. art. voyant /. 

The head-dress which that lady wore became her very ill. These 
coiffure lui 



142 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

colours become you so well, that you would do wrong to wear 

• ••avoir tort- •• - de en porter 

any others. Set that child in this arm-chair, and lake care lest 

de prendre garde qt?e 

he fall. I will sit down on the top of that hill, whence I 

ne sommet 

shall discover a prospect no less magnificent than diversified. We 
— decouvrir-- scene,/, anssi varie. 

were seated on the banks of the Thames, whence we were contem- 
bord Tamise,/. 

plating myriads of vessels, which carry every year the 

de art. millier apporter art. pi. 

riches of the two hemispheres. 



EXERCISE XLVI, 

Sep the 2 admirable 'order of the universe : does it not announce a 

2 supreme 'architect ? Has he again seen with pleasure his country 
artisan? 

and his friends? Had he had a glimpse of the dawn of this fine day T 

aurore 
To finish their affairs, it would be necessary for them to 

Pour falloir que — — — 

see one another. I clearly foresaw, from that time, all the 

ils s'entrevoir, siibj. im. bien des-Iors 

obstacles he would have to surmount. Would you wish that 

m. que surmonter. 

the judge should put off the execution of the sentence that he had 

arret 
pronounced? I shall not put off the pursuit of that affair. If 

rendu ? poursuite art. 

men do not provide for it, God will provide for it. Would this book 

• •>-■ • 
be good for nothing ? You have not paid for this ground more than 

valoir — — terre,/. 

it is worth ; are you afraid that it is not worth six hundred 
ne • -ne subj. pr.- ■ 

pounds ? One ounce of gold is equivalent to fifteen ounces of 
livres sterling? once./, 

silver. Doubt not that reason and truth will prevail 

art. art. ne ■■subj.pr.- 

at last. I can and will tell the truth. If you are willing, he 
la longue; le 

will be willing too. Be so good as to lend me your grammar. 

ie — Vouloir — — 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 143 

EXERCISE XLVII. 

If I would, I could soon know whether Mrs. D. has seen your aunt, 

si 
or not. The last time I was in the park, I could not distinguish her, 
on account of the trees that were between her and me ; I have only 
• -a cause •• 
been able to have a glimpse of her. "When you know your lesson, 

saurez 
come and repeat it to me. Did you not know that Mr. A. was to 
— repeler — 

marry Miss B. 1 I knew it, but was not willing to tell your brother of 
£pouser parler a 

it He who cannot command himself, is incapable of commanding 
se 
others. We ought to make a 2 judicious ! choice of those 
aux devoir judieieax choix, m. — 

friends, to whom we intend to give our confidence. Do you know 

vouloir 
where Miss B. lives 1 Yes, I do ; and I see her every 

demeurer ? — le sais ; 

clay at her window. Why will you not tell it me 1 Some told me 
that your brother could not pay me ; others told, me that he would 
not. We regularly pay all that we owe; but he says that he will pay 
nobody. You saw with what goodness she received him. Every 

body thinks, that, if they had pursued the enemy briskly, they 

vigoureusement, 
might have ended the war on that day. If you want 

finir — La avior besoin de 

that book you may take it ; it is at your service. May I go and see 

him 1 Yes, you may ; but come back as soon as you can. 
le - aussitdtque fut. 



"IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

EXERCISE XLVIIL 

Wood which is burned resolves itself into ashes and smoke. 
Art . on bruler se r^soudre en en 

Have they resolved on peace or war 1 ? The fog has resolved 
on — art. f. art. f. m. 



144 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

itself into rain. Could that judge so lightly absolve the guilty? 

I6gerement coupaWe ? pi. 

2 Strong J waters dissolve metals. Those drugs were 

Jlrt. art. On drogue 

dissolved before they were put into that medicine. My 

avant de les — injin.pr. remede, m. 

sister was sewing 2 all 4 day yesterday. That piece is not 

3 la journ6e 
well sewed, it must be sewed over again. Unstitch that lace, 

la inf.pr. dentelle,/. 

and sew it again very carefully, Does he set a great 

avec beancoup de sain. metre 

value upon riches? I never admitted those principles. Has he 
prix. m. a art. 
committed that fault ? If he would take my advice he would resign 

faute 1 /. me en croyait se demettre de 

his charge in favour of his son. His 5 arm ] he put out of joint 

/. en 4 Le — • - 2 se 'de^nettre ■ 

yesterday. I will omit nothing that depends on me, to 

de ce de pour 

serve you. God frequently permits the wicked to prosper, 

souvent que m6ehants • -subj.pr.- ■ 

Put this book in its place again. Under whatever form of govern- 
a /. quelque gouverne- 

ment you may live, remember that your first duty is to be 

ment que devoir de 

obedient to the laws. It frequently happens that fathers transmit 

sounds art. 

to their children both their vices and their virtues. He has long 

meddled with 2 p#blic 1 afiairs ; but his endeavours have not beea 

e' entremettre de efforts 

crowned with success, 
de 



EXERCISE XLIX. 

I took great pains : but, at last, I ground all the coffee. Grind 
beaucoup de sing. enfin, cafe\ m. 

those razors with care. Those knives are just ground. This grain 
rasoir venir d' etre 

is not sufficiently ground, it should be ground again. I wish 
assez falloir le inf. pr. 

that you would take courage. What news have you learned? 

Philosophy comprehends logic, ethics 

art. art. f. art. morale,/, s. art. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES- 145 

physics, and metaphysics. It is with difficulty that he 

physique, /. s. art. f.s. Ce • -difrkileinent- • 

divests himself of his opinions. I fear you will undertake 

• -se de"prendre • • que ne subj. pr.- • • • 

a task above your strength. Could he have been mistaken 

tache au-dessus de pi. 

so grossly 1 I reproved him continually for his faults, but to no 
reprendre sans cesse de d£faut, ••inu- 

purpose. We surprised the enemy, and cut them to pieces. In 
tilement. pL tailler en a 

the middle of the road the axletree of our carriage broke. Bad 

essieu se rompre. art. 

company corrupts the minds of young people. Why do you inter- 

pL sing. gens. 

rupt your brother, \vhen you see him busy 1 

oceup6 1 

EXERCISE L. 

For a long while ! we followed that method, which was calculated 
.. -Hong-temps •• • /. ne propre 

only to mislead us. What is the consequence? See the errors 

e>arex due s' ensuivre "? • 

-hat have sprung from this proposition, which appeared so true? 

s' ensuivre 
We pursued our course when some cries, which came from the 

suivre chemm lorsque des eoriis 

midst of the forest, excited terror in our souls. The Greeks 
fend porter art. f. Grec 

vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Salamis, Platea, and Mycale. 

Perse Salamine, Plat6e, 

I have, at last, convinced him., by 3 such 4 powerful 2 reasons, of 

si fort 1 des 

the greatness of his fault, that I have no doubt but he 

enormite" /. ne douter nullement que ne 

will repair it It is during winter that they thrash the corn, 

•subj.pr.. Ce pendant art. on battre 

in 3 cold Countries. The enemy was so completely beaten in 

*art. 7a. pi. 

that engagement, that he was forced to abandon thirty leagues of the 

rencontre, de lieue — 

# country. The cannon beat down the tower. They were fighting 

canon abattre tour, /. 

with unexampled fury, when a 2 panic 'terror made 

un 2 sans 3 exemple ^charnement 
them take flight, and dispersed them in an instant. Beal 

leur art. fuite,/. 

G 10 



146 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FkENCH 

these mattresses again. Happy are those who live in solitude I 

— art. retraite ! 

He did not long survive a person who was so dear to him, 

4 /- 

Fathers live again in their children. He was in a strange 

Art. 

dejection of mind ; but the news which he has received has 
accablement on fait 

revived him. 
inf. pr. 

EXERCISE LL 

What will you have him do ? Do not make so much 
Que vouloir — que — il subj.pr. 

noise. Do they never exact ? That woman mimicked all the 
do 

persons whom she had seen ; this levity rendered her odious. It 
que I6geret6 

was with difficulty he divested himself of the false opinions 
peine que se deTaire /. 

which had been given him in his infancy. Could it be possible 

on — lui /. 

that we should not again make a journey to Paris, Rome and 
•■•lefaire ••• Ie — voyage de 

Naples ? He says that you have offended him, and that if you do 

not satisfy him quickly, he will find means to satisfy 

promptement, art. moyen, m. de se 

himself. Every night, she milked her goats, which gave 

lui meme. art. soir, pi. 

her a great quantity of wholesome milk. Have you milked 

lui 2 abondant- • •• 3 et 4 sain 1 Iait, m. 

your goats ? Are the cows milked ? Salt is good to entice 

chevre ? vache attraire 

pigeons. You will never know the nature of bodies, 

art. connaitre art. 

if you do not abstract their Accidental 'qualities from those which 

are inherent in them. The least thing diverts his attention. 

• • leur • • moindre te distraire 

Will you not extract that charming passage ? Have you darned 

your gown? Should he not redeem that land? What! would 

Quoi! 
you that I should screen those guilty persons from the rigour of the 

, ••soustraire- • — a /. 

laws? 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 147 



EXERCISE LIT. 

Was not Virgil born at Mantua 1 It is from that 2 poisoned 'source 

Mantoue? Ce empoisonne" /. 

that have arisen all the 2 cruel 'wars that have desolated the universe, 
sont ne" /. 

The fable says, that as soon as Hercules had cut off one of the heads 
/. Hercule /. 

of the Hydra others sprang up. While their 2 united 

Hydre 4 de &autre lu< 2en 3 renaitre. Tandis que reuni 

'flocks fed on the 2 tender 3 and 4 flowery 'grass, they sung under 

to. paltre — /.a 

the shade of a tree the sweets of 2 rural 'life. Your horses 

ombre douceur art. champetre 

have not fed to-day ; you must have 'them fed. 

repaitre d' aujourd'hui ; 2 faire inf. pr. 

He is a man who thirsts 2 after nothing 'but blood and slaughter. 
Ce ne se repaitre de — que carnage. 

Young people tell what they do, old people what they have done, 
Art. gens vieillards 

and fools what they intend to do. You may set out when 
sot se proposer de 

you please ; we will follow you, 
il vous plaire, fut. s. 

EXERCISE LIII. 

The thunder which roared from afar announced a 2 dreadful 

m. bruire dans art. lointain 

'storm. They heard roar the waves of an 2 agitated 'sea. That 
orage, to. On riot /. 

street is too noisy for those who love retirement and study. I 

/. bruyant art. retraite 

have a glimpse of something that shines through those trees. 

entrevoir au travers de 

A ray of hope shone upon us in the midst of the misfortunes 
' rayon, m. — a milieu 

which overwhelmed us. Every thing is well rubbed in that house ; 

accabler frotte" 

every thing shines, even the floor. Would he not have 

y reluire, jusqiie a plancher, to. 
injured you in that affair 1 Will you preserve these peaches with 

confire a 

sugar, with honey, or with brandy 1 Did you pickle 
art. m. art. to. art. f. 



148 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

cucumbers, purslain, and sea-fennel 1 ? If he 

des concombre,m. de art. pourpier, m. de art. perce-pierre?/. 

loses his law-suit, all his property will not suffice, 
proces, m. bien, m. 

EXERCISE LIV. 

Always speak truth, but with discretion. Never contradict 

dire art. f. 

any one in public. You thought you were serving me in speak- 
personne — — inf. 

ing thus : well, let it be so ; you shall not be contradicted, 
eh! bien, soit---- en d£dire 

What ! would you forbid him all communication with his friends 1 
Quoi : interdire 

That woman who slandered every one, soon lost all kind 

de espece,/ 

of respect. You had foretold that event. Let us curse no 

consideration. 

one ; let us remember that our law forbids us to curse even 

se rappeler defendre de 

those who persecute us. Write every day the reflections which 

you make on the books you read. Did he not read that 2 in- 

que 
teresting 'history with a great deal of pleasure 1 God is an infinite 

'being who is circumscribed neither by time nor place. 

etre ne ni art. m. lieu, m. 

Will you not describe in that episode the 2 dreadful 'tempest which 

horrible 

assailed your hero 1 Get 2 those 3 soles *and 5 whitings fried. 

Faire sole merlan inf.fr. 

If you wish to form your taste, read over and over, unceasingly, 

vouloir — sans-cesse, 

the ancients. He was elected by a great majority of voices. We 

a 
have laughed heartily, and have resolved to go on. He 

de bon coeur, nous de 'continuer. 

did not answer him any thing: but he smiled at him, as a 
lui -rien-- — lui, en — 

sign of approbation, in the 2 kindest 'manner, 
de gracieux air, m. 

EXERCISE LV. 
Seated under the shade of palm-trees, they were milking their goats 

a palmier, 

and ewes, and 2 merrily 'drinking that nectar, which was renewed 
brebis, avecjoie m. 6e renouveler 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 149 

every day. Should they not have drunk with ice 1 This 

a art. f. 
window does not shut well; when you have made some alterations 

reparation 
in it, it will shut better. He had scarcely closed his eyes 

• •y mieux. a peine — art. 

when the noise which they made at his door awoke him. Have 
que on a reveiller 

they not enclosed the suburbs within the city ] Will you en- 
on faubourg /. 

close your park with a wall, or a hedge"? Put the eggs of 

pare de mur, m. haie? /. ceuf 

those silk-worms in the sun, that they may hatch. Those 

vers-a-soie, m. a. 
flowers, just blown, spread the sweetest fragrance, 

nouvellement repandre parfum, m. 

When did they conclude this treaty ] His enemies managed 

traite7 m. faire 

so well, that he was unanimously excluded from the company. 

unanimement 
Did you think me capable of 3 so 4 black ! an 2 act 1 He possesses 

croire trait? m. avoir 

some knowledge ; but not so much as he thinks, 
savoir; vt. • • il s'en fait trop accroire- • • 



CHAPTER VI. 
OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

207. The participle is a part of the verb which par- 
takes of the properties both of a verb and an adjective : 
of a verb as it has its signification and regimen ; of an 
adjective, as it expresses the quality of a person, or thing. 

208. There are two participles : the participle present, 
and the participle past. 

OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

209. The participle present always terminates in ant: 
as, parlant, Jinissant, recevant, vendant. 

210. It always expresses an action, and is indeclin- 
able : as. 



150 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

Une montagne dominant sur A mountain commanding im< 
des plaines immenses. mense plains. 

Je vois des hommes venant a I see men coming to us. 



211. What grammarians call the gerund, is nothing 
but the participle present with the preposition en prefixed 
to it : as, on se forme V esprit en lisant de Ions Jivres, we 
form our minds by reading good books. 

212. There are adjectives which are spelled like the 
participle present ; but as they imply merely an attribute 
of the noun, and do not express an action, and moreover 
agree with their substantives in gender and number, it will 
not be difficult to distinguish them from it. Thus : 

Je vois des agneaux bondis- I see lambs skipping in the 

sant (part.) dans la plaine. plain. 

J' aime a voir les agneaux I like to see skipping lambs 

bondissans (adj.) errer dans la ramble in the plain. 
plaine. 

213. The first sentence of the preceding example con- 
veys the idea that the lambs are noio engaged in the act 
of skipping ; while the second merely implies that it is an 
attribute, or propensity, of lambs to skip. 

EXERCISE LVI. 

This woman is of good disposition, obliging every one, whenever 

un caraetere, toutle monde, quand 

she has it in her power. They go cringing before the great, 

le peut ramper devant pi. 

that they may be insolent to their equals. The state of 

afin de — ivf. pr. avec £gal. 

pare nature is that of the savage, living in the desert, but living in 

his family, knowing his children, loving them, making use of 

famille,/. connaitre ••••user 

speech, and making himself understood. An 2 agreeable 

art. parole./. se faire entendre 

'languor, imperceptibly laying hold of my senses, suspended the 
langueur, / insensiblement s' emparer sens, 

activity of my soul, and I fell asleep. Time is a real blunderer, 
s' endormir. vrai brouulon, 

placing, replacing, ordering, disordering, impressing, erasing, ap- 
mettre, ranger, 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 151 

preaching, removing, and making all things good and bad ; and 

rendre 
almost always making them impossible to be known again. She 

meconnaisable 

met your father as she was coming here. My mother was 

en on 

told the day before yesterday that your sister, remembering 

dire a avant hier se ressouvenir de 

the injuries she had received from your brother, refused to see him. 
que 

OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 

214. The participle past has various terminations : as, 
mme,fini, regit, ouvert, dissous, &,c. 

215. When accompanied by the auxiliary verb lire, 
It always agrees in gender and number with its subject: as, 

Mon frere est tombe. My brother is fallen. 

Ma sceur est tombie. My sister is fallen. 

Mes soeurs sont tombees. My sisters are fallen. 

216. When it follows the verb avoir, it never agrees 
with its subject. 

217. But it agrees with its object direct, when that ob 
ject is placed before it : as, when speaking of 

my sister .- Je F ai vue. I have seen her. 
your books : Je les ai lus. I have read them, 
my sisters : Je les ai vues. I have seen them. 

218. And does not agree with its object direct? when 
that object is placed after it : as, 

J' ai vu ma soeur. I have seen my sister. 

T ai lu vos livres. I have read your books. 

J' ai vu mes soeurs. I have seen my sisters. 

219. It never agrees with its object indirect, whether 
placed before or after it : as, 

C r est la lettre dont je vous ai This is the letter of which I have 

parle. spoken to you. 

Je vous ai parle de cette / have spoken to you of this 

lettre. letter. 

220. The participle past of an impersonal verb is 
always indeclinable : as, 



152 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

Les pluies qu' il a fait. The rains which we have had. 

Les chaleurs qu' il y a tu. The heats which we have had. 

221. In the compound tenses of verbs essentially pro- 
nominal, that is, of those verbs which zannot be conju- 
gated without two pronouns, the participle past always 
agrees with its object, which always precedes it : as, 

Elle s' est moqicee de vous. She has laughed at you. 

Elles se sont repent ies. They have repented. 

222. There is but one exception to this rule, which is 
the verb s' arroger : as, ils se sont arroge des droits, they 
have assumed rights. 

223. The participle past of the verbs accidentally pro- 
nominal, that is, of those which can be conjugated with a 
single pronoun, has the same rules as the participle past 
of verbs not pronominal, as stated in articles 217, 218 ? 
219, ante : as, 

art. 217 : Lucrece s' est tuee. Lucretia has killed herself, 

art. 218: lis se sont pariage They have apportioned the. 

1' empire. empire among themselves, 

art. 219. Us se sont parte. They have spoken to each other. 

EXERCISE LYII. 

OS" THE PARTICIPLE PAST ACCOMPANIED ET THE VERB Ure. 

Fire-arms were not known to the ancients. Heaven is that 
Art. armes-a-fea de 

^permanent J city, into which the just are to be received after this 

cite\ /..... ou ••• • devoir 

life. In 3 Abraham's 2 time the threatenings of the true God 

Be larf. /. 

were dreaded by Pharaoh ; but, in the time of Moses, all na- 

redouter de Pharaon ; Moise, art . 

tions were corrupted, and the world which God has made to ma*- 

pervertir, pour 

nifest his glory, had become a temple of idols* That dreadful 'crisis 

terrible ci 
which threatened the state with 2 instant destruction, was happily 

de prochain /. 

soon past. She is come to bring us all kinds of refreshments. 

passer. — sorie,/. rafraichissement. 

My brothers are gone to Dover, and intend to pay you a visit 
Douvres, se proposer de rendxe — 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 153 

when they are come back. The houses which are built in the winter 

fut. ••revenir- /. — 

are not so wholesome as those which are begun in the spring and 

sain a 

finished in the middle of summer. 3 Virtuous 2 people are 

a art. *art. 

esteemed and respected, even by those who are not so. 
meme de le. 

EXERCISE LVIII. 

ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST ACCOMPANIED BY THE VERB avoir, AND 
FOLLOWED, OR PRECEDED, BY ITS OBJECT DIRECT. 

All the letters which I have received, confirm that important 'news. 

/• /• 

The 2 agitated 'life which I have led till now, makes me sigh for 
mener apres 

retirement. The sciences which you have studied, will prove 
art. retraite, /. etre 

infinitely useful to you. "What fortunes has not this revolution 

ruined ! What tears has she not shed ; what sighs has she 
renverser ! Que de verser ; 

not heaved ! The language in which Cicero and Virgil have written, 

pousser ! /. — Cic^ron 

will live in their works. She has taken the resolution of going into 

par /. a 

the country. I am very sorry for the trouble this affair has 

/. de peine,/, que 

given to your aunt. The letter which you have written to me in 

French was well enough ; I have shown it to your aunt, who 2 is 

3 much 4 pleased with it. I have not yet received the goods 

tres content --ien-- marchandise,/. 

which you sent me. Ladies, have you returned him the letters 

Mesdames, rendre 

which he had desired you to read] Where did you buy those 

prier de 

gloves ? I bought them in France. Alexander conquered Asia 

art 
with the troops which his father Philip had disciplined. The faults 

which he had committed, 2 greatly 'increased his prudence. He has 
beaucoup augmenter /. 

spent all the treasures which his father had amassed with so much 

tr£sor, m. 
care and labour. I have not forgotten the good services which you 



154 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

have done to my mother. The reasons which you have given us 

rendre 
have satisfied us. I have lost my books. What books have you 

lost 1 The fine actions your brothers have done, will be trans- 

que 
mitted to posterity. 

art. 

EXERCISE LIX. 

OX THE PARTICIPLE PAST OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

The great changes which have taken place in the administration 

changement y avoir 

have astonished many people. The heavy rains which we have had 

bien grand /. 

in the spring, have been the cause of many diseases. The scarcity 
a disette,/. 

which there was 3 last 2 winter, has afforded the opportunity of 

lart. donner occasion 

doing much good. What news has reached you 1 How many 

bien. sing-, est-il venir Que de 

imprudent steps were taken on that occasion ! How many 

faux demarche,/. se faire en 

large ships have been built in England within these fifty years ! The 
gros se construire dermis — 

storm which we had yesterday has done a great deal of damage 

tempete, /. causer dommage 

to our ships. The high winds which they have had in the county 

grand comt6 

of Lancaster, have blown down many houses and trees, 
renverser 



EXERCISE LX. 

OX THE PARTICIPLE PAST OF PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

The death which Lucretia gave herself has immortalized her. The 
/. -se donner- immortaliser 

cities which those nations have built for themselves are but a 

ville,/. peuple se batir 

collection of huts The chimeras which she has got 

amas, m. chaumiere. chimere,/. se mettre 
into her head pass all belief. The Amazons made them- 
— art. croyance,/. --se rendre- 
selves famous by their courage. The city of London has made 
celebre 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 155 

itself, by its commerce, the metropolis of the universe. Men 

m. Art. 

built themselves cities. That woman has bestowed on herself 

se batir se dormer 

fine gowns. She has cut two of her fingers. I have 
de se couper — — 

given myself a great deal of trouble. They have made an 

peine,/. se donner — 

appointment. My sisters have quarrelled the whole day, but are 
rendez-vous. se quereller 

now reconciled. He is the man of whom our neighbours have 

Ce --dont-- 

complained. We saw ourselves surrounded by more than twenty 
se plaindre. entourer 

persons. We had thought ourselves able to resist them, but 

secroire de leur, 

we have been deceived. She took pleasure in contradicting 

• -se tromper- • se plaire a 

me. Some of our 2 modern 'authors have imagined 

Quelques-uns s' imaginer que 

they surpassed the ancients. 



CHAPTER VII. 
OF THE ADVERB. 

224. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally 
placed after the verb ; and, in the compound tenses, be- 
tween the auxiliary and the participle : as, 

II se porte bien. He is well. 

II s' est bien porte. He has been well. 

225. Compound adverbs, and those which are derived 
from adjectives, are always placed after the verb : as. 

C est a la mode. That is fashionable. 

II a agi consequemment. He has acted consistently. 

226. Adverbs of order, rank, and those which express 
a determinate time, are placed either before or after the 
verb : as, 



156 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

Nous devons premieremcnt We ought, Jirst, to do our 

faire notre devoir; secondement duty; secondly, to enjoy lawful 

chercher les plaisirs permis. pleasures. 

AujouroV hui il fait beau ; il To-day it is fine,- it will rain, 

pleuvra peut-etre demain. perhaps, to-morrow. 

227. The adverbs comment, ou, d) ou, par ou, com- 
hien, pourquoi, quand, used with or without interrogation, 
are always placed before the verb which they modify : as, 

Comment vous portez-vous? How do you do? 

Ou allez-vous 1 Where are you going ? 

228. The adverb is always placed before the adjec- 
tive which it modifies : as, 

C est une femme fort belle, She is a woman very beautiful, 
tres sensible, et infiniment sage, of great sensibility, and infinitely 
prudent. 

229. Beaucaup is not, as in English, susceptible of 
being modified by any adverb : thus, we do not say, tres 
beaucoup, trop beaucoup, &c. 

230. Bien, when it precedes another adverb, means 
very, much, &c. : as, 

Bien moins. Much less. 
Bien tard. Very late. 

231. But when it is placed after the adverb, it signifies 
well: as, 

Assez bien. Pretty well. 
Fort bien. Very well. 

EXERCISE LXI. 
We do not expect him to-day. If it be fine weather, I shall be 
back this day se'nnight. I shall be glad to see you this day fort- 
night, if I am well. This day week I was at your house. A 

• -chez vous- • ■ 

year hence you will be able to speak French tolerably well. He 

• -pouvoir- • 
has as much money and as many friends as you. I was so much 

the more persuaded of what you told me, that I dismissed him this 

day three weeks. My sister has just as much wit, and is just as 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 157 

, A. 

amiable as yours. Hats off, gentlemen, and sit down. There is a 
man below, whom you will see with pleasure. Though we said it 

for fun, he was very angry with us. He has much increased his 

contre 
fortune. Sir, I have done my exercise. Well and good. 

theme. A la bonne heure. 

My father has bought a horse very cheap. They wandered to and 

fro without knowing whither to go. Some went to London 

Les uns 

in a coach, others on horseback. How far is it hence to 

en — art. a 

Dover 1 ? How long will it be before you send me back the 

Douvres? Dans combien de temps 

books I loaned you 1 They run up and down all day, and 2 do 

•nothing but play. I know how that happened : talk no more of 

ne 
it. I will call upon you to-morrow, and the day after we will 

passer chez 
go and see my uncle. We will pay you the day after to-mor- 
row, if we can. My brother often speaks with a double meaning. 

You have put on your waistcoat the wrong side outwards. My 

mettre 
brother and yours work in emulation of one another. Whatever 

may happen, I do not care for it. He did it in the twinkling 

se soucier 
of an eye* 



EXERCISE LXII. 

This morning I ■ awoke suddenly, but I soon fell asleep again, 
s' eveiller 

Let every one speak in his turn, for if you speak all together, how 

Que a 

can I hear what you say ? They demolished the house from top 

to bottom. How long, O Catiline, will you abuse our pa- 

Catilina, abuser de 

tience 1 You always come to see me by night ; why do you not 

— de 

come in the day-time 1 It is not amidst the pleasures of this 

de — — parmi 

world that we find happiness ; it is in the bosom of inno- 
art. sein art. 



158 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

cence and peace, where we ought to look for it. There is no 

que -chercher- 

going any where in winter. He speaks so low that I can hardly 

hear what he says. The Spaniards pursued them so closely 
Espagnol de pres 

that they entered the town helter-skelter. Let the worst come 

dans 
to the worst, I will get rid of it. All our rooms are on the same 

•se defaire- 
floor. You give me more than enough. You come very sea- 
sonably, and your brother came in the nick of time. She is better 

than her sister, in all respects. Our eating-room is even with 

a 6gard. 

the ground. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OF THE PREPOSITION. 

232. Prepositions may be divided, according to their 
regimen, into three classes : 

233. 1. Those which govern the nouns without the 
assistance of any other preposition : as a, de, des, &c. 

234. 2. Those which govern the nouns with the 
assistance of the preposition a : which are, conforme- 
ment, jusqv? or jusques, par rapport, quant, attenant, &c. 
And, 

235. 3. Those which govern them with the assistance 
of the preposition de : as, aupres, autour, &c. 

236. A, de, en, must be repeated before every sub- 
stantive. 

237. The other prepositions, particularly those which 
have only one syllable, are to be repeated before sub- 
stantives which have different or opposite meanings : 
as, dans la paxx, et dans la guerre ; par la force, et par 
V adresse. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 159 

238. But they are not to be repeated when the nouns 
are synonymous : as, dans la paix et la tranquUlite; par 
la force et la violence. 

EXERCISE LXIII. 
oir prepositions of THE fibst class. See art. 233. 

We find less 2 real 'happiness in an 2 elevated 'condition than in 
On de 

a 2 middling 'state. One is never truly peaceful but at home, 
moyen v^ritablement tranquille soi. 

He walked before me to serve me as a guide. There was a 

pour de — 

2 delightful 'grove behind his house. Nature displays her riches 

bosquet, m. d^ployer 

with magnificence under the 2 torrid 'zone. 5 Eternal 4 snows 

sdes ion 

are to be seen on the summit of the Alps. Towards the north, nature 

2 voir sommet 

assumes a 2 gloomy 3 and 4 wild 'aspect. We were up before day light, 

triste se lever — 

in order to enjoy the 2 magnificent 'spectacle of the 2 rising 'sun. 

•••pour--- de 

From my earliest infancy I have had an abhorrence of lying. 

— art. tendre — horreur mensonge. 

With wit, politeness, and some readiness to oblige, one gene- 

un peu de prevenance 

rally succeeds in the world. Besides the 2 exterior 'advantages of 

art. 
figure, and the graces of deportment, she possesses an Excellent 

art. maintien, avoir 

'heart, a 2 correct 'judgment, and a Sensible 'mind. Always act 

sain se conduire 

according to the maxims which I have given you. We 

— inculquer 

cannot long act contrary to our own character; notwith- 

savoir cond. pr. agir •••contre-" — 

standing all the pains we take to disguise it, it shows itself, and 

que pour semontrer- 

betrays us on many occasions. I have written to you con- 

en bien de art. 
ceming that business, in which I take the most lively interest ; and 

3. lequel vif 

as I know well your benevolence towards the unfortunate, 
connaitre malheureux, 



160 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

I have not the least doubt that you will carefully attend 

• • ■ -ne douternullement- • • ne dormer tous vossoins, subj. pr. 

to it, not so much for the satisfaction of obliging me, as for the pleasure 

• -y morns 

of justifying innocence and confounding calumny. When we 

art. art. 

were in the country, we devoted the morning to study, we 

a consacrer matin £e art. 

walked at noon, and at three or four o'clock we went a hunting, or a 

midi, 
fishing. That man with his 2 gloomy 'looks and 2 sur iy 

peche,/. a — art. sombre regard, m. brusque 

'behaviour, seems fit only to serve as a scarecrow. In that happy 
maintien, ne de — 6pouvantail. 

retreat we lived on the milk of our flocks, and the 2 delicious 'fruits of 

de brebis, 

our orchards. We were at peace, and 2 enjoyed 3 all 'its blessings, 

en gouter en *art. charme, 

when ambition rekindled the flames of war, and forced us 

art. rallumer feu art. 

to put our frontiers in a state of defence. 
de — 

EXERCISE LXIV. 

on prepositions of the second ciAss. See art. 234. 

A magistrate should always judge agreeably to the laws, and 

according to what they prescribe. He has been punished 
conform6ment 

pursuant to an act of parliament. His garden is next to 
conformement attenant 

mine. Yesterday we waited for him till five o'clock in the morning. 

attendre de 

If I had not stopped him, he would have gone even to Dover. We 

jusque 
accompanied them as far as Antwerp. I will do it for your 
jusque Anvers. a 

sake but never on account of them. As for me, I will not 
consideration par rapport Quant 

give him a penny. As to what people may say, I do not care for it. 
sous. l'on s'ensouci.v. 

EXERCISE LXV. 

on prepositions of the third class. See art. 235. 

I have sent nothing to your brother, because of his idleness ; but I 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 161 

forgive him on your account. Cut that sorrel even with the 

oseille, /. a fleur — 

ground. All laid down their arms, except two regiments, 

mettre bas — art. 
who preferred making their way through the enemy. He is 

sefairejour au-travers pi. 

become a very good master by dint of study and practice. Under 

a force 
that thick tree we shall be sheltered from the rain. All the prisoners 

a V abri 
made their escape by means of the darkness of the night. I am 
• • • -s' 6chapper • • • a la faveur 
going to meet my aunt ; will you accompany me 1 He took 

an devant de 
my hat instead of his. My house is good for nothing in comparison 

• --valour • • au prix 

of hers. I can do nothing for want of money. They were 
• -faute- • 
off the Cape of Good Hope, when they were taken. He is 
a la hauteur 
gone along the river. The officers and soldiers were lodged in 

le long 
barracks, proof to cannon and bomb. 
a 1' epreuve 



CHAPTER IX. 

OF THE CONJUNCTION. 

239. Conjunctions may be divided into three classes : 

240. 1. Those which either govern the indicative, or 
may be used with any mood : as, et, ou, sinon, &c. 

241. 2. Those which require the following verb to be 
in the infinitive mood : as, afin de, de peur de, &.c. And, 

242. 3. Those which require the following verb to be 
in the subjunctive : as, afin que, quoique, &c. 

EXERCISE LXVI. 

on conjunctions op the fib st class. See art. 240. 

Gold and silver are metals less useful than iron. I like 
Art. des ne 

neither flatterers nor the wicked. You may choose either a happy 

pi. ou 

G* 11 



162 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

mediocrity, or a sphere more elevated, but exposed to many dangers. 

/• 
He is an inconsistent 'man ; he is sometimes of one opinion, and 
Ce inconsequent tantot avis, 

sometimes of another. I have nothing more to say to you, only 
ne • autre chose • ^ sinon 

that I will have it so. The serpent bites; it is only a 
vouloir — — ce ne 

bite ; but from this bite the venom communicates itself to the 
morsure ; /. venin 

whole body : the slanderer speaks ; it is but a word ; but this 

ce ne parole ; 

word resounds every where. The most beautiful flowers last 
retentir ne durer 

but a moment : thus 3 human 2 iife 'passes away. The greater part 

— plupart,/. 

of mankind have, like plants, 3 hidden Qualities, that 

art. homines art. x des propri£t6, /. 

chance discovers. We ought to love what is amiable : now 
art. hasard faire d^couvrir. - or 

virtue is amiable ; therefore we ought to love virtue. Desprtaux 
art. 
was extremely particular in not coming too late, when he was 

de la plus grande exactitude a 
invited to dinner; he said that all the faults of those who 

deTaut 
are waited for present themselves to those who wait for them. We 
se faire attendre — 

had hardly done when he came in. 
finir emrer. 

EXERCISE LXVn. 
os conjunctions of the second class. See art. 241. 

In order to 2 leam 'well, we must study with a great deal of attention. 

— falloir 

Let us breakfast before we 2 begin any thing. A prudent man ought 

— ••• 1 r:en-- 

to think several times, before he acts. I would not do it for fear of 

— agir. 
displeasing you. He is capable of every thing except of doing 

— tout — 
good. He lost his arm for want of sending for a surgeon. Your 

chirurgien. 
cousin has humbled himself till he fell on his knees before the idol. 
• -s' humilier .-a-- 

Far from exciting them to fight, I did all that I could, in order to pre- 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 163 

vent them. She would do any thing in the world, rather than 

•••tout-- a 
speak to him. Rather than study, he loses his time, or spends it in 

passer 
trifles. We must, at least, know the 2 general 'principles of a lan- 
guage, before we take upon ourselves to teach it. 
de se mCler de 

EXERCISE LXVIII. 

on- conjunctions of the thiiid ciass. See art. 242. 

To listen with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to cherish 
— m^disant, — lui, ce r^chauffer 

the serpent who stings, that he may sting more effectually. 

afin surement. 

Although Homer, according to Horace, slumbers at times, he 

sommeiller quelquefois, n' en 
is, nevertheless, the first of all poets. You will succeed, provided 
pas moins, r£ussir, 

you act with vigour. I will explain to you every difficulty, 
que afin 

that you may not be disheartened in your undertaking. You will 
d^courager 

never be respected, unless you forsake the bad company you 
abandonner que 

keep. They are not happy, though they be rich. Although you 
frequenter. 

have a good memory, this is not enough to learn any language 

pour une 

whatever : you must make use of your judgment I will not give you 

se servir 
that penknife, lest you should make a bad use of it. God grant 

,veuille que 
you be not disappointed in your hopes ! Would to God I had 

tromper Plut que 

been there ! I would have conquered or perished. God forbid 

vainer e a ne plaise 

I should blame your conduct. However little you give her, 

que Pour pue que 

she is of 3 so 4 good ! a 2 temper, that she is always pleased. If your 

naturel, 
father do not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I 

que avoir besoin de 

will lend you some. 



164 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



CHAPTER X. 

OF THE INTERJECTION. 

243. There are interjections of different sorts, ac- 
cording to the different passions which they serve to ex- 
press : viz. 

Allons! Come! Holaho! Ho there! 

Ah mon Dieu ! Oh my God ! Hem ! Hem ! 

Ha, quelle joie! Oh joy! Fi! Fie! 

O ciel! Oh heaven ! Fi done ! For shame ! 

Helas ! Alas ! Paix ! chut ! st! Hist ! hush i 

Misericorde ! Bless me ! Silence ! Silence ! 

Malheur a vous ! Wo to you ! 

EXERCISE LXIX. 

Come ! friends, let us rejoice. Fie ! fie ! Robert, you do not reflect 

• -se rejouir- • 
on what you say. Oh ! ] how 6 lovely 4 a 5 virtue 3 is 2 modesty. Alas! 

que 
who can express the torments I suffer here. Wo to you ! usurers, 

misers. Bless me ! I am undone. Hush there ! silence. Oh ! the 

perdre. la 

dismal effects of idleness ! 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 165 



PART II 



Syntax is that part of Grammar which treats of the 
.Agreement and Construction of Words in a Sentence. 



CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE- 

244. Substantives generally have but one gender : there 
are some, however, which are masculine or feminine, ac- 
cording to their signification; and a few which are mas- 
culine in one number, and feminine in the other. For a 
list of these, see ante, page 45. 

245. Gens requires all adjectives which, precede it to 
be feminine, and all which follow it to be masculine : as, 
les vieilles gens sont soupgonneux ; toutes les mechanles 
gens. 

However, instead of toutes, tous is employed : 1st. 
When this adjective is the only one which precedes 
gens : as, tous les gens cP esprit. 2d. When gens is 
preceded by an adjective which has but one termination 
for both genders : as, tous les honnetes gens ; tous les ha- 
biles gens. (French Acad.) 

246. Certain nouns remain in the singular number, 
although there is plurality in the idea. These are : 

247. 1. Proper noun : as, V Espagne a vu naitre les 
deux Seneque. 

Except when they are employed as nouns common, to 
designate individuals like those whose names we employ : 



166 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

as, la France a eu ses Chars et ses Pompees ; that is, 
generals equal to Caesar and Pompey. 

248. 2. Nouns borrowed from foreign languages, and 
which are not yet made French : as, des alleluia, des ave, 
des auto-da-fe, des alinea, &c. 

249. However, the French Academy writes, des fac- 
tions, des debets, des bravos, des operas. 

250. 3. Words used as nouns (parts of speech, &c), 
which, naturally, are not declinable: as. les pourquoi, les 
car, les out, les non, les on dit, &c. 

251. In nouns compounded of two or more words, 
the only words that take the sign of the plural, are the 
substantive and adjective : as, un plain-chant, des plains- 
chants ; une plate-forme, des plates-formes^ Stc. 

252. There are some compound words, however, 
which, of necessity, from their sense, do not change in 
the plural, even where one of the words is a substan- 
tive: such as, un crcve-cceur, des creve-cceur, literally, 
burst-heart, that is, great troubles that burst the heart ; 
un coupe-gorge, des coupe-gorge, literally, cut-throat r 
that is, places where a man is exposed to have his throat 
cut. 

253. When a noun is compounded of two substan- 
tives united by a preposition, the first alone takes the sign 
of the plural : as, un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; des arcs-en- 
ciel, rainbows. 

254. This last rule has the following exceptions : des 
coq-a-P dne, cock and bull stories ; des pied-a-terre, 
country lodgings ; des tete-a-tete, private conversations. 

255. Compound nouns, the second word of which 
always marks plurality in the idea, take s, both in the 
singular and in the plural : as, un cure-dents, a tooth-pick; 
des casse-noisettes, nut-crackers. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 167 



CHAPTER II. 

OF THE ARTICLE. 

256. The article is to be put before all substantives 
common, taken in a general sense : as, 

L' homme se repait trop sou- Man too often beguiles him- 

vent de chi meres. self with chimeras. 

Les hommes a imagination Men of imaginative disposi- 

sont toujours roalheureux. tions are always unhappy. 

257. In English, the article is not used before sub- 
stantives taken in a general sense. 

258. The article is also to be used before substantives 
taken in a determinate sense, as in English : as, 

L' homme dont vous parlez. The man of whom you speak. 

L' enfant qui pleure. Tfie child who cries. 

259. The article is put before proper names of coun- 
tries, regions, rivers, winds, and mountains : as, 

La France est bornee au sud France is bounded on the 

par les Pyrenees et la Mediter- south by the Pyrenees and the 

ranee, a /' est par la Suisse et la Mediterranean, on the east by 

Savoie, au nord par les Pays- Switzerland and Savoy, on the 

Bas, et a f ouest par 1' ocean. north by the Netherlands, and 

on the west by the ocean. 

La Tamise, le Rhone, F aqui- The Thames, the Rhone, the 

Ion, les Alpes, le Cantal. north wind, the Alps, the Cantal. 

Except Naples : as, 

Naples est un pays delicieux. Naples is a delightful country. 

260. The article is put before the adverbs plus, mieux, 
moins, to express comparison, and agrees in gender with 
the substantive : as, 

Cette dame ne pleurait pas, That lady did not cry, al- 

quoiqu'elle fut la plus affligee. though she was the most afflicted. 

261. The article remains always in the masculine, 
when we express a quality in the highest degree without 
comparison : as, 

Cette dame ne pleure pas, TJiat lady does not cry, even 
lors meme qu' elle est le plus when she is most [extremely] 
affligee. afflicted. 



168 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



EXERCISE LXX. 

The moment elegance, the most visible image of 2 fine 

De que 256* 279 un delicat 

^aste, appears, it is universally admired : men differ respecting the 

se montre, 256 sur 

other constituent x parts of beauty, but they all unite without 

2qui 3 C omposer — 256 se 

hesitation in acknowledging the power of elegance. Tranquillitv 

a 256 256 

of soul is the height of felicity. The man who lives under an 

comble dans 

2 habitual 'sense of the 2 divine ^presence, preserves a perpetual 

conviction conserver constant 

cheerfulness of temper, and enjoys, every moment, the satisfaction of 

thinking himself in company with the dearest and best of friends. 

Europe is bounded on the north by the Frozen Ocean; on the south 

259 
by the Mediterranean Sea, which separates it from Africa ; on the 

259 
east by the continent of Asia ; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. 

Of all the planets, the moon is the most brilliant to us. The moon 

260 
does not give us so much light as the sun, even when it shines 

brightest. This woman has the art of shedding tears, even when 

261 
she is least afflicted. 
261 

262. The article is put before substantives taken in 
a partitive sense ; see art. 52, 53, 154 ante : as, 

Du pain. Some bread. 

De 1' eau. Some water. 

Des tableaux. Some pictures. 

263. The article is omitted, however, when the sub- 
stantive, taken in a partitive sense, is preceded by an ad- 
jective ; see art. 155 ante : as, 

Je mange de bon pain. I eat good bread. 

Je bois de bonne eau. I drink good water. 

J' ai de beaux tableaux. I have beautiful pictures. 

* That is: See art. 256, page 167 ante, for the rule which is ap- 
plicable here, &c. &c. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES.^ 169 

264. When the adjective is joined to the substantive 
so as to form but one word, the article must be used : as, 

Des petits-maitres. Fops. 

Des petits-pois. Peas. 

265. It may not be improper to observe here, that mos: 
authors who have made literal translations from French 
into English, have erroneously rendered the words du, ch 
la, des, by some ; not thinking that nearly all sentences 
of which these words form a part are elliptical. 

For instance, when, sitting at table, I say, Donnez-moi 
du pain, Give me some bread, I mean, Donnez-moi une 
portion, eu un morceau du pain qui est sur la table* 
Give me a portion, or a piece of the bread which is on the 
table. So that it is easy to see, that in Donnez-moi dv 
pain, the word portion, or morceau, which is the equiva- 
lent of some, is understood in French ; whereas, du, of the 
is understood in English. The correct translation would 
then be,* 

Donnez-moi du pain. 

Give me some — bread. 

266. The French, unlike the English, do not put the 
article before substantives employed adjectively, that is, 
to qualify a preceding noun : as, 

Telemaque, fils d' Ulysse. Telemachus, the son of Ulysses 

Le Due d' York, prince du The Duke of York, a prince of 
sang. the blood. 

Je suis Francais. I am a Frenchman. 

267* But if .the substantive be used in a restricted 
sense, un or une must precede it, as in English : as, 

Je suis un Franc.ais d' une I am a Frenchman of an illus 
iilustre maison. trious family. 

268- The article is omitted before plus and moins 
when either of them is repeated to express a compari- 
son : as, 

Plus une chose est difficile, The more difficult a thing is. 
plus elle est honorable. the more honourable it is. 

* See Collet's " Progressive Interlinear French Reader,' 
in which this error has been carefully avoided. 
H 



170 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



EXERCISE LXXL 

I yesterday saw some learned men, who do not think as you do> 

I have given him bread, money, and clothes. You always read 

lui 262 236 
good books. Bad wine is not worth good waten. He is always 
263 valoir 

seen with wits and noblemen. He was a man of 2 uncommon 

264 Ce 267 un rare 

'probity, and of 2 tried " 1 virtue i to recompense him for the ser- 

un eprouve pour de 

vices he had rendered to the church and state, the king has made 

que 236 

him a bishop. Jupiter, a god of the heathens^ was the son 

266 266 266 

of Saturn, and the father of the other gods. Robert, duke of Nor- 
mandy, the brother of Henry, king of England^ was the son. c£ 



William the Conqueror- 



CHAPTER IIL 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



269. The adjective agrees in gender and number with 
the substantive which it qualifies or determines. 

OF THE QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVE. 

270. From the preceding rule must be excepted, 
when they precede the substantive, nu, bare, and demi, 
half: as, 

Nu-pieds. Barefooted. 

Une demi-heure. Half an hour. 

271. But the agreement takes place if nu and demi be 
placed after the substantive : as, 

II a les pieds nus. His feet are bare. 

Une heure et demie. An hour and a half. 

272. Feu, late, does not agree with its substantive 
when another word is interposed between them : as, 

Feu la reine. The late queen, 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 171 

273. But the agreement takes place if the adjective be 
placed immediately before the substantive : as, 

La/eue reine. The late queen. 

274. Adjectives used substantively are, like substan- 
tives common, accompanied by the article : as, 

Lesfous inventent les modes, et Fools invent fashions, and wise 
les sages s' y conferment, men conform to them. 

275. The adjective takes the article wherever there is 
a noun expressed or understood : as, 

La langue franp aise, et /' an- The French and English Ian- 
glaise sont tres-cultivees. guages are very much cultivated. 

The noun langue is here understood before anglaise. 

276. When two or three adjectives qualify a single 
noun, the article is not repeated : as, 

Le sensible et vertueux Fe- The sensible and virtuous Fe- 
nelon. nelon. 

277. When the adjective is placed after a proper name, 
which it qualifies, it expresses a distinguishing quality : as, 
Varron le savant ; meaning the one distinguished for his 
learning from all of the same name. 

278. When a superlative relative precedes a substan- 
tive, the article serves for both substantive and adjective : 
as, 

Les plus habiles gens font The ablest men sometimes 
quelquefbis les plus grandes commit the greatest blunders. 
fautes. 

279. But if the superlative relative follow the substan- 
tive, the article must be repeated : as, 

Les gens les plus habiles font The ablest man sometimes 
quelquefois les fautes les plus commit the greatest blunders, 
grandes. 

280. Adjectives in French, are generally placed after 
the substantive. 

281. This rule is, however, subject to many excep- 
tions, which it would not be possible to present in a 
systematic view to the student : practice and taste will, in 
this instance, be his best teachers. 



172 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

282. The adjective, placed after two or several sub- 
stantives which are not united by the conjunction et, 
agrees in gender and number with the last only : as, 

II a montre une reserve, une He exhibited • a reserve, a dis- 
retenue, digne d' eloges. cretion, worthy to he praised. 

EXERCISE LXXII. 

He ran through the streets like a madman, barefoot and bareheaded. 

270 
His legs were bare. Give me half a guinea, and then you will 
— II 286 avoir 271 270 

only owe me a guinea and a half. I shall be at home in half an 

— 271 chez moi 270 

hour. The late queen was idolized. The late queen was universally 

272 273 

regretted. The ignorant have, in a large stock of presumption, what 

fort dose 
they want in real knowledge, and that is the reason they are ad- 

ce qui fait que 
mired by fools. We ought to frequent good, and shun bad company. 

274 275 256 

The ancient and modern writers are not agreed upon that point. 

275 
The wise man preserves the same tranquillity of mind in good or bad 

275 237 

fortune. The more we read the fables of the good and artless La 

268 on 276 

Fontaine, the more we are convinced they are a book foi all ages, and 
268 258 

the manual of the man of taste. 



EXERCISE LXXIII. 

It was only under the reign of Louis the Just (the Thirteenth,) that 

277 
good taste began to show itself in France ; but it was under that of 

258 

Louis the Great that it was carried to perfection. It has been said of 

On — 

the Telemachus of the virtuous Fenelon, that it is the most useful present 

279 don 

the muses have made to mankind ; for, could the happiness of 
que 407 si 

man be produced by a poem, it would be by that. The smoothest 

naitre- • de tranquille 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 173 

W - ' ■ ■ — 

waters often conceal the most dangerous gulfs. The most beautiful 

279 279 278 

actions are sometimes sullied by the greatest vices. Cicero was the 
278 est 278 

most eminent orator the Romans have had. All his life was but a 

c&ebre 407 a ete" 

labour, but a continual occupation. 
282 

OF THE DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVE. 

283. Vingt and cent take s, when multiplied by other 
numeral adjectives : as, 

Quatxe-v ingts hommes. Eighty men. 
Deux cents bceufs. Two hundred oxen. 

284. But they do not take s, when followed by other 
numeral adjectives ; as, 

Quatre vignt-xm hommes. Eighty-one men. 

Deux cent six boeufs. Two hundred and six oxen. 

285. The adverbs of place, ci and Z«, are often joined 
to the adjectives ce, cet, cette, ces, in ordef to point out 
in a more precise manner the person or thing spoken of. 
The adjective is then placed before the substantive, and 
the abverb after it : as, 

Ce livre-ci, this book. Cet homme-la, that man. 
Cette fleur-ci, this flower. Ces femmes-la, those women. 

286. The adjective possessive, which, in English", 
precedes a noun representing any part of the body, is 
rendered in French by placing the definite article before 
the noun, and a pronoun of the proper person before the 
verb : as, 

II me coupa le bras. He cut my arm. 

On lui a coupe la jambe. They have cut off his leg. 

287. Chaque, which is of both genders, has no plural, 
and must always be followed by a substantive : as, 

Chaque pays a ses coutumes. Each country has its customs. 

288. JS"ul and pas un have no plural : they require ne 
before the verb : as, 

Nul homme rC est parfait. No man is perfect. 

Pas une experience ne reussit. Not one experiment succeeds. 



174 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

289. Aucun is not employed in the plural, except be- 
fore substantives which, in some particular sense, are bet- 
ter employed in the plural : as, 

II n' a fait aucunes disposi- He has made no dispositions. 
tions. 

290. Tout, considered collectively, signifies the whole 
of a thing, and is then followed by the article : as, 

Tout T univers. The whole universe. 

291. Tout, when considered distributively, signifies 
chaque, every, and is not accompanied by the article : as, 

Tout bien est desirable. Every good is desirable. 

292. Quelque, when it precedes a substantive, is of 
both genders, and takes s in the plural : as, 

II a fait quelques fautes. He has committed some faults. 

Quelques efforts que vous fas- Whatever 'attempts you may 
siez. make. 

293. Quelque, before an adjective, operates as an ad- 
verb, and is indeclinable, except when the adjective pre- 
cedes a substantive in the plural : as, 

Quclque belle qu' elle puisse However beautiful she may be, 

etre, elle ne doit pas etre vaine. she ought not to be vain. 

Quelques braves soldats y sont Some brave soldiers went 

alles. thither. 

294. Quel que, before a verb, must be two words ; 
and quel agrees in gender and number with the substan- 
tive : as, 

Quelles que soient vos affaires, Whatever your busiiiess may 
venez. be, come. 

295. Quelconque is always placed after the substan- 
tive; and when used with a negative, is always sin- 
gular: as, 

II n' y a raison quelconque qui There is no reason whatever 
puisse 1' y obliger. which can oblige him to it. 

EXERCISE LXXIV. 

I bought eighty horses, two hundred oxen, ninety sheep, and two 

2S3 2S3 384 

hundred and four cows. I had a fall yesterday and hurt ray back 
264 286 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 175 

snd head. In this Moody tattle he received a wound, by a shot, in 

286 • coup de feu 

his right arm, and another in his left leg: by dint of care his arm 

286 286 

was saved t, but it was necessary to amputate his leg. This stuff 

286 285 

will become you wonderfully. That action is worthy of blame. 

siera il merveille. 285 

This scene is calculated to interest all men, but that cannot succeed. 

faite 258 ne saurait 

Every nation has, in its turn, shone on the theatre of the world. 
287 :a 

EXERCISE LXXV. 

No expression, no truth of design or colouring, no touches of genius 

288 Sessin trait 

in that great work. Did any man ever attain to such a pitch of 

289 parvenir - • ce • - comble 

glory! I doubt whether there be in any science & more 2 evident 
que 289 lumineux 

principle. The whole course of his life has been distinguished by 

290 marquer 

z generous Actions. Every vice is odious. Whatever faults you. 

291 292 

■may have committed, they will forgive you. All men, however 

fait, 258 5 293 

opposite they may be, agree on that point. Whatever your 

294 
•fault mav be, I will forgive you. There is no reason whatever 

295 
that can bring him to it 
puisse determiner 118 



CHAPTER IV. 
OF THE PRONOUN. 

SECTION I. 

OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

296. Jfe, ta, il, elle, Us, dies, are always the subject ; that 
is, they always represent the person or thing which per- 
forms the action expressed by the verb : as, 

Je dis la verite. i" speak the truth. 

Tu apprendras des nouvelles. Thou wilt hear news. 



176 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

7/ nous raconta son histoire. He told us his history. 

Elks sont survenues a 1' im- They have come unexpectedly. 
proviste. 

297. Me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, en, are always the 
object; that is, they always represent the person or thing 
which suffers the action expressed by the verb : as, 

Je me rase. I shave myself. 

Tu leur paries. Thou speakest to them. 

II te voit. He sees thee. 

lis la voient. They see her. 

298. In affirmative sentences, the subject al ways- 
comes first : as, 

Je me rase. / shave myself. 

299. In negative sentences, the particle ne is put be 
tween the subject and object : as, 

Je ne me rase pas. I shave not myself. 

300. In interrogative sentences, the subject is put after 
the verb : as, 

Me rase^'e ? Shave I myself? 

301. In negative-and-interrogative sentences, the sub- 
ject is also put after the verb : as, 

IS e me rase-/e pas 1 Shave I not myself? 

302. The regimen of me, te, se, is sometimes direct. 
and sometimes indirect : 

303. It is direct, when they represent respectively 
moi, toi, soi : as, 

Vous me connaissez. You know me. 

Je te vois. I see thee. 

II se perd. He ruins himself. 

304. And indirect, when they supply respectively the 
place of a moi, a toi, a soi : as, 

Vous me parlez. You speak to me. 

Je V ecris. 1 write to thee. 

II se represente. He represents to himself. 

305. he, la, les, are always direct : as. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 177 

Je le vois, for Je vois lui. 

Je la vois, . . Je vois elle. 

Je les vois, . . Je vois eux, or dies. 

306. Leur, y, en, are always indirect : as, 

Je leur parle, for Je parle a eux, or d elles. 

Je n ? y entends rien, . . Je n' entends rien d cela. 
V en suis f ache, . . Je suis fache de cela. 

307. The pronouns which are sometimes the subject, 
and sometimes the regimen or object, are nous, vous, moi, 
t'oi, lui, elle, eux, elles : as, 

Nous leur parlons. We speak to them. 

lis nous parlent. They speak to us. 

308. Moi, tot, after the imperative, are changed into 
me, le, when followed by en : as, 

Donncz-m' en. Give me some. 

Retoume-tf' en. Go back. 

309. When several pronouns accompany a verb, me, 
te, se, nous, vous must be placed first in order ; le, la, les, 
before lui, leur; and y before en, which is always the 
last: as, 

Pretez-moi ce livre; je vous Lend me that book; I will 

le rendrai demain ; si vous me return it to you to-morrow ; if 

le refusez, je saurai m' en pas- you refuse me, I can make shift 

ser. without it. 

Aurez-vous la force de le leur Will you have the resolution 

dire? to mention it to them ? 

II n' a pas voulu vous y me- He was not willing to take 

ner. you there. 

Je vous y en porterai. I will bring you some there. 

310. In imperative sentences, when me is changed into 
moi, it is preceded by le, la, les : as, 

Donnez-le-moi. Give it to me. 

Apportez-les-moi. Bring them to me. 

311. In imperative sentences, moi, for the sake of eu- 
phony, is placed after y ; as, 

Menez-y-moi. Carry me thither. 

312. The pronoun le may supply the place of a mem- 
ber of a sentence : as, 

12 



178 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

On doit s' accommoder a 1' hu- We ought to accommodate our- 

meur des autres, autant qu' on le selves to the temper of others, as 
peut. much as we can. 

313. ie, also, supplies the place of an adjective, or 
of a substantive used adjectively : as, 

Madame, §tes-vous malade ? — Madame, are you sick ? — Yes, 

Oui, je le suis. lam. 

Mesdames, etes-vous mariees ? Ladies, are you married ? — 

— Oui, nous le sommes. Yes, we are. 

314. But la, les, supply the place of substantives, or 
of adjectives used substantively: as, 

Mesdames, etes-vous les ma- Ladies, are you the brides ? — 

rites ? — Oui, nous les sommes. Yes, we are. 

Madame, etes-vous la raalade? Madam, are you the sick per- 

— Oui, je la suis. son ? — Yes, I am. 

315. Pronouns expressing the first and second persons, 
must be repeated before all the verbs : as, 

Je soutiens, et je soutiendrai J maintain, and [ I] will al~ 

toujours. ways maintain. 

Vous dites, et vous avez tou- You say, and [you] have al- 

jours dit. ways said. 

316. Pronouns of the third person, when they form 
the subject, are seldom repeated before verbs of the same 
tenses : as, 

La bonne grace ne gate rien ; A graceful manner spoils no- 
elle ajoute a la beaute, et releve thing; it adds to beauty, and 
la modestie. heightens modesty. 

317. But these pronouns are generally repeated before 
verbs of different tenses ; and when passing from an affir- 
mation to a negation, and the contrary : as, 

II est arrive ce matin, et il re- He arrived this morning, and 
partira ce soir. [he] will set off again this even- 

ing. 
II veut, et il ne veut pas. Me will, and [he] will not. 

318. Pronouns forming the regimen, are repeated be- 
fore every verb : as, 

L' idee de ses malheurs le The idea of his misfortunes 
poursuit, le tourmente et /' acca- pursues [him], torments [him] 
ble. and overwhelms him. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 179 

II nous ennuie et nous obsede He wearies [us] and besets us 
sans cesse. unceasingly. 

319. Except before such compound verbs as express 
the repetition of the same action, and are in the same tense ; 
as,^'e vous le dis^ et redis ; il lefait, et refaity sans cesse. 

EXERCISE LXXVI. 

The better to bear the irksomeness of captivity and solitude, I 
Pour 256 

sought for books ; for I was overwhelmed with melancholy, for want 

de ••faute-- 

of some knowledge to cherish and support my mind. I, 
qui put nourrir 307 

who am older than he, I ! go and speak to him ! No ; I 
307 — 115 296 

will not go ; let him come himself. How darest thou answer thy 

296 

master in 3 so 4 insolent 2 a 2 manner ! Thou whom he loves, thou 

de 307 296 

for whom he takes so much pains. He has been speaking to 
131 

them with an energy that has astonished them. He said to mc, 
297 \ 312 

Wilt thou torment thyself incessantly for advantages, the en- 

se tourmenter 303 52 biens, 

joyment of which could not render thee more happy ] Cast thy 

297 296 

eyes round thee : see how every thing smiles at thee, and seems 

304 — 297 

to invite thee to prefer a retired and tranquil life, to the tumultuous 

pleasures of a vain world. 

EXERCISE LXXVII. 

I believe your brothers are not well ; for I have not seen 

que " 299 

them this week. Does he recognise himself in this portrait 1 
305 300 a 

Do you hide yourselves in order to surprise them 1 Do you not 

301 
see them every day 1 Enjoy the pleasures of the world ; I 

de 
consent to it: but never give yourself up to them. I shall never 

306 306 

consent to that foolish scheme; do not mention it any more. 

parler 306 



180 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

If you have good pears, send me some. You wish to make 

263 308 

a present to your sister. There is a beautiful fan ; you should 
• •Voila-- devoir 

present it to her. I shall speak to them about it, and 
offrir 309 --lui-- 309 •••en--- 315 

give you a faithful account of it I know ,you have con- 
rendre exact que 

cealed my book: return it to me. Do you go to your country 

— 310 
seat 1 Yes, I do. Conduct me thither. Take us thither. 
311 309 



EXERCISE LXXVIIL 

The laws of nature and decency equally oblige us to defend 

256 236 bienseance 

the honour and interest of our parents, when we can do it without 

256 312 

injustice. We were embarrassed, and are so yet. Are you Mrs. 

313 

2 such a 'one 1 Yes, I am. Are those your servants 7 

— 314 Sont-ce la 

Yes, they are. Overwhelmed with sorrow, I exclaimed and 

314 
said. He took the strongest cities, conquered the most con 
:' 315 
siderable provinces, and overturned the most powerful kingdoms. 

It is inconceivable how whimsical she is: from one moment to 

another she will and she will not. It is taste that selects the 

expressions, that combines, arranges, and varies them, 

318 
so as to produce the greatest eflect. 

de maniere a ce qu' elles 



SECTION II. 

OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

320. These pronouns must always relate to a substan- 
tive previously expressed : as, 

Votre livre est micux relie que Your book is better hound than 
le mien. mine. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 181 

SECTION III. 

OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

321. Qui, when it is the subject, relates both to per- 
sons and things : as, 

La femrae qui chante. The woman who smgs. 

lies livres qui instruisent. The books which instruct. 

322. But when qui is the regimen, it can only be 
used of persons, or of things personified : as, 

La femme de qui vous parlez. The woman of whom you are 

speaking. 
Rocher ! a qui je me plains. Rock ! to wham I complain. 

323. Que relates both to persons and things. It is 
always the regimen, and cannot occur without an antece- 
dent expressed : as, 

C est vous qu' on appelle. It is you whom they call. 

C est le livre que je cherche. It is the book which lam seek- 

ing for. 

324. Lequel relates both to persons and things. It is 
generally used after a preposition : as, 

La protection sur laquelle il The protection on which he 
comptait. relied. 

L' etude a laquelle il s' applique. The study to which he ap- 
plies himself. 

325. Dont, also, relates both to persons and things ; 
but it must be preferred to duquel, when a noun comes 
after it : as, 

Le prince dont la protection. The prince whose protection. 

326. Quoi relates only to things. It is always pre- 
ceded by a preposition, and is generally used when the 
subject is vague and indefinite : as, 

II n' y a rien a quoi je sois There is nothing to which 
plus dispose. lam more inclined- 

EXERCISE LXXIX. 

A young man who loves vanity of dress, is unworthy of wisdom 
321 a se parer vainemont, 256 



182 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

and glory ; glory is due only to a heart that knows how to suffer pain, 
236 321 — 

and to trample upon pleasure. That after which a true philosopher 

Ce 326 

sighs most ardently, is to spread that sentiment of 2 universal 'benevo- 

261 
lence, which should unite and bring together all men. These are 

321 • • rapprocher- • 256 

conditions without which the thing would not have been concluded. 

262 324 

A man whose manners are innocent, and behaviour blameless, is 

325 258 irreprochable, 

the man whom we ought to cherish and honouT. The ambitious man 

323 — 

sees nothing but pleasure in the possession of the offices to which he 

— 324 

aspires with so much eagerness, instead of seeing the trouble that is 

321 

inseparable from them. To whom were you speaking when I met 

118 322 

vou 1 It was to my brother-in-law. 



SECTIOxN IV. 

OF THE ABSOLUTE PRONOUXS. 

327. Qui relates to persons only, and is of both 
genders and numbers : as, 

Qui vous a dit cela ? Wlw told you that ? 

Qui sont ces femmes la 1 Who are those women ? 

328. Que and quoi relate to things only : as, 
Que pouvait la valeur 1 What could valour do ? 

A quoi pensez-vous ? What are you (kinking of? 

329. Que is sometimes used for a quoi, de quoi: as, 

Que sert la science sans la What avails learning, without 

vertul virtue? 

Que sert a 1' avare d' avoir What avails it the miser to 

des richesses 1 possess treasures ? 

330. Que and quoi require the preposition de before 
the adjective or substantive that follows them : as, 

Que dit-on de nouveau 1 What nevjs is there ? 

Quoi de plus instructif ? What more instructive ? 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 183 

331. Quel relates both to persons and things : as, 
Quel homme est-ce 1 What man is it P 

Quel temps fait-il 1 What weather is it ? 

EXERCISE LXXX. 

Some one entered secretly ; guess who it was. Who would not 

327 — — 
love virtue, for its own sake, could he see it in all its beauty 1 

256 ■ -elle-meme- • si on pouvait 

What have you read in that book that can have excited in your soul 

328 321 port6 

emotion and enthusiasm 1 I know not what to think of it. In what 
256 329 118 328 

did you find them occupied 1 There is in that discourse I know not 

what which appears to me designing. What have you remarked 

328 sembler — insidieux. 

good, beautiful, and sublime in Homer 1 What more brilliant, and 

330 236 330 

at the same time more false, than the expressions of a man who has a 

en — 236 

great deal of wit, but wants judgment 1 He does not 

qui manque de 
know what model to follow. I have told you what man it is. Which 

331 331 ce 134 

of those ladies do you think the most amiable ? What then must 
trouver 331 done doit 

have been that Extraordinary 'man, to whom seven cities have 

322 

contested the glory of having given birth 1 One of your brothers 
se disputer 256 jour? 

has arrived from the continent : which is it 1 
134 

SECTION V. 

OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

332. Ce, when it relates to the first or second person, 
always governs the verb in the singular : as, 

C est moi ; c' est noua ; c' est vous. 

333. Ce governs the verb in the plural, only when it 
relates to the third person plural : as, 

Ce sont eux ; cefurent vos ancetres. 



1S4 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

334. Ce supplies the place of iZ, ils, elle, elks, when 
the verb etre is followed by a substantive : as, 

Lisez Horaere et Virgile : ce Read Homer and Virgil, they 

sont deux grands poetes. are two great poets. 

Avez-vous la Platon 1 c' est Have you read Plato ? he is a 

un beau genie. great genius, 

335. But when etre is followed by an adjective, or by 
a substantive taken adjectively, il, ils y elle, elles must 
be used : as, 

Lisez Demosthene et Ciceron : Read Demosthenes and Cice- 

ik sont tres-eloquents. ro : they are very eloquent. 

Compteriez-vous sur Valere 1 ? Would you rely upon Valere? 

Ignorez-vous qu' il est homme Do you not know that he is a 

a ne jamais revenir de ses pre- man who will never abandon his 

mieres idees ] first opinions ? 

336. Ce, followed by a relative pronoun, represents 
things only, and is always masculine singular : as, 

Ce qui flatte est plus dange- What flatters is more danger- 
reux que ce qui offense. ous than what offends. 

337. Ce, placed at the beginning of a sentence, must 
be repeated in the second part of that sentence, when it 
begins with the verb etre : as, 

Ce que j' aime le plus, c' est What I like most, is to be 
d' etre seul. alone. 

338. Celui, celle, apply both to persons and things : as, 
J' ai vu le portrait du pere et i" have seen the picture of the 

celui du tils. father, and. that of the son, 

Celle que vous haissez est ma She whom you hate is my best 
meilleure amie. friend. 

339. Celui is sometimes omitted, to give strength and 
elegance to the expression : as, 

Qui veut trop se faire craindre, [He] who wishes to make 
se fait rarement aimer. himself too much feared, seldoi.i 

makes himself beloved. 

EXERCISE LXXXI. 

It is we who have drawn that misfortune upon ourselves, through 

332 s' attirer — 

our thoughtlessness and imprudence. It was the Egyptians that 
l&reret<5 333 32L 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 185 

first observed the course of the stars, regulated the year, and 
les premiers astre, 

invented arithmetic. Peruse attentively Plato and Cicero : they are 

256 Lire 334 

the two philosophers of antiquity who have given us the most sound 

256 279 sain 

and luminous ideas upon morality. If you are intended for the 

256 • -se destiner- a 

pulpit, read over and over again Bourdaloue and Massillon : they 
• lire et relire sans cesse • • 335 

are both very eloquent ; but the aim of the former is to convince, and 

but 
that of the latter to persuade. What is astonishing is not always 

336 
what is pleasing. What the miser thinks least of, is to enjoy 

Ce a quoi — 337 

his riches. What pleases us in the writings of the ancients, is to 

337 
see that they have taken nature as a model, and that they have 

256 
painted her with a noble simplicity. Whichever of you 

338 que 

shall be found to excel the others, both in mind and body, shall 

on juger vainqueur et pour 237 

be acknowledged king of the island. There are admirable pictures ; 

these are after the manner of Rubens, and those after the manner 
139 dans genre 

of Van Huysum. He that judges of others by himself, is liable to 

138 
many mistakes. 

SECTION VI. 

OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

340. On is always subject, and always joined, to the 
third person singular of the verb : as, on dit, they say. 

341. Though on may generally be considered as a 
masculine pronoun, there are, however, occasions in 
which it is evidently feminine : as, on ri est pas toujours 
jeune et jolie. 

342. On is sometimes followed by an adjective, or a 
substantive plural : as, on se battit en desesperes ; cst-on 
des traitres f 



186 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

343. Quiconque is generally masculine, and relates to 
persons only : as, 

Quiconque parle. Whoever speaks. 

344. Quelqv? un applies both to persons and things : as, 
J' attends quelqu' un. I wait for somebody. 
Quelques-uns assurent. Some people affirm. 

345. Chacun, though always singular, when placed 
after the regimen, takes son, sa, ses : as, 

lis ont opine dans cette af- They have given their opinion 
faire, chacun selon ses lu- in that affair, each one accord- 
mieres. ing to his knowledge. 

346. But leur, leurs, must be used, when chacun is 
placed before the regimen : as, 

lis ont, chacun selon leurs They have, each one according 
lumieres, opine dans cette af- to his knowledge, given their 
faire. opinion in that affair. 

347. Autrui relates to persons only, and is always 
preceded by a preposition : as, 

La charite se rejouit du bon- Charity rejoices in the happi- 
heur d' autrui. ness of others. 

348. Per sonne is always masculine singular, and when 
it means nobody, takes ne before the verb : as, 

Personne n' est aussi heureux Nobody is so happy as she. 
qu' elle. 

349. In interrogative phrases without negation, or in 
phrases expressing doubt, personne signifies quelqu 1 un, 
anybody: as, 

Personne oserait-il nier 1 Je Would any body dare deny ? 
doute que personne soit assez I doubt ichether any body be 
hardi. bold enough. 

350. Autre relates both to persons and things : as, 
Un autre le fera. Another will do it. 

Cette plume ne vaut rien; This pen is good for nothing ,- 
donnez-m' en une autre. give me another one. 

351. Tel relates both to persons and things : as, 
M. un tel. Mr. such a one. 

Je ne vis jamais rien de tel. I never saw the like. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 187 

352. 1? un V autre applies both to persons and things : 
it takes both gender and number : as, 

lis se haissent V un V autre. They hate each other. 

353. If there be any preposition, it must be placed be- 
tween the two words which compose this pronoun : as, 

Elles parlent mal 1' une de They speak ill the one of the 
V autre. other. 

354. & un et V autre requires the verb in the plu- 
ral : as, 

L' un et T autre ont raison. Both are in the right. 

355. Tout, when a pronoun, signifies all things, every 
thing : as, 

II fait tout avec esprit. He does every thing ingeniously. 

EXERCISE LXXXII. 

Do you know what they do here 1 They eat, they drink, they 

340 
dance, they play, they walk; in a word, they kill time in the gayest 

256 
manner possible. Do you sincerely think, said Emily to Lucilla, 

de bonne foi 
that when women are sensible and pretty, they are ignorant of it 1 

341 341 — 

No, they know it very well; but if they are watchful over their 

jaloux de 
character, they are not proud of these advantages. We are not 
reputation, 342 

slaves, to receive such treatment. Whoever of you is bold enough 

essuyer 343 

to slander me, I will make him repent it. Will not some one of 

344 
these ladies be of the party 1 Some people like to read 

344 
every thing new. They have all brought offerings to the temple, 
toutes les nouveautes. 
every one according to his means and devotion. After a day so 

345 24 

usefully spent, they went back, each one to his own home. 

chez 346 — — 

Can any one be still so ignorant as not to know that it is from 
Pourrait-il • .-349--- des 

the earliest infancy we ought to form the mind, the heart and the taste ? 
tendre 340 



163 s COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

EXERCISE LXXXIII. 

Do not to others what you would not wish to be done to you. An 

347 
egotist loves nobody, not even his own children. Reason and 

348 pas 256 

faith equally demonstrate that we were created for another life. I 

350 
never heard any thing similar. The same man sows who often 

351 — 351 — 

reaps nothing. The happiness of the people constitutes that of the 

faire 
prince ; their true interests are connected with each other. They 

lier a ....353- -•• 

praise one another too much. They both relate the same story, 

352 354 rapporter fait", 

although neither believes it. I should love them both, if they 

bien 
were more attentive to their studies. Every thing which is lofty, 

355 61ev6, 

vast and profound, expands the imagination and dilates the heart 
6tendre 

Do you believe all that she says 1 No ; I do not believe the half 

355 ce que 
nox the quarter of it. 
119. 



CHAPTER V. 
OF THE VERB. 

AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH THE SUBJECT. 

356. The verb agrees in number and person with its 
subject or nominative : as, 

L' oiseau vole. The bird flies. 

Vous ne volez pas. You do not fly. 

357. When a verb has two subjects, both singular, it 
is put in the plural : as, 

Mon pere et ma mere m' ai- My father and mother love 
ment. me. 

358. When a verb has two or more subjects, of dif- 
ferent persons, it is put in the plural, and agrees with the 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 189 

first person, in preference to the other two, in which case 
the pronoun nous must be placed before the verb : as, 
Vous et moi nous irons. You and I will go. 

359. But, if the second person should be used with 
the third, the verb must be put in the second person plu- 
ral, and be preceded by vous: as, 

Vous et lui vous irez. You and he shall go. 

360. When the verb is preceded by the relative pro- 
noun qui, it must agree with the noun or pronoun to 
which qui relates : as, 

Est-ce moi qui 1' ai dit 1 Is it I who have said so ? 
Est-ce vous qui 1' avez vu 1 Is it you who have seen him ? 

361. When two or more nouns, united by ou, form 
the subject, the verb agrees with the last only: as, 

Pierre ou Paul le fera. Peter or Paul will do it. 

362. But, if the words united by ou are of different 
persons, the verb must be put in the plural : as, 

Vous ou moi parlerons. You or I shall speak. 

Vous ou votre frere viendrez. You or your brother will come. 

363. When two subjects are joined together by the 
conjunction comme, de mime que, ainsi que, &c, the verb 
agrees with the first subject only: as, 

•Cette bataille, comme tant d' au- That battle, like so many 
tres, ne decida de rien. others, decided nothing. 

364. When V un et V autre is the subject, the veib is 
put in the plural : as, 

L' un et 1' autre sont bons. Both are good. 

365. When ni V un ni V autre or two nouns joined 
together by ni repeated, are used as nominatives, the verb 
must be put in the plural, if both concur to the action, or 
receive it ; and the verb takes ne before it : as, 

Ni 1' un ni I' autre n' ont fait Neither the one nor the other 

ieur devoir. have done their duty. 

Ni la douceur ni la force ne Neither mildness nor force can 

peuvent rien. effect any thing. 



190 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

366. But the verb is put. in the singular, if only one 
performs the action, or receives it : as, 

Ni Smith ni Stone ne sera nom- Neither Smith nor Stone will 
me president. be chosen president. 

367. A substantive collective general, that is, a noun 
representing the whole of the persons or things mentioned, 
always governs the verb in the singular number : as, 

L' armee des confederes est The army of the confederates 
tres-nombreuse. is very numerous. 

368. But when the subject is a collective partitive, 
that is, a noun or an adverb representing a part of the 
whole, the verb agrees with the noun following it : as, 

Une troupe de barbares deso- A troop of barbarians hid 

lerent le pays. waste the country. 

Peu de gens negligent leurs Few people neglect their own 

interets. interests. 

REGIMEN OF VERBS. 

369; The object, or regimen, of the verb is either 
direct or indirect. 

370. The direct regimen is that on which the action 
immediately falls, without the help of any preposition : as, 

Je donne une plume. I give a pen. 

371. The indirect regimen is that on which the action 
of the verb cannot fall without the aid of a preposition : as, 

Je parle a ma soeur. I speak to my sister. 

372. Some verbs admit of both regimens : as, 

Je donne une plume a ma sceur. I give a pen to my sisfer. 

373. A verb after which qttelqi? un or quelque chose 
will form sense, is called active or transitive, and has a 
direct regimen : as, 

Je donne quelque chose. I give something. 

374. A verb after which quelqu? un or quelque chose 
will not form sense, is called neuter or intransitive, and has 
an indirect regimen. For instance, we cannot say, parler 
quelqu'* un, parler quelque chose, meaning, to speak to some 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 191 

one, to speak of some thing; but must call in the aid of a 
preposition, thus, parkr a quelqvt? un, parler de quelque 
chose, 

375. Passive verbs require for their regimen the pre- 
position^ or par, 

376. De is used when the passive verb expresses a 
feeling, or an affection of the soul : as, 

Cet enfant est sime de tout h This child is loved by every 
monde. body. 

377. But par must be used when the action expressed 
by the verb relates to the body only : as, 

L' operation fut faite par uti The operation was performed 
chirurgien celebre. by an eminent surgeon. 

378. Reflective verbs have for their regimen the pro- 
nouns me, fe, se, nous, vous : as, 

Je me fiatte. I flatter myself. 

II se blesse. He hurts himself 

379. Impersonal verbs generally have an indirect regi- 
men : as, 

II suffit de dire. It suffices to say. 

* EXERCISE LXXXIV. 

The most free of all men, is he who can be free even in slavery. All 

356 m6me 

men are inclined to idleness, but the savages of hot countries are the 

•356tendre- 356 

laziest of all men. His uprightness and honesty make him courted 

357 rechercher 

by every body. Strength of body and of mind meet 

376 256 celle 357 se rencontre 

not always together. You, your friend, and I, have each a differen 

358 
opinion. In our childhood, you and I were pleased with playing 

•358 se plaire- a 
together. You and your friend will come with me. He that 

.•••359--- 
complains most of mankind is not always he that has most reason 

360 256 hommes etre plus fonde" 

to complain of them. Either persuasion or terror has drawn him 
— 361 entrainer 



192 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

into the party of the rebels. It is he or I who have said it. Envy, 

rebelle. 362 256 

like ambition, is a blind passion. The king, as well as his ministry, 

363 

wishes for the public good. I called on your cousins, and I 

363 — bien. passer chea 

heard that both had been married a week. Both relate 

appiendre 364 • etaient • dtepui3 364 rapporter 

the same story, though neither believes it to be true. Neither 

fait, 365 ne penser que subj.pr. 366 

of them is th.e author of that book. 



EXERCISE LXXXV. 

The crowd followed him as far as to his house- A gang of thieves- 

foule 367 jusque- bande 

attacked me, and robbed me of every thing I had. Many 

368 — •••tout ce-- que 

persons experience that human life is, every where, a state in which 

368 
much is to be endured, and little to be enjoyed. He caresses therrv 
on a beaucoup de peines, de jouissances. 370 

because he loves them. You knew the importance which your 

370 savoir 

parents attached to the success of that affair : why have you not 

371 r^ussite 

hastened to announce it to them 1 He has made a present to 

s' empresser de 371 372 372 

his sister. The French were dreaded by their neighbours, under 

redouter 376 
Napoleon. His plan is approved by every body. Was not 

376 
England subdued by William the Conqueror, in the year 1066 ? 

conquerir 377 
The city of Troy was taken, plundered, and destroyed by the con- 

Troie saccager, 377 

federate Greeks, 1148 years before the Christian era. We flatter 

ourselves that you will meet with a very kind reception. He was 

378 serez accueilli de la rnaniere la plus bonn£te. 

warming himself when I came in. It is of moment to your 

378 entrer.- •••importer — 37& 

partners that you set off immediately, 
associe partir sur 1' heure. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 193 

USE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 

OF THE INDICATIVE. 

380. The present expresses an existing state, or an 
action occurring at the time when we speak : as, 

Mon frere dort. My brother sleeps. 

Je frapp e. I strike, 

381. The present is sometimes used to express an 
action past, in order to give a sort of animated picture of 
it. Thus, we find in Racine : 

J' ai vu votre malheureux fils I have seen your unhappy son 
traine par ses chevaux. U veut dragged along by his horses. He 
les rappeler, et sa voix les effraie. calls out to stop them, but his 

voice frightens them. 

382. In English, for greater accuracy of description, 
the verb to be is frequently used with the participle pre- 
sent ; as, / am reading, I ivas writing, 8lc. ; in place of, 
/ read, I wrote, &e. Such expressions must be rendered 
as follows : as, Je lis, I am reading; f ecrivais, I was 
writing, 8te. See notes to the verb parler, ante, pages 93, 
94, 95, for the various meanings of the French tenses. 

383. The imperfect expresses a present with respect 
to something past : as, 

Je pensais a vous quand vous I was thinking of you when 
entrates. you came in. 

384. It expresses also the recurrence of an action at a 
time which is past : as, 

Quand j' etais a la campagne, Wlien I was in the country, I 
j' allais souvent a la chasse. often went to the chase. 

And the continuance of an action or state : as, 
II ne meprisait ni ne rebut ait He neither despised nor dis- 
personne, et ne croyaii etre roi couraged any one, and thought 
que pour faire du bien. he was a king only to do good. 

385. The preterit definite is used to express an isolated 
action, performed at a time which is completely past : as, 

Je le vis hier. I saw him yesterday. 

Je regus une lettre la semaine I received a letter last week. 
derniere. 

I 13 



194 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

386. The preterit indefinite is used either for a time 
past which is indeterminate, or for a past of which some- 
thing still remains : as, 

J' ai voyage en Italie. I have travelled in Italy. 

y ai dejeune ce matin a Phila- I have breakfasted this morn" 
delphie. ingat Philadelphia, 

387. The pluperfect denotes one action which took 
place before another already past ; and also implies a re- 
currence of the same action : as, 

J' avais fini quand vous en- I had finished when you came 

trates. in. 

L' hiver dernier, quand nous Last winter, when we had 

avions pris le the, nous allions taken tea, we usually went to 

ordinairement au spectacle. the play. 

388. The preterit anterior expresses one isolated action, 
performed immediately before another which is also iso- 
lated, and both occurring at a time entirely past : as, 

Hier, quand nous eumes pris le Yesterday, when we had taken 
the, nous allames au spectacle. tea, we went to the play. 

389. The preterit anterior indefinite expresses an action 
performed at a time which is not yet past, and before 
another action : as, 

J' ai sorti ce matin des que I went out this morning as 
f ai eu dejeune. soon as I had breakfasted. 

390. The future absolute expresses an action which 
is to take place at a time determined or not : as, 

J' irai a la campagne. I will go to the country. 

J' irai demain a la campagne. / icill go to the country to- 

morrow. 

391. The future anterior is used to express one 
action which will take place before another yet to come : 
as, 

y aurai fini quand vous arri- I shall have finished when you 
verez. come. 

392. The future is not used after si, when the first 
verb implies no doubt : as, 

Je viendrai, si vous venez. I will come, if you come. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 195 

393. But the future is used after si, when the first verb 
implies doubt or uncertainty : as, 

Je ne sais s' il viendra. I do not know whether he will 

come. 

OF THE CONDITIONAL. 

394. The conditional is the mood which affirms on 
conditions ; it has two tenses, the present and the fast. 

395. The present expresses that a thing would take 
place on certain conditions : as, 

Je le ferais si j' avais le temps. I would do it if I had the 
time. 

396. The past is used to indicate that an action would 
have taken place on certain conditions, at a time which is 
past : as, 

Je 1' aurais fait si j' avais eu I would have done it if I had 
le temps. had the time. 

397. The second (not the first) conditional past is 
used after si, when the first verb implies no doubt : as, 

Je 1' eusse fait si j' eusse eu I would have done it if 1 had 
le temps. had the time. 

398. But when the first verb implies doubt, any tense 
of the conditional may be used after si: as, 

Je ne sais «' il strait venu. I do not know if he would 

have come. 

OF THE IMPERATIVE. 

399. The imperative is the mood which expresses 
command, entreaty or reproof: as, 

Soyez vertueux, et vous jouirez Be virtuous, and you will en- 
du vrai bonheur. joy real happiness. 

OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

400. The subjunctive mood is so called because it is 
dependent on a verb which precedes it ; without which 
dependence it would not form sense. Jt implies doubt. 



196 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

401. The present is used with the present or future 
of the indicative : as, 

Je desire qu 1 il parte. I wish he would set off. 

II faudra§V il parte. It will be necessary that he 

should set off. 

402. The imperfect is used with all the past tenses of 
the indicative, and also with the tenses of the conditional : 
as, 

Je desirais pu y il partit. I wished he would set off. 

J' aurais desire qu' il partit. I would have wished he would 
setoff. 

403. The imperfect is also used with the present or 
future of the indicative, "when followed by a conditional 
expression : as, 

Je doute qu J il partit mainte- J doubt that he would set off 
nant, si on ne 1' y contraignait. now, if he was not compelled to 

do so. 

404. The preterit is used with the present, or future 
of the indicative : as, 

Je doute qu' il soit parti. I doubt that he has set off. 

Je douterai qu' il soit parti. I shall doubt that he has set off. 

405. The pluperfect is used with all the past tenses 
of the indicative, and also with the tenses of the condi- 
tional : as, 

Je doutais qu' ilfut parti. I doubted that he had set off. 
Je douterais qu 1 ilfilt parti. I should doubt that he had set off. 

406. The pluperfect is also used with the present or 
future of the indicative, when followed by a conditional 
expression : as, 

Je douterai qu' il fit parti, si / shall doubt that he would 
on ne 1' y eut contraint. have set off, if he had not been 

compelled to do so. 

407. The verb must be put in the subjunctive, when- 
ever it is preceded by a superlative : as, 

C est le plus bel enfant que je It is the handsomest child I 

connaisse. know. 

C est le meilleur homme que He is the best man I know. 
je connaisse. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 197 

408. The subjunctive is also used after le seul, le 
premier, le dernier : as, 

C est le seal que f aie. It is the only one I have. 

C est le premier qui se soit He is the first that has made 
trompe. a mistake. 

409. We make use of the subjunctive after negative or 
interrogative prepositions implying doubt or uncertainty, 
and after words which have a negative import : as, 

Je ne crois pas qu' ilvienne. I do not think he will come. 

Croyez-vous qu 1 ilvienne ? Do you think he will come ? 

II n' y en a pas un qui puisse There is not one who can say so. 
le dire. 

410. The verb is always put in the subjunctive, 
after the conjunctions quoique, malgre que, and all those 
that mark a condition or a do-ubt, such as a moins que, 
pourvu que, &c. : as, 

Quoiqu' il soit juste. Although he is just. 
Pourvu qu' il soit ban. Provided he be good. 

41 1. The verb coming in the second part of a sentence 
may be either in the indicative or in the subjunctive, ac- 
cording to the idea of certainty or uncertainty which we 
wish to express. 

412. It is in the indicative when it expresses some- 
thing certain : as, 

Je cherche quelqu' un qui me lam looking for some one who 
rendra service. may render me a service. 

413. But it is put in the subjunctive, when it ex- 
presses something uncertain : as, 

Je cherche quelqu' un qui me I am looking for some one 
rende service. who may render me a service. 

OF THE INFINITIVE. 

414. The infinitive expresses affirmation in an indefi- 
nite manner, without any reference to number or person : 
as, chanter, to sing ; devoir, to owe. 

415. The preposition to, before the infinitive, when 
represented in French, is rendered by pour, a or de : as, 



198 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

II vint pour me parler. He came to speak to me. 
II aime a jouer. He likes to play. 

II me dit d' aller. He told me to go. 

416. The infinitive, when preceded by a preposition, 
is often rendered into English by the participle present : 
as, 

Empechez-le de parti?. Pr -event him from setting off. 

II s' en alia sans dire un mot He went away without saying 
a word. 

417. It is also rendered by the participle present, 
when it is the regimen of another verb : as, 

Je 1' ai entendu chanter. I have heard him smging. 

418. The infinitive expresses neither present, past, 
nor future, except when it is preceded by other verbs : 
as, 

Je crois le voir. I think I see him. 

Je cms 1' entendre. I thought I heard him. 

Je voudrais le savoir. I wish I knew it. 

EXERCISE LXXXVI. 

He is in his chamber, where he is relaxing his mind from the fa- 

382 delasser 
tigue of business, by some instructive and agreeable reading. Adras- 

lecture. 
tus thought that he saw and heard Telemachus in a valley at 

385 — --417-- 

the foot of a hill, where there was a crowd of combatants ; he runs, 

foule 3S1 

he flies, he longs to sate himself with blood. What are 

vouloir •• -se rassasier- •• de 
vou doing here 1 I am translating from English into French. 

••382 362 en 

I was answering your letter when you arrived. When I was 
3S2 a 365. 384 

at Paris, I went every morning to take a walk in the Champs Ely- 

3S4 
sees. As soon as we perceived the danger, we warned him of it. 

365 
I have travelled through almost all Europe, and I have visited the 

366 dans 

most celebrated places in Asia and Africa, 
lieu de Afrique. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 199 

EXERCISE LXXXVIL 

I had finished the task that you had imposed upon me, when you 

387 — 

came in. When I was in the country, as soon as I had break- 

.••385--- a 3a7 

fasted, I used to go a-hunting. As soon as Caesar 

avais coutume 

had crossed the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate; he 

•388 passer- 3S5 plus 

was obliged to conquer or to die. This morning, after he had 

-3S5 devoir- vaincre 

breakfasted, I spoke to him. I shall go shortly into the coun- 

••389 --390-- bient6t h 

try, where I intend to collect plants, in order to perfect myself 

se proposer de • -herborise*- • 
in the knowledge of botany. ' I shall have done before you 

botanique. 391 ne 

€et out I will reward you, if you study your lesson welJL You 

• • 410- • 392 

do not know whether you will be rewarded. 
• •393- 

EXERCISE Lxxxvrn. 

I would settle your business before long, if it depended only 

••395faire-- pea, uniquement 

upon me. I should have been mortified, if he had lost his 

de 396 ---397- • 

lawsuit Do jou know whether he would do it] Be not 
proces. • • • S9S • ■ • 399 

fond of praise ; but seek virtue, which procures it 

passionne' pour iouange ; 399 

Let us not be deceived by the first appearance of things; bat 
•• -399 se laisser prendre • • a 

let us take time to fix our judgment. I wish you may succeed 
-sedonner- de 401 

in your undertaking. He will require you to do it. I could not 

- • . 401 • ■ • 
persuade myself that he was so vain as to aspire to that 
402 assez — pour 

place. Though every body savs so, I do not believe that be 
410 

is gone to Rome. I could wish that the love which we ought to 

• • 409- • 

have for one another, were the principle of all our actions, as if 
409 



300 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

is the basis of all virtues. I doubt whether his piece would have 

256 que 403- ••• 

the approbation of connoisseurs, unless he made the alterations you 

suffrage ' 
judged necessary. 



EXERCISE LXXXIX. 

I am very sorry that this misfortune has happpened to you. It 

• • • -167, 404 ... • 

would be unjust that a vile murderer should not be punished. I 
assassin 405 

could have wished that you had applied yourselves more to your 
405 davantage 

studies. I doubt whether the Romans would ever have triumphed 

que - 406 

over the Gauls, if the different chiefs of this warlike people had not 



been disunited. His cousin is the handsomest young lady that 



en 



can be seen. The movements of the planets are the most regu- 

407 • • voir • • 

lar that we know. He is the only man that is capable of filling 

407 408 ..-416 •• 

that charge. It is one of the last epistles which Saint Paul 

has written. Do you believe he is vain enough to aspire to that 

...408 409 

high degree of honour ? I do not think she is handsome enough 

409 
to please you. There are few kings who know how to seek true 

409- 
glory. 

EXERCISE XC. 

I will not pardon you, unless you promise me to behave 

ne 410 de se conduire 

better in future. Although she is rich, I would not marry her. 

a 410 

I will give you leave to dance, provided you give me your word 
de 410 parole 

of honour not to overheat yourself. I want a decanter that 

de echauffer carafe 

will contain three pints of wine. I shall marry a lady that pleases 

411 411 

me. You cannot prevent my flocks from grazing in this place. I 

416 






GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 201 

composed that song while walking, and I spent two hours in 
386 422 a 

correcting it. We saw her dead, and we thought we saw an 
416 385 ...418--- 

angel asleep. This woman is always occupied in doing good 

• •a416-- 

works : you see her constantly consoling the unhappy, relieving 
oeuvre : sans cesse 417 assister 

the poor, reconciling enemies, and promoting the happiness of every 

417 •■■faire--- 

one around her. 



CHAPTER VI. 



OF THE PARTICIPLE. 



419. There are two participles, the present and the 
past. 

420. The participle present is indeclinable, and always 
expresses an action : as, 

J' ai vu cette femme obligeant I saw that woman obliging 

ses amis. her friends. 

J' ai vu ces beautes charmant I saw those beauties charming 

tout le monde. every one. 

421. But care must be taken not to confound it with 
adjectives spelled similarly, and also derived from verbs, 
which express only a state or a quality, and agree in 
gender and number with their substantives : as, 

Cete femme est obligeante. That woman is obliging. 

Ces beautes sont charmantes. Those beauties are charming. 

422. The only preposition after which the French use 
the participle present is en : as, 

On apprend en instruisant les We learn by teaching others* 
autres. 

423. The participle past never agrees with its object 
direct, when that object is placed after it : as, 

Elle a obtenu des graces. She has obtained some favours. 



202 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

424. But it does agree with its object direct, when that 
object is placed before it : as, 

Quelles sont les graces qu' elle What are the favours which she 
a obtenues P has obtained ? 

425. The participle past of a neuter verb always re- 
mains invariable : as, 

Us nous ont nui. They have injured us. 

La joie a paru dans leurs Joy has appeared in their eyes. 
yeux. 

426. The participle past is invariable, when it relates 
to the pronoun en: as, 

II a gagne autant de batailles He has won as many battles as 
qu' il en a livre. he has fought. 

427. The participle past of an impersonal verb is 
always invariable : as, 

La chaleur qu' il a. fait. The heat which we have had. 
La disette qu' il y a eu. The dearth which we have had. 

428. When accompanied by the verb etre, expressed 
or understood, the participle past must be considered as 
an adjective, since it only indicates the state of the sub- 
ject, with which it agrees in gender and number : as, 

Elle est blessee. She is wounded. 

lis sont blesses. They are wounded. 

Que de villes detruites! How many towns destroyed. 

429. The participle past of the verbs which are natu- 
rally pronominal, agrees with its object, which is always 
the second pronoun : as, 

lis se sont repentis. They have repented. 
Elle s' est enfuie. She has fled. 

430. The participle past of neuter verbs, which are 
accidentally made pronominal, is al ways invariable : as, 

Elles se sont nui. They have injured each other. 

lis se sont parle. They have spoken to each other. 

431. The participle past of active verbs which are 
accidentally pronominal, follows the general rule. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



EXERCISE XCI. 

Does not every body respect those magistrates, who, forgetting their 

420 
own interests, observing the laws, protecting virtue, and restraining 

r^primer 
vice, have in view only the welfare of their country 1 Is not this a 

bonheur 
convincing proof of the surprising effects of the loadstone 1 It is not 

421 aimant 1 

in giving ourselves up to our passions that we hye happy ; it is in go- 
422 
verning them. I have attentively read the papers which you have 

423 
sent me, about the affair which 1 had proposed to you, and I have 
424 touchant 424 

found that if I had undertaken it, I should have met with obstacles 

423 424 423 — 

which I had not foreseen. Our enemies have injured us more by their 

424 425 

moderation than by their valour. Alexander has destroyed more cities 

423 
than he has founded. The abundant rains which have fallen this 

426 427 

summer have spoiled the harvest. The wicked are always tormented 

423 428 

by the remorse of their own conscience. His sister has laughed at 

429 
me. How many kings have succeeded one another on the throne of 

430 
France? 



CHAPTER VII. 



OF THE ADVERB. 



432. The negative, in French, consists of the words 
ne pas, or ne point, which are often divided. Point is 
stronger than pas : as, 

Je ne joue pas. I do not play. 

Je ne joue point. i" do not play at all. 

433. When ne is accompanied by a word expressing 



•204 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

want or absence, such as jamais, plus, aucun, &c. ; pas or 
point is omitted : as, 

Je ne joue jamais. I never play. 

Je ne joue plus. Ipl ai J n '~> more. 

Je ne joue a aucun jeu. J do not play at any game. 

434. For the sake of elegance, pas, or point may also 
be omitted after the verbs cesser, oser, pouvoir and savoir : 
as, 

II ne cesse de parler. He does not leave off speaking. 

II n' ose vous parler. He dares not speak to you. 

435. The particle ne is used after the verbs craindre, 
trembler, apprehender, avoir peur, although it does not 
affect the meaning : as, 

Je crains qu' il ne vienne. I am afraid he will come. 

Je tremble que cela n' arrive. I tremble lest that will happen. 

436. Ne is also used after the conjunctions a moins 
que, de peur que, and de crainte que: as, 

A moins que vous ne lui par- Unless you speak to him. 
liez. 

De peur qu' il ne le sache. Lest he should know it. 

437. Plus and davantage must not be used indiffer- 
ently. 

Plus is followed by de, or que: as, 

II a plus de brillant que de so- He has more brilliancy than 
lide. solidity. 

438. But davantage is used alone, and at the end of 
sentences : as, 

La science est estimable, mais Learning is estimable, but 
la vertu 1' est davantage. virtue is still more so. 



EXERCISE XCII. 

Never do to others what you would not like them to do unto you. 

433 autrui 432 qu'onfit- — 

Your letter is very badlv written : I am afraid you have written it 

435 
hastilv. I can not see him without trembling. Use none of 
a la bate. 434 416 * Employer 433 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 205 

these stratagems. He does not know what he says. He is better, 

434 
but we are afraid lest the fever should return upon him. For fear he 

435 — — ---m--- 

should do it. Nobody behaves with more prudence than he. He is 

433 437 

rich, but his brother is more so. There is no more of it. 
438 438 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OF THE PREPOSITION. 

439. En is used in a vague sense, and is seldom fol- 
lowed by the article : as, 

II demeure en France. He lives in France. 

440. Dans is used in a determinate sense : as, 

II demeure dans la province de He lives in the province of 
Middlesex. Middlesex. 

Mettez cela dans le tiroir. Put this in the drawer. 

441. Jlvant denotes priority of time and order : as, 
II est arrive avant moi. He has arrived before me. 

442. Devant is used for en presence de: as, 

II a paru devant le juge. He has appeared before the judge. 

CHAPTER IX. 

OF THE CONJUNCTION que. 

443. Que serves to complete a comparison : as, 

L' Asie est plus grande que Asia is larger than Europe. 
1' Europe. 

444. Que, after ne, expresses restriction : as, 
On ne parle que de cela. They talk only of that. 

445. Que is used to save the repetition of comme, sz, 
puisque, &c. : as, 

Comme il ne vient pas, et qu 1 ii As he does not come, and [as] 

ne fait rien dire. he sends no word. 

Puisqii? il est votre ami, et que Since he is your friend, and 

vous lui etes redevable. [since] you are beholden to him. 



206 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES* 

THE DEATH OF ADRASTUS. 

EXERCISE XCm. 

Telemachus heard at a distance the shouts of the victors, and saw 

cri 
the disorder of his people flying before Adrastus; like a herd of 

• -des siens • • troupe 

timorous deer crossing the spacious plains, the woods, the mountains, 

campagne, 
and even the most rapid rivers, when they are pursued by the hunters. 

He sighs deeply ; indignation is manifest in his eyes ; he quits the 

• •••g6mir 256 --paraitre- 

place where he had long fought with so much danger and glory ; he 
runs to sustain his party : he advances all covered with the blood of a 
multitude of enemies whom he had extended in the dust ; and, on his 

way, he gives a shout which is heard by both armies, 
pousser se faire entendre a 

* The Exercises in this Grammar, hitherto, have been in exem- 
plification of particular Rules. These " Promiscuous Exercises'' are 
intended to furnish good practice under all the Rules. They comprise 
three pieces, each divided into Exercises of convenient length. The 
first — " The Death of Adrastus" — is translated from the French : 
it preserves, as far as may be, the French idiom, and is accompanied, 
as in previous Exercises, by versions of the more difficult phrases 
and words, and references to appropriate Rules. The second — " The 
Questions left by Minos" — also is translated from the French, and 
retains the idiomatic peculiarities of that language ; but it is without 
aids to the pupil, who is now for the first time left to walk alone. The 
third — "The Transmigrations of Indur" — is originally English, and 
has been selected for the excellence of its style, for the pleasing variety 
of subjects which it introduces, and for the large number of different 
words which its calls into use. In this piece the pupil takes his last 
step in the art of writing French : for he is required, unaided, to render 
his own Iansjua^e into such French as shall not be merely English 
gallicized, but French in idiom and general style — in short, such 
French as a well educated Frenchman would use to express the same 
ideas. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 207 

Minerva had infused something terrible into his voice, which 

mettre je ne sais quoi dont 

made the neighbouring mountain ring. The voice even of Mars 

— retentir. 

was never louder in Thrace, when .he called up the infernal furies, 

war and death. The shout of Telemachus animates his people 
256 
with new courage, and chills the enemy with fear. Even Adrastus 

feels himself confused. A thousand fatal presages thrill him 

troubler. — le font fr^mir 

with horror; and he is actuated rather by despair than a sedate 

tranquille 

valour. Thrice his trembling knees bent under him, and thrice he 

drew back without knowing what he did. A swooning pale- 

416 de d^faillance 

ness and a cold sweat spread over all his limbs; his hoarse and 

faltering voice could sound no word distinct ; his eyes, sparkling with 

hesitant 

a gloomy fire, seemed to be ready to start out of his head ; he looked 

like Orestes tortured by the Furies ; all his motions were convulsive. 

agiter 
Now he begins to believe that there are Gods ; he fancies that he sees 
Alors 

them incensed against him, and that he hears a hollow voice arising 

from the depths of hell, and calling him to everlasting torment. Every 

thing makes him sensible of a heavenly and invisible hand stretched 
• • -lui faire sentir- • • 

over his head, and ready to fall heavy upon him. Hope was extm- 
s' app^santir 256 

guished in his heart ; and his courage vanished like the daylight, 
when the sun sinks into the bosom of the waves, and the earth is 
enveloped in the shades of night. 

EXERCISE XCIV. 

Adrastus, whose tyranny would already have been too long, if the 

earth had not needed such a scourge, the impious Adrastus, had filled 

up the measure of his iniquity, and his hour was come. He madly 

forcen6 
runs to meet his inevitable fate ; horror, stinging remorse, constema- 

256 



§08 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

tion, fury, rage, despair, attended his steps. He scarcely sees Te- 

marcher avec lui. 
lemachus ; but he fancies he sees Avernus yawn, and whirlwinds of 

256 
flames issuing from dreary Phlegethon, ready to swallow him up. 
He cries out, and his mouth remains open, without being able to 

utter a word. So a man asleep in a frightful dream opens his lips, 

286 
and strives to speak ; but his speech continually fails him, and he seeks 
it in vain. Adrastus, with a trembling, hasty hand, hurls his javelin 
at Telemachus. The latter is undaunted, as the friend of the Gods, 
and covers himself with his shield. Victory already seems to over- 
shadow him with her wings, and suspend a crown over his head. A 

calm and composed courage glittered in his eyes, and one would 
doux paisible 

have taken him for Minerva herself, so wise and discreet does he 

mesur6 
appear in the greatest dangers. The javelin of Adrastus is repelled 
by the shield. Upon which the Daunian instantly draws his sword, 
to deprive the son of Ulysses of the advantage of throwing his jave- 
lin in his turn. Telemachus, seeing Adrastus with his sword in 

— la a 

his hand, immediately draws his also, and drops his useless javelin. 
286 

EXERCISE XCV. 

When the other combatants on each side saw them thus closely 
engaged, they laid down their arms to gaze upon them, and from this 
single combat expected the issue of the war. Their swords, bright 
as the flashes whence the thunderbolts are hurled, frequently cross 

each other, and deal their fruitless blows upon their polished and 

porter des 
resounding armour. The two combatants stretch themselves out. 
shrink up, stoop down, rise again in an instant, and at length 

grapple with each other. The ivy growing at the foot of an elm, 

se saisir 

does not more closely embrace its hard and knotty trunk with it- 
entwining arms, even to its highest branches, than the two" com- 
batants grasp each other. Adrastus had lost nothing of his strength : 
but that of Telemachus was not yet mature. Adrastus makes several 
efforts to stagger, and throw his antagonist by surprise. At last he 
endeavours to seize the sword of the young Greek, but in vain ; for 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 209 

the moment he attempts it, Telemachus lifts him from the ground, 
and throws him on the sand. In this dreadful moment, the wretch 

who had so long despised the gods, betrays an unmanly fear of death ; 

montre laphe 

he is ashamed to ask his life, and yet cannot help manifesting his 
desire to live. He endeavours to move the compassion of Telema- 
chus. Son of Ulysses, said he, I at length acknowledge the 
righteous gods : they punish me as I have deserved. It is misfortune, 
only that opens our eyes to truth : I now see it, and it condemns me ; 
but let an unhappy prince bring your father, now distant from his 
country, to your remembrance, and touch your breast with com- 
passion ! 

Telemachus, who kept the tyrant under him with his knee, and 

had already raised his sword to plunge it into his throat, immediately 
replied : I sought nothing but victory, and the peace, of the nations I 

came to assist; I do not delight in bloodshed. Live, then, 

aimer a r^pandre le sang. 
Adrastus, but live to repair your faults ; restore every thing which 

you have usurped; re-establish peace and justice on the coast of 

256 
Great Hesperia, which you have stained by numberless massacres 
and treacheries ; live, and become another man. Learn by your 
fall that the gods are righteous ; that the wicked are miserable ; that 

they deceive themselves in seeking for happiness in violence, 

— 256 

inhumanity and falsehood ; and, in short, that nothing is so delightful 

237 
and happy as a plain and steady virtue. Give us, as hostages^ your 
ni 
son Metrodorus, with twelve of the principal persons of your nation. 

EXERCISE XCVI. 

This said, Telemachus suffers Adrastus to rise, and holds out 
A ces paroles, 

his hand to him, without suspecting his treachery : but the tyrant im- 
mediately darts another javelin at him, which was very short, and 
which he had kept concealed. It was so sharp, and so artfully 
thrown, that it would have pierced Telemachus's armour, if it had 
not been divine. Adrastus at the same time runs behind a tree, to 

i* 14 



210 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

avoid the pursuit of the young Greek. Telemachus then cries out : 

Bear witness, Daunians, the victory is ours ! The impious wretch 
Vous le voyez, — 

saves himself only hy treachery. He that fears not the gods, is 
afraid of death. On the contrary, he that fears the gods, fears nothing 
but them. In speaking these words, he advances towards the 
Daunians, and makes a sign to his people, who were on the other 
side of the tree, to cut off the retreat of Adrastus. The tyrant, 

perceiving his situation, pretends as if he would go back again, 

voir fait semblant de retoumer sur ses pas- • • • 

and attempts to break through the Cretans who obstruct his passage. 
But Telemachus, swift as the thunderbolt hurled by the hand of the 
father of the gods from the top of Olympus on the heads of the guilty, 

flies instantly on his enemy : he seizes him with his victorious hand, 

de un 
he throws him on the earth, as the cruel north wind beats down the 

tender harvests which gild the fields. He hears him no more, 

Scooter 
though the impious wretch makes a second attempt to abuse the 

goodness of his heart. He plunges his sword in his breast, and 

hurls him headlong into the flames of dreary Tartarus, a punishment 

le pr£cipiter 256 266 

worthy of his crimes. — Fenelon. 



THE QUESTIONS LEFT BY MINOS. 

EXERCISE XCVII. 

The chief of the elders opened the book of the laws of Minos ; it was 
a large volume, which was usually locked up in a golden box, with 
perfumes. All the old men kissed it with respect ; for they said, that 
next to the gods, from whom good laws proceed, nothing ought to be 
sacred to men as laws designed to render them good, wise, and happy. 
Those who are entrusted with the execution of the laws for the go- 
vernment of the people, ought themselves always to be governed by 
the laws : it is the law, and not the man, which ought to reign. Such 
was the discourse of these sages. He who presided over them proposed 
three questions, which were to be resolved by the laws of Minos. 






GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 211 

The First Question was — Who is the most free of all men 1 Some 
- answered that it was a king who has an absolute dominion over his 
subjects, and was victorious over all his enemies. Others maintained 
that it was a rich man, who could gratify all his desires. Others said, 
that it was a man who was not married, and was travelling during his 
whole life through divers countries, without ever being subject to 
the laws of any nation. Others imagined, that it was a barbarian, 
who, subsisting by hunting in the midst of the woods, was indepen- 
dent of all government, and free from every want. Others believed, 
that it was a man lately made free, because, by passing from the 
rigours of slavery, he enjoyed, more than any body else, the sweets of 
liberty. And lastly, others bethought themselves to say that it was a 
dying man, because death freed him from every thing, and that all 
mankind united had no longer any power over him. 

EXERCISE XCVIII. 

When my turn came, I was at no loss for an answer, because I had 
not forgotten what Mentor had often told me. " The most free of all 
men," said I, "is he who can be free in slavery itself. In what coun- 
try or condition soever a man may be, he is perfectly free, provided he 
fears the gods, and fears nothing but them. In a word, the truly free 
man is he who, void of all fears and all desires, is subject only to the 
gods and reason.'' The elders looked on each other with a smile, and 
were surprised to see that my answer was precisely that of Minos. 

They then proposed the Second Question, in these words : — Who 
is the most unhappy of all men? Every one said what occurred to 
his mind. One said, It is a man who has neither money, nor health, 
nor honour. Another said, It is one who has no friend. Others 
maintained, that it was a man who has ungrateful and degenerate 
children. There came a sage of the isle of Lesbos, who said: The 
most unhappy of all men, is he who thinks himself so ; for unhappi- 
ness arises less from what we suffer, than from the impatience with 
which we aggravate our misery. At these words, the whole assembly 
shouted ; they applauded the sage Lesbian, believing that he would 
carry the prize as to this question. But they asked my opinion, and 
I answered — according to Mentor's maxims — " The most unhappy of 
aii men, is a king who expects to be happy by rendering other men 



212 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

miserable : his blindness doubles his unhappiness ; for, not knowing 
his misfortune, he cannot cure himself of it ; he is afraid even to know 
it : truth cannot pierce through the crowd of flatterers, to arrive at him. 
He is the slave of his passions, he knows not his duty ; he has never 
tasted the pleasure of doing good, nor felt the charms of virtue ; he is 
wretched, and deserves to be so ; his wretchedness increases daily; he 
runs to his destruction, and the gods are preparing eternal punishment 
for him." The whole assembly owned that I had outdone the Les- 
bian sage, and the elders declared that I bad hit upon the true sense 
of Minos. 

EXERCISE XCIX. 

It was asked, Which of the two is preferable : a king victorious and in- 
vincible in war ; or a king without experience in war, but qualified to 
govern his people wisely in peace 1 ? The majority answered, that 
a king who is invincible in war was to be preferred. What profits it, 
said they, to have a king who knows to govern well in peace, if he 
knows not to defend his country in time of war? His enemies 
will vanquish him, and reduce his people to slavery. Others, on the 
contrary, maintained, that a pacific king would be better, because he 
would fear war, and take care to avoid it. Others said, that a victo- 
rious king would labour to advance his subjects' glory as well as his 
own, and would render them masters of other nations ; whereas, a pa- 
cific king would keep them in shameful cowardice. My opinion was 
asked, and I answered thus : 

" A king who is able to govern only in peace, or only in war, and 
is not capable of conducting his people in both these circumstances, is 
but half a king. But, if you compare a king who understands nothing 
but war, to a wise king, who, without understanding war himself, is 
capable of maintaining it on occasion by his generals, I think him pre- 
ferable to the other. A king entirely turned to war, would be so often 
making it, in order to extend his dominions and glory, that he would 
ruin his people : what avails it to them that their prince subdues other 
nations, if they themselves are miserable under his reign 1 Beside?, 
long wars always draw after them many disorders ; the victors them- 
selves grow licentious in these times of confusion. Consider how 
dear it has cost Greece to triumph over Troy : she was deprived of 
her kings for more than ten years. Whilst every thing is inflamed by 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 213 

war, laws, agriculture, and the arts languish. Even the best princes, 
while they are engaged in it, are constrained to commit the greatest 
of evils, which is, to wink at licentiousness, and to employ wicked men. 
How many profligate wretches are there whom one would punish in 
time of peace, but whose crimes are even rewarded during the disor- 
ders of war ! Never had any nation a conquering monarch, without 
having suffered much from his ambition. A conqueror, intoxicated 
with his glory, ruins his victorious nation almost as much as the na- 
tions he has conquered. A king who has not the qualifications requi- 
site for peace, cannot make his subjects taste the fruits of a war hap- 
pily ended. He resembles a man who not only can defend his own 
field, but is able to usurp his neighbour's, although he neither can 
plough nor sow it in order to reap the harvest. Such a man seems 
born to destroy, to ravage, to overturn the world, and not to render a 
nation happy by the wisdom of his government. 

EXERCISE C. 
"Let us now advert to the pacific king. He is not, indeed, quali- 
fied to make great conquests ; that is, he is not born to trouble the re- 
pose of his people, by seeking to vanquish other nations whom justice 
has not subjected to him ; but he is really adapted to govern in peace. 
He has all the qualifications which are necessary to secure his sub- 
jects against their enemies : for he is just, moderate, and easy with 
regard to his neighbours ; he never undertakes any thing against them 
which may disturb the public peace, and he is faithful to his alliances. 
His allies love him, do not fear him, and have an entire confidence in 
him. If they have a restless, haughty and ambitious neighbour, all 
the adjacent princes who fear the turbulent, and have no jealousy of 
the peaceful king, join themselves to the latter, in order to hinder him 
from being oppressed. His probity, his sincerity, his moderation, 
make him the arbiter of all the neighbouring nations. Whilst the 
enterprising monarch is hated by all the rest, and continually in dan- 
ger of their confederacies, the peaceful prince has the glory to be, as it 
were, the father and guardian of the others. These are the advan- 
tages which he has abroad ; those he enjoys at home are still more 
solid. Since he is qualified to govern in peace, I suppose that he 
governs by the wisest laws. He suppresses pomp, luxury, and all 
the arts which serve only to cherish vice ; he makes those arts flourish 



14 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



which are subservient to the real wants of life ; above all, he causes 
I?is subjects to apply themselves to agriculture, and he thereby pro- 
cures them plenty of all necessaries. These laborious people, simple 
in their manners, accustomed to lire on a little, and easily getting their 
livelihood by the culture of their lands, increase daily. Let a neigh- 
bouring conqueror attack them ,- he will find them, perhaps, not very 
expert in forming camps, in ranging themselves in order of battle, or 
in erecting machines to besiege a city; but he will find them invinci- 
ble by their numbers, by their courage, by their patience of fatigues, 
by their habit of bearing poverty, by their vigour in battle, and by a 
virtue which ill success itself cannot abate. Besides, if this king has 
not sufficient experience to command his armies himself, he will cause 
them to be commanded by men who are capable of it, and will know 
how to make use of them, without losing his authority. In the mean 
while, he will obtain assistance from his allies ; his subjects will rather 
die than submit to the yoke of a violent and unjust prince ; and even 
the gods themselves will fight for him. Behold what resources he will 
have amidst the greatest dangers ! I conclude, therefore, that a peace- 
ful king, who is ignorant of war, is a very imperfect king, since he 
knows not to discharge one of his greatest duties, which consists in 
subduing his enemies ; but I add, however, that he is infinitely supe- 
rior to a conqueror, who wants the qualities necessary in peace, and 
is fit only for war." 

All the elders declared that I had spoken like Minos. — Fexeuos. 



THE TRANSMIGRATIONS OF INDUR. 

EXERCISE CI. 
At the time when fairies and genii possessed the powers which they 
have now lost, there lived in the country of the Brahmins a man 
named Indur, who was distinguished, not only for that gentleness of 
disposition and humanity towards all living creatures, which are so 
much cultivated among those people, but for an insatiable curiosity 
respecting the nature and way of life of all animals. In pursuit of 
knowledge of this kind he would frequently spend the night among 
lonely rocks, or in the midst of thick forests ; and there, under shelter 
of a hanging cliff, or mounted upon a high tree, he would watch the 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 215 

motions and actions of all the animals that seek their prey in the 
night; and remaining in the same spot till the break of day, he 
would observe these tribes of creatures retiring to their dens, and all 
others coming forth to enjoy the beams of the rising sun. On these 
occasions, if he saw any opportunity of exercising his benevolence 
towards animals in distress, he never failed to make use of it; and 
many times rescued the small birds from the pitiless hawk, and the 
lamb or kid from the gripe of the wolf and lynx. One day, as he 
was sitting on a tree in the forest, a little frolicksome monkey, in 
taking a long leap from one bough to another, chanced to miss his 
hold, and fell from a great height to the ground. As he lay there, 
unable to move, Indur espied a large venomous serpent advancing to 
make the poor defenceless creature his prey. He immediately de- 
scended from his post, and taking the little monkey in his arms, ran 
with it to the tree, and gently placed it upon a bough. In the mean 
time, the enraged serpent, pursuing him, overtook him before he 
could mount the tree, and bit him in the leg. Presently the limb 
began to swell, and the effects of the venom became visible over 
Indur's whole frame. He grew faint, sick, and pale; and, sinking 
on the ground, was sensible that his last moments were fast approach- 
ing. As thus he lay, he was surprised to hear a human voice from 
the tree; and looking up, he beheld, on the bough where he had 
placed the monkey, a beautiful woman, who thus addressed him: — 
" Indur, I am truly grieved that thy kindness to me should have been 
the cause of thy destruction. Know, that in the form of the poor 
monkey, it was the potent fairy Perezinda to whom thou gavest 
succour. Obliged to pass a certain number of days every year under 
the shape of an animal, I had chosen this form; and, though not 
mortal, I should have suffered extreme agonies from the bite of the 
serpent, hadst thou not so humanely assisted me. It is not in my 
power to prevent the fatal effect of the poison ; but I am able to grant 
thee any wish thou shalt form respecting the future state of existence 
to which thou art now hastening. Speak, then, before it be too late, 
and let me show my gratitude." 

" Great Perezinda !" replied Indur, " since you deign so boun- 
teously to return my service, this is the request that I make : In ail 
my transmigrations may I retain a rational soul, with the memory 
of the adventures I have gone through; and when death sets me 



216 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

free from one body, may I instantly animate another in the prime 
of its powers and faculties, without passing through the helpless state 
of infancy." " It is granted," answered the fairy ; and immediately 
breaking a small branch from the tree, and breathing on it, she threw 
it down to Indur, and bade him hold it fast in his hand. He did so. 
and presently expired. 

EXERCISE CIL 

Instantly, he found himself in a green valley, by the side of a dear 
stream, grazing amid a herd of antelopes. He admired his elegant 
shape, sleek, spotted skin, and polished spiral horns ; and drank with 
delight of the cool rivulet, cropped the juicy herb, and sported with 
his companions. Soon an alarm was given of the approach of an 
enemy ; and they ail set off with the swiftness of the wind to the 
neighbouring immense plains, where they were soon out of the reach 
of injury. Indur was highly delighted with the ease and rapidity 
of his motions ; and snuffing the keen air of the desert, bounded 
away, scarcely deigning to touch the ground with his feet. This 
way of life went on very pleasantly for some time, till at length the 
herd was one morning alarmed with noises of trumpets, drums, and 
loud shouts, on every side. They started and ran first to the right, 
then to the left, but were continually driven back by the surrounding 
crowd, which now appeared to be a whole army of hunters, with the 
king of the country and all bis nobles, assembled on a solemn chase, 
after the manner of the eastern people. And now the circle began 
to close, and numbers of affrighted animals, of various kinds, thronged 
together in the centre, keeping as far as possible from the dangers 
that approached them from all quarters. The huntsmen were now 
come near enough to reach their game with their arrows ; and the 
prince and his lords shot at them as they passed and repassed, killing 
and wounding great numbers. Indur and his surviving companions, 
seeing no other means of escape, resolved to make a bold push to- 
wards that part of the ring which was the most weakly guarded ; and 
though many perished in the attempt, yet a few, leaping over the 
heads of the people, got clear away ; and Indur was among the num- 
ber. But whilst he was scouring over the plain, rejoicing in his good 
fortune and conduct, an enemy, swifter than himself, overtook him. 
This was a falcon, which, let loose by one of the huntsmen, dashed 



' 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 217 

like lightning after the fugitives ; and alighting upon the head of In- 
dur, began to tear his eyes with his beak, and flap his wings over his 
face. Indur, terrified and blinded, knew not which way he went; 
and, instead of proceeding straight forwards, turned round, and came 
again towards the hunters. One of these, riding full speed, with a 
javelin in his hand, came up to him, and ran the weapon in his side. 
He fell down, and by repeated wounds was soon despatched. 

EXERCISE CIII. 
'When the struggle of death was over, Indur was equally surprised 
and pleased on finding himself soaring high in the air, as one of 
a flight of wild geese, in their annual migration to breed in the arctic 
regions. With vast delight he sprang forward, on easy wing, through 
the immense fields of air, and surveyed beneath him extensive tracts 
of earth, perpetually varying with plains, mountains, rivers, lakes, and 
woods. At the approach of night the flock lighted on the ground, 
and fed on the green corn or grass ; and at daybreak they were again 
on wing, arranged in a regular wedge-like body, with an- experienced 
leader at their head. Thus for many days they continued their jour- 
ney, passing over countries inhabited by various nations, till at length 
they arrived in the remotest part of Lapland, and settled in a wide 
marshy lake, filled with numerous reedy islands, and surrounded on 
all sides with dark forests ef pise and birch. Here, in perfect security 
from man and hurtful animals, they followed the great business of 
breeding and providing for their young, living plentifully upon the 
insects and aquatic reptiles that abounded in this sheltered spot. 
Indur with great pleasure exercised his various powers, of swimming, 
diving, and flying ; sailing round the islands, penetrating into every 
creek and bay, and visiting the deepest recesses of the woods. He 
surveyed with astonishment the sun, instead of rising and setting, 
making a complete circle in the heavens, and cheering the earth with 
a perpetual day. Here he met with innumerable tribes of kindred 
birds, varying in size, plumage and voice, but all passing their time in 
a similar manner, and furnished with the same powers for providing 
food and a safe retreat for themselves and their young. The whole 
lake was covered with parties fishing or sporting, and resounded with 
their loud cries ; while the islands were filled with their nests, and 
new brpods of young were continually coming forth, and launching 



218 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

upon the surface of the waters. One day Indur T s curiosity having led 
him at a distance from his companions lo the woody border of the lake, 
he was near paying dear for his heedlessness - r for a fox, that lay in 
wait among the bushes, sprang upon him, and it was with the utmost 
difficulty, and not without the loss of some feathers, that he broke from 
his hold. 

Summer how drawing to an end, the vast congregation of water- 
fowl began to break up ; and large bodies of them daily took their 
way southwards, to pass the winter in climates where the waters are 
never so frozen as to become uninhabitable by the feathered race. 
The wild geese to whom [ndur belonged, proceeded with their young 
ones by long daily journeys across Sweden, the Baltic sea, Poland 
and Turkey, to Lesser Asia, and finished their journey at the cele- 
brated plains on the banks of the Cayster, a noted resort for their species 
ever since the age of Homer. Here they soon recruited from the fa- 
tigue of their march, and enjoyed themselves in the delicious climate 
till winter. This season, though here extremely mild, yet making 
the means of sustenance somewhat scarce, they were obliged to make 
foraging excursions to the cultivated lands in the neighbourhood. 
Having committed great depredations upon a field of young wheat, 
the owner spread a net on the ground, in which Indur, with several 
of his companions, had the misfortune to be caught No mercy was 
shown them, but as they were taken out, one by one, their necks were 
all broken. 

EXERCISE CIV. 
Indur was not immediately sensible of the next change he un- 
derwent, which was into a dormouse, fast asleep in his hole at the foot 
of a bush. As it was in a country where the winters are pretty 
severe, he did not awake for some weeks; when, a thaw having 
taken place, and the sun beginning to warm the earth, he unrolled 
himself one day, stretched, opened his eyes, and not being able to 
make out where he was, he roused a female companion whom he 
found by his side. When she was sufficiently awakened, and they 
both began to feel hungry, she led the way to a magazine of nuts and 
acorns, where they made a comfortable meal, and soon fell asleep again. 
This nap having lasted a few days, they awoke a second time, and 
having again eaten, they ventured to crawl to the mouth of their 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 219 

hole, where, pulling away some withered grass and leaves, they peeped 
out into the open air. After taking a turn or two in the sun, they 
grew chill, and went down again, stopping up the entrance after them. 
The cold weather returning, they took another long nap, till at length, 
spring being fairly set in, they roused in earnest, and began to make 
daily excursions abroad. Their winter stock of provisions being 
now exhausted, they were for some time reduced to great straits, 
and obliged to dig for roots and pignuts. Their fare was mended as 
the season advanced, and they made a nest near the bottom of a tree, 
where they brought up a young family. They never ranged far from 
home, nor ascended the higher branches of the tree, and passed a great 
part of their time in sleep, even during the midst of summer. When 
autumn came, they were busily employed in collecting the nuts, 
acorns, and other dry fruits that fell from the trees, and laying them 
up in their storehouse under ground. One day, as Indur was closely 
engaged in this occupation, at some distance from his dwelling, he 
was seized by a wild cat, which, after tormenting him for a time, gave 
him a gripe, and put him out of his pain. 

EXERCISE CV. 

From one of the smallest and most defenceless of animals, Indur 
found himself instantly changed into a majestic elephant, in a lofty 
forest of the isle of Ceylon. Elated with this wonderful advancement 
in the scale of creation, he stalked along with conscious dignity, and 
surveyed with pleasing wonder his own form and that of his com- 
panions, together with the rich scenery of the ever verdant woods, 
which perfumed the air with their spicy odour, and lifted their tall 
heads to the clouds. Here, fearing no injury, and not desiring to do 
any, the gigantic herd reamed at large, feeding on the green branches 
which they tore down with their trunks, bathing in deep rivers during 
the heat of the day, and reposing in the depths of the forests, reclined 
against the massy trunks of trees by night. It was long before Indur 
met with any adventure that could lead him to doubt his security. 
But one day, having penetrated into a close entangled thicket, he 
espied, lurking under the thick covert, a grim tiger, whose eyes 
flashed rage and fury. Though the tiger was one of the largest of 
his species, yet his bulk was trifling compared to that of an elephant, 
a, single foot of which seemed sufficient to crush him ; yet the fierce- 



220 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

ness and cruelty of his looks, his angry growl, and grinning teeth,, 
struck some terror into Indur. There was little time, however, for 
reflection ; for when Indur had advanced a single step, the tiger, set- 
ting up a roar, sprang to meet him, attempting to seize his lifted 
trunk. Indur was dexterous enough to receive him upon one of 
his tusks, and exerting all his strength,, threw the tiger to a great 
distance ; he was somewhat stunned by the fall, but recovering, re- 
newed the assault with redoubled fury. Indur again, and a third 
time, threw him off; after which the tiger, turning about, bounded away 
into the midst of the thicket. Indur drew back, and rejoined his com- 
panions, with some abatement in the confidence he had placed in his 
size and strength, which had not protected him. from undergoing so 
dangerous an attack. 

EXERCISE" CVI. 

Soon after, he joined the rest of the herd in an expedition beyond' 
the bounds of the forest, to make depredations on some fields of maize. 
They committed great havoc, devouring part, but tearing up and 
trampling down much more ; when the inhabitants, taking the alarm, 
assembled in great numbers, and with fierce shouts and flaming 
brands, drove them back to the woods. Not contented with this, they 
were resolved to make them pay for the mischief they had done, be- 
taking some prisoners. For this purpose, they enclosed a large space 
among the trees with strong posts and stakes, bringing it to a narrower 
and narrower compass, and ending at last in a passage only capable 
of admitting one elephant at a time. This was divided by strong cross- 
bars, which would lift up and down, into several apartments. They 
then sent out some tame female elephants, bred to the business, 
who, approaching the herd of wild ones, inveigled the males to follow 
them towards the enclosures. Indur was among the first who was de- 
coyed by their artifices ; and with some others following heedlessly, he 
got into the narrowest part of the inclosure, opposite to the passage. 
Here they stood awhile doubting whether they should go further. 
But the females leading the way, and uttering the cry of invitation, 
they ventured at length to follow. When a sufficient number was in 
the passage, the bars were let down by men placed for the purpose, 
and the elephants were fairly caught in a trap. As soon as they were 
sensible of their situation, they fell into a fit of rage, and with all their 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 221 



efforts endeavoured to break through. But the hunters throwing 
nooses over them, bound them fast with strong ropes and chains to 
the posts on each side, and thus kept them without food or sleep for 
three days ; when, being exhausted with hunger and fatigue, they 
gave signs of sufficient tameness. They were now let out one by one, 
and bound, each of them,' to two large tame elephants, with riders on 
their backs, and thus without resistance were led away close prisoners.. 
They were then put into separate stables, and by proper discipline- 
were presently rendered quite tame and gentle. 

EXERCISE CVII. 
Not long after, Indur, with five more, was sent over from Ceylon 
to the continent of India, and sold to one of the princes of the country. 
He was now trained to all the services elephants are there employed 
in : which were, to carry persons on his back in a kind of sedan or 
litter, to draw cannon, ships, and other great weights, to kneel and rise 
at command, make obeisance to his lord, and perform all the motions 
and attitudes he was ordered. Thus he lived a long time, well fed 
and caressed, clothed in costly trappings on days of ceremony, and 
contributing to the pomp of eastern royalty. At length a war broke 
out, and Indur came to be employed in a different scene. After proper 
training, he was marched, with a number of his fellows, into, the field, 
bearing on his back a small wooden tower, in which were placed some 
soldiers, with a small field-piece. They soon came in sight of the 
enemy, and both sides were drawn up for battle. Indur and the rest 
were urged forwards by their leaders, wondering at the same time at 
the scene in which they were engaged, so contrary to their nature and 
manners. Presently all was involved in smoke and fire. The ele- 
phants advancing, soon put to flight those who were drawn up before 
them ; but their, career was stopped by a battery of cannon, which 
played furiously against them. Their vast bodies offered a fair mark 
to the balls, which presently struck down some, and wounded others. 
Indur received a shot on one of his tusks, which broke it, and put him 
to such pain and affright, that, turning about, he ran with all speed 
over the plain ; and falling in with a body of their own infantry, he 
burst through, trampling down whole ranks, and filling them with 
terror and confusion. His leader having now lost all command over 
him, and finding him hurtful only to his own party, applied the sharp 



222 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

instrument he carried to the nape of his neck, and driving it in with all 
his force, pierced his spinal marrow, so that he fell lifeless to the 
ground. 

EXERCISE CVin. 

In the next stage of his existence, Indur, to his great surprise, found 
even the vast bulk of the elephant prodigiously exceeded : for he was 
now a whale of the largest species, rolling in the midst of the arctic 
seas. As he darted along, the lash of his tail made whirlpools in the 
mighty deep. When he opened his immense jaws, he drew in a flood 
of brine, which, on rising to the surface, he spouted out again in a 
rushing fountain, that rose high in the air with the noise of a mighty 
cataract. All the other inhabitants of the ocean seemed as nothing to 
him. He swallowed, almost without knowing it, whole shoals of the 
smaller kinds ; and the larger swiftly turned aside at his approach. 
"Now," he cried to himself, "whatever other evils may await me, I 
am certainly secure from the molestation of other animals ; for what is 
the creature that can dare to cope with me, or measure his strength 
with mine ? Having said this, he saw swimming near him a fish not 
a quarter of his length, armed with a dreadful row of teeth. This was 
a grampus, which directly flying upon Indur, fastened on him, and 
made his great teeth meet in his flesh. Indur roared with pain, and 
lashed the sea till it was all in a foam ; but could neither reach nor 
shake off his cruel foe. He rolled over and over, rose and sank, and 
exerted all his boasted strength; but to no purpose. At length the 
grampus quitted his hold, and left him not a little mortified with the 
adventure. This was, however, forgotten, and Indur received pleasure 
from his new situation as he roamed through the boundless fields of 
ocean, now diving to its very bottom, now shooting swiftly to the sur- 
face, and sporting with his companions in unwieldy gambols. Hav- 
ing chosen a mate, he took his course with her southwards, and in 
due time brought up two young ones, of whom he was extremely 
fond. The summer season being arrived, he more frequently than 
usual rose to the surface, and basking in the sunbeams, floated un- 
moved with a large part of his huge body above the waves. As he 
was thus one day enjoying a profound sleep, he was awakened by a 
sharp instrument penetrating deep into his back. Instantly he sprang 
away with the swiftness of lightning, and feeling the weapon still 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 223 

sticking, he dived into the recesses of the deep, and stayed there till want 
of air obliged him to ascend to the surface. Here another harpoon 
was plunged into him, the smart of which again made him fly from 
his unseen foes; but after a shorter course, he was again compelled tu 
rise, much weakened by the loss of blood, which, gushing in a torrent, 
tinged the waters as he passed. Another wound was inflicted, which 
soon brought him almost lifeless to the surface ; and the line fastened 
to the first harpoon being now pulled in, this enormous creature was 
brought, an unresisting prey, to the side of a ship, where he was soon 
quite despatched, and then cut to pieces. 

EXERCISE CIX. 
The soul of this huge carcass had next a much narrower lodging, 
for Indur was changed into a bee, which, with a great mulitude of its 
young companions, was on flight in search of a new settlement, their 
parents having driven them out of the hive, which was unable to con- 
tain them all. After a rambling excursion, the queen, by whom all 
their motions were directed, settled on the branch of a lofty tree. They 
all immediately clustered round her, and soon formed a large black 
bunch, depending from the bough. A man presently planting a lad- 
der, ascended with a bee-hive, and swept them in. After they were 
quietly settled in their new habitation, they were placed on a stand in 
the garden, along with some other colonies, and left to begin their la- 
bours. Every fine morning, as soon as the sun was up, the greater 
part of them sallied forth, and roamed over the garden and the neigh- 
bouring fields in search of fresh and fragrant flowers. They first 
collected a quantity of gluey matter, with which they lined all the 
inside of their houses. Then they brought wax, and began to make 
their cells, building them with the utmost regularity, though it was 
their first attempt, and they had no teacher. As fast as they were 
built, some were filled with liquid honey gathered from the nectaries 
of flowers : and as they filled the cells, they sealed them up with a 
thin covering of wax. In other cells the queen bee deposited her eggs, 
which were to supply a new progeny for the ensuing year. Nothing 
could be a more pleasing sight, than to behold on a sunshiny day the 
insects continually going forth to their labour, while others were as 
constantly arriving at the mouth of the hole, either with yellow balls 
of wax under their thighs, or full of the honey which they had drawn 



224 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

in with their trunks, for the puspose of spouting it out into the cells 
of the honeycomb. Indur felt much delight in this useful and active 
way of life, and was always one of the first abroad at dawn, and latest 
home in the evening. On rainy and foggy days they stayed at home, 
and employed themselves in finishing their cells, and all the necessary 
work, within doors ; and Indur, though indued with human reason, 
could not but admire the readiness with which he and the rest formed 
the most regular plans of work, all corresponding in design and execu- 
tion, guided by instinct alone. 

The end of autumn now approaching, the bees had filled their 
combs with honey ; and nothing more being to be got abroad, they 
stayed within doors, passing most of their time in sleep. • They ate of 
their provisions with great frugality ; and all their meals were made in 
public, none daring to make free with the common stock by himself. 
The owner of the hives now came and took them one by one into 
his hands, that he might judge by the weight whether or not they 
were full of honey. That in which Indur was, proved to be one of 
the heaviest ; and it was therefore resolved to take the contents. For 
this purpose, one cold night, when the bees were all fast asleep, the 
hive was placed over a hole in the ground, in which were put brim- 
stone matches set on fire. The fumes rose into the hive, and soon 
suffocated great part of the bees, and stupefied the rest, so that they all 
fell from the combs. Indur was amongst the dead. 

EXERCISE CX. 
He soon revived in the form of a young rabbit in a spacious war- 
ren. This was like a populous town ; being every where hollowed by 
burrows running deep under ground, and each inhabited by one or 
more families. In the evening the warren was covered with a vast 
number of rabbits, old and young, some feeding, others frisking about, 
and pursuing one another in wanton sport. At the least alarm, they 
all hurried into the holes nearest them ; and were in an instant safi. 
from enemies, who either could not enter their burrows, or could not 
get at them there on account of the numerous ways and turnings in 
the earth, communicating with each other, so as to afford easy means 
of escape. Indur delighted much in this secure and social life ; and 
taking a mate, was soon the father of a numerous offspring. Several 
of the little ones, however, not being sufficiently careful,, fell a pr?y 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



cither to hawks and crows, continually hovering over the warren, or 
to cats, foxes, and other wild quadrupeds, which used every art to catch 
them at a distance from their holes. Indur himself ran several ha- 
zards. He was once very near being caught by a little dog trained 
for the purpose, which kept playing round for a considerable time, not 
seeming to attend to the rabbits, till having got near, he all at once 
darted into the midst of them. Another time he received some shot 
from a sportsman who lay on the watch behind the hedge adjoining 
the warren. 

The number of rabbits here was so great, that a hard winter coming 
on, which killed most of the vegetables, or buried them deep under 
the snow, they were reduced to great straits, and many were famished 
to death. Some turnips and hay, however, which were laid for them, 
preserved the greater part. The approach of spring renewed their 
sport and pleasure ; and Indur was made the father of another family. 
One night, however, was fatal to them all. As they were sleeping, 
they were alarmed by the attack of a ferret ; and running with great 
speed to the mouth of their burrow to escape it, they were all caught 
in nets placed over their holes. Indur, with the rest, was despatched 
by a blow on the back of the neck, and his body was sent to the 
nearest market town. 

EXERCISE CXI. 

His next change was into a young mastiff, brought up in a farm- 
yard. Having nearly acquired his full size, he was sent as a present 
to a gentleman in the neighbourhood, who wanted a faithful guard 
for his house and ground. Indur presently attached himself to his 
master and all his family, and showed every mark of a noble and 
generous nature. Though fierce as a lion whenever he thought the 
persons or properties of his friends invaded, he was as gentle as a 
lamb at other times, and would patiently suffer any kind of freedoms 
from those he loved. He permitted the children of the house to lug 
him about, ride on his back, and use him as roughly as their little 
hands were capable of; never, even when hurt, showing his dis- 
pleasure further than by a low growl. He was extremely indulgent 
to all the other animals of his species in the yard ; and when abroad, 
would treat the impertinent barking of little dogs with silent con- 
15 



226 COLLOT-S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

tempt. Once, indeed, being provoked beyond bearing, not only by 
the noise, but by the snaps of a malicious whelp, he suddenly seized 
him in his open mouth ; but when the bystanders thought that the 
poor cur was going instantly to be devoured, they were equally sur- 
prised and diverted at seeing Indur go to the side of a muddy ditch, 
and drop his antagonist unhurt into the middle of it. 

He had, however, more serious conflicts to sustain. He was ac- 
customed to attend the servant on market days to the neighbouring 
town ; when it was his office to guard the provision cart, while the 
man was making his purchases in the shops. On these occasions, 
the boldest dogs in the street would sometimes make an onset in a 
body ; and while some of them were engaging Indur, others would be 
mounting the cart, and pulling down the meat baskets. Indur had 
much ado to defend himself and the provisions ; however, he never 
failed to make some of the assailants pay dearly for their impudence ; 
and by his loud barking, he summoned to his assistance his fellow- 
servant, who came in time to prevent their depredations. 

EXERCISE CXII. 

At length his courage was exerted on the most important service to 
which it could be applied. His master, returning home at night, was 
attacked near his own house by three armed ruffians. Indur heard 
his voice calling for help, and instantly flew to his relief. He seized 
one of the villains by the throat, brought him to the ground, and 
presently disabled him. His master, in the mean time, was keeping 
off the other two with a large stick ; but had received several wounds 
with a cutlass ; and one of the men had presented a pistol, and was 
just on the point of firing. At this moment, Indur, leaving his van- 
quished foe on the ground, rushed forward, and seizing the man's 
arm, made him drop the pistol. The master took it up ; on which 
the other robber fled. He now advanced to him with whom Indur 
was engaged, and fired the pistol at him. The ball broke the man's 
arm, and from thence entered the body of Indur, and mortally 
wounded him. He fell, but had the satisfaction of seeing his master 
remain lord of the field ; and the servants now coming up, made 
prisoners of the two wounded robbers. The master threw himself by 
the side of Indur, and expressed the warmest concern at the accident 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCIoES. 227 

which had made him the cause of the death of the faithful animal 
that had preserved his life. Indur died licking his hand. 

So generous a nature was now no longer to be annexed to a brutal 
form. Indur, awaking as it were from a dream, found himself again 
in the happy region he had formerly inhabited, and recommenced the 
innocent life of a Brahmin. He cherished the memory of his trans- 
migrations, and handed them down to posterity, in a relation from 
whence the preceding account has been extracted. — Barbauld. 



THE END. 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 113 431 6 



